unit:1 cell and its organelles cell division …...reynolds number, types of flow. continuity and...

Course Code Course Title Teaching Hours

CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY

UNIT:1 –CELL AND ITS ORGANELLES

Introduction to concept of cell, differentiating prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell details: plant and animal cell. Structure and functions of: cell wall and membrane, endoplasmic reticulum, mitochondria, Golgi complex, chloroplast, ribosomes, lysosomes, peroxisomes, cytoskeletal structures - Microtubules, Microfilaments and Intermediate filaments, nucleus and its composition: Nucleoplasm, nucleolus, chromatin material, Chromosomes morphology and packaging of chromatin material.

UNIT:2 –CELL DIVISION AND PROGRAMMED CELL DEATH

Cell cycle and its regulation, mitosis and meiosis, programmed cell death, function of caspase protein in cell death, activation of procapsaes. Externisic and intrinsic signaling pathways in apoptosis.

UNIT:3 -Introduction to Genetic material and DNA Replication

Organization of Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic chromosome, DNA as genetic material, Information flow in biological systems: central dogma . Structures and forms of nucleic acids – DNA and RNA. Replication of DNA, Enzymes of DNA replication, structure and function of DNA polymerases, models of replications in prokaryotes and eukaryotes, mechanism of DNA replication.

UNIT:4 Transcription & Translation process

Eukaryotic RNA polymerases, Bacterial RNA polymerase, structure and function of RNA polymerases (prokaryotes & eukaryotes), mechanism of transcription in prokaryotes and eukaryotes, transcription factors, posttranscriptional processing, transcription inhibitors, Mechanism of translation, Post translational modification, inhibitors of translation.

UNIT:5 – Gene Expression in Prokaryotes & Eukaryotes

Structure and Classification of genes, Regulation of gene expression in prokaryotes: Operon model,

gal, lac, trp Operons; positive versus negative regulation. Regulation of eukaryotic gene expression,

transcriptional control, monitoring gene expressions

TEXT BOOKS / REFERENCES:

Text books:

1. David Freifelder, 1993,Essentials of Molecular Biology , Jones and Bartlett

Publishers.

2 Alberts, Lewis, Raff, Roberts and Walter.1994. Molecular Biology of the Cell. Garland Publishing.

Reference books:

1. Brown.T.A. 2006. Genomes. Garland Science Publishers.

2. HarveyLodish, Arnold Berk, Lawrence Zipursky, Paul Matsudaira, David Baltimore

JSS Science and Technology University, Mysuru


Biochemistry and Enzyme technology

UNIT:1 Amino acid, peptides and proteins: Essential and non-essential amino acids, amino acids building blocks of proteins, classification, structure and properties of amino acids, peptide bonds. Biologically important peptides. Primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary structures of proteins. Outline of various biological functions of proteins.

UNIT:2 Nucleotides and Nucleic acids: Nucleic acid structure, Nucleotides of DNA and RNA, overview of Biosynthesis, bonding, sugar component, ribose puckering, double helix stabilization, different forms of DNA & RNA, its structural intricacies and functional aspect of them.

UNIT:3 Carbohydrates: Introduction, classification, examples of monosaccarides, disaccharides, oligosaccharides and polysaccharides, overview of their biosynthesis, various biological functions of carbohydrates, Glycoconjugates: Proteoglycans, Glycoproteins, and Glycolipids Carbohydrates as Informational Molecules: The Sugar Code.

UNIT:4 Lipids: Definition and nomenclature of fatty acids and their types, structure and biological functions of various class of lipids – Triacyl glycerol, phospholipids, glycolipids, sphingolipids, terpenoid lipids, steroids, alkyl glyceryl ethers and wax.

UNIT:5 –Vitamins, Hormones, Enzymes and Coenzymes: Classification, structure and functions of Vitamins. Classification, mechanism of action and functions of Hormones. Enzyme classification with examples Chemical nature and properties of enzyme, mechanism of enzyme action and outline of various biological functions of enzymes. Structure and functions of Coenzymes


Text books:

1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox, Fifth edition, W.H.

Freeman and company ,2009.

2. Biochemistry, by Donald Voet and Judith Voet, Third Edition,Wiley publications,2004.

Reference Book:

1. Biochemistry by J.M. Berg, J.L. Tymoczko and L. Stryer, Fifth edition, W.H. Freeman and

company,2002

ADDITIONAL LEARNING SOURCES:

and James Darnell, 1991, Molecular Cell Biology, W.H.Freeman and Company

Publishers.




Microbiology and Immunology

UNIT:1 Microscopic and pure culture techniques

Microscopic Examination: Bright-field Microscopy, Dark-field Microscopy, Phase-Contrast Microscopy, Fluorescence Microscopy, and Electron Microscopy. Microbial Techniques: Pure culture techniques, staining of microorganisms, Enumeration of microorganisms. Characterization of microorganisms Sterilization Techniques: Heat, Steam, Radiation, Filtration and Chemical.

UNIT:2 Microbial Physiology & Genetics

Microbial Nutrition: Common nutrient requirements, culture media, Microbial growth: The growth curve, factors affecting growth, measurement of growth. Bacterial genetics: Study of microbial genetics, Inheritance, Bacterial recombination, conjugation, transduction and transformation.

UNIT:3 Medical Microbiology

Common Microbial diseases and their control, Bacterial: Typhoid, Tuberculosis, Cholera, Leprosy, Syphilis, and Diarrhea, Viral: AIDS, Hepatitis, SARS, Polio, and Rabies. Fungal: Candidiasis, Mycoses.

UNIT:4 Humoral and cell mediated immunity

B- Lymphocytes and their activation, structure and function of immunoglobulins, Immunoglobulin classes and their subclasses, Monoclonal antibodies and their applications, MHC, antigen antibody interactions. Thymus derived lymphocytes (T cells), their types, classification, antigen presenting cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, langerhans cells: their origin and function. Mechanism of T cell activation, Mechanism of Phagocytosis, immuno suppression and immuno tolerance Hypersensitivity and allergic reactions, Cytokines and their role in immune response, macrophage activation and granuloma formation.

UNIT:5 Molecular Immunology

Auto antibodies in humans, pathogenic mechanisms, auto immune diseases, auto immune disorder, treatment, AIDS, Biochemistry of Cancer. Stem cell, Bone marrow and kidney transplants. Molecular diagnostics: PCR and RT- PCR based & RFLP based techniques. Gene therapy: types and uses of r-DNA construct for gene therapy, Transgenic mice development.


TEXT BOOKS:

1. Prescott, Harley and Klein, 2004, Microbiology, WCB McGraw-Hill Publishers. 2. Pelczar, Chan and Krieg, 1998, Microbiology, TATA McGraw-Hill Publishers. 3. Goldsby, R.A , Kindt T. J. and Osborne, B.A., 2006, Kuby Immunology, Freeman Publishers. 4. Peter, J. Delvis, Seamus, J. Martin, Denis, R. Burton and Ivan, M. Roitt, 2001, Roitts

Essentials of Immunology, Blackwell Publishing.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Stainer, R. L. Ingram, J. L. and Wheelis, M. L. 2007, General Microbiology, Macmillan Press Ltd.

2. Prescott and Dunn, 2006, Industrial Microbiology, WCB McGraw-Hill Publishers 3. Dulsy Fatima and Armugam, N. 2015, Immunology, Saras Publication 4. Paul, W, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2012. Fundamentals of Immunology, Lippincott

Pulishers.




BIOPROCESS ENGINEERING AND

STOICHIOMETRY

UNIT:1 – INTRODUCTION TO BASIC BIOCHEMICAL CONCEPTS

Units, dimensions and conversion of units. Phase rule, law of mass, concept of mole and molecule, normality, molality, percentage by weight, mole and volume. Continuity equation, energy equation, Henry’s law, Rault’s law. General material balance equations.

UNIT:2 – MATERIAL BALANCE FOR UNIT OPERATIONS

Material balance in distillation, absorption, extraction, crystallization, drying, mixing and

evaporation operations. Material balance involving bypass recycle and purging.

UNIT:3 -MATERIAL BALANCE FOR UNIT PROCESSES

Principles of stoichiometry. Definitions of limiting and excess reactants, fraction and

percentage conversion, yield and percentage yield. Selectivity and related problems. Fuels

and combustion, calculations involving excess air and air fuel ratio.

UNIT:4-METABOLIC THERMODYNAMICS AND DIGITAL COMPUTATION

Stoichiometry of cell growth and product formation. Elemental balances, degrees of

reduction of substrate and biomass. Yield coefficients of biomass and product formation.

Energetic analysis of microbial growth and product formation. , Numerical techniques,

Application of soft ware

UNIT:5 –ENERGY BALANCE FOR VARIOUS METABOLISM IN CELL

General energy balance equations. Heat capacity. Estimation of heat capacity for solids, liquids

gases and their mixtures. Standard heat of formation, standard heat of reaction, standard heat of

combustion, Calorific value. Biochemical equilibrium constant and conversion.


Text books:

1. Bhatt,B and Vora, S.M. ( 2004) Stoichiometry, IV Ed. Tata McGraw Hill Pub.

Reference books: 1. Stanbury, P.F..Whitkar, A. & Hall, S.J. ( 2007) Principles of Fermentation Technology, Aditya Book (P) Ltd., New Delhi

2. Shuler, M.L.and Kargi, F.(2005) Bioprocess Engineering, Prentic Hall India,




MOMENTUM TRANSFER AND

MECHANICAL OPERATIONS

UNIT:1 – INTRODUCTION TO UNIT OPERATIONS

Concepts of Unit Operations and Unit Processes. Units and dimensions. Basic and derived units.

Dimensional homogeneity. Dimensionless numbers. Similitude: geometric, dynamic and

kinematics criteria. Rayleigh’s method, Buckingham’s pi theorem. Newtonian and Non Newtonian

fluids. Power law model, Maxwell’s model and viscous models. Time dependent and time

independent models

UNIT:2 – FLUID RHEOLOGY

Fluid Definition. Pressure measurements, manometric equations, different types of monometers.

Reynolds number, types of flow. Continuity and Bernoulli’s equations, Euler’s equation. Flow

through circular and non circular conduits. Hagen Poiseuille equation. Losses through pipe and

fittings, flow through stagnant fluids. Free and hindered settling, Stoke’s law, Newton’s law, terminal

settling velocity and sedimentation. Flow past immersed bodies- drag, drag coefficient. Kozney-

karmen equation. Fluidization.

UNIT:3 - FLUID FLOW MEASUREMENT

Pipe and pipe fittings. Flow measurements: Orifice meter, venture meter, Rotometer, pitotube,

notches, weirs and other flow measuring techniques. Energy calculations. Pumps: Centrifugal and

reciprocating pumps, characteristics of centrifugal and reciprocating pumps. Valves, steam traps,

pressure regulators, Pressure gauges. Numerical problems.

UNIT:4-UNIT OPERATIONS-1

Size reduction, sieve analysis. Sedimentation, sedimentation equipment. Mixing: types of mixers,

power number and power consumptions in mixing operations.

UNIT:5 – UNIT OPERATIONS-2

Sedimentation ,Filtration: filtration equipment, constant rate and constant pressure filtration.

Centrifugation: Types of centrifuges and Numerical problems. Sedimentation


Text books:

1. Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering by H. S. Fogler, New Jersey, 2009

Reference books:

1. Elementary Principles Of Chemical Processes by R. M. Felder And R. W. Rousseau, Wiley India

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi., 2010

2.Coulson And Richardson's Chemical Engineering, Volume 2 by J. M. Coulson, J. F. Richardson, J.

R. Backhurst And J. H. Harker, Elsevier India, 2006




HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS

UNIT:1 – HEAT TRANSFER BY CONDUCTION AND CONVECTION

http://www.scilab.in/textbook_run/800





Modes of heat transfer. Conduction - Fourier’s law, steady sate heat conduction through plane wall.

Heat flow through composite plane walls, hollow cylinders and spheres. Insulation -types, critical

thickness of insulation. Extended surface fins. Classification of convection, forced and natural

convection. Individual and overall heat transfer coefficients, log mean temperature difference. Flow

arrangement in heat exchangers. Condensation - film wise and drop wise condensation. Different

types of condensers

UNIT:2 – RADIATION AND EVAPORATION

Introduction to radiation, absorptive, reflectivity, transitivity. Black body radiations, Kirchhoff’s law. Emissive power and emissivity, gray body. Steafan - Boltzmann law, Planck’s law, Wien’s displacement law. Construction and design of evaporators: capacity, steam economy, methods of increasing economy, single and multiple effect evaporators, forward feed, back ward feed and mixed feed methods. Boiling point elevation.

UNIT:3 - HEAT EXCHANGING EQUIPMENTS AND MASS TRANSFER

PRINCIPLES

Construction and design of double pipe, shell and tube, plate, and scrapped surface heat

exchangers. Mass transfer operations. Diffusion – types, Flick’s law of diffusion, measurements of

diffusivity. Mass transfer co-efficient. Dimensionless numbers.

UNIT:4- 4 DISTILLATION

Distillation: Types of distillation, simple distillation, steam distillation, azeotropic distillation,

distillation of binary mixtures, Raoult’s law. Distillation columns, McCabe Thiele method

UNIT:5 – 5 MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS

Extraction: Types of extraction (liquid-liquid and solid-liquid), super critical fluid extraction,

properties of super critical fluids, example for super critical fluids. Absorption. Adsorption – types

of adsorption, Drying, Crystallization


Text books:

1. McCabe, W.L. & Smith, J .C. and Harriot, H.P. Unit Operations in Chemical Engineering,

McGraw-Hill. 4th edition 2009

2. Treybal, Robert E. Mass Transfer Operations, McGraw-Hill Publications, New York, 1st Edition.

2008

Reference books:

1. Coulson,J.M. and Richardson, J.F. Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill Publications Vols

I &II. 2006




MICROBIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY

UNIT I:Introduction to Microbial process and Fermentation technology: Isolation, strain improvement, preservation and maintenance of industrially important microorganisms. Design and optimization of fermentation media. Microbial production of ethanol, butanol, Wine, vinegar, citric acid, lactic acid.

UNIT2: Genetic engineering of microbes: Introduction to microbial biotechnology, General principles and applications of microbial biotechnology. Gene introduction, expression and production of industrially important proteins in bacteria and Yeast, Cloning techniques, expression of cloned genes, recovery and purification of proteins.

UNIT3: Applications of genetic engineering for the production of vaccines, insecticides and whole cell products: Traditional vaccines and their problems, Impact of Biotechnology on vaccine development, sub unit vaccines, peptide vaccines. Microbial insecticides: Bacillius thuringiensis, Bacillus sphaericus, Bacillus popillae and Baculoviruses. Production of SCP, Bakers Yeast, Mushroom and Biofertilizers.

UNIT 4:Environmental Microbial Technology : Bioleaching; microorganisms in mineral recovery, leaching of iron, sulfur, gold and uranium. Microbial degradation of Xenobiotics, Genetic engineering in control of Industrial pollution, Microorganisms in removal of heavy metals from aqueous effluents, Sewage and waste water Microbiology

UNIT 5:Industrial Microbial Technology

Production of penicillin, streptomycin, tetracyclines, erythromycin, glutamic acid, lysine, tryphtophan, cyanocobalamin and riboflavin. Microbial enzymes: amylases, pectinase, lipase, protease, rennet, glucose isomerase, cellulose, penellinacylase. Microbial polysaccharides and polymers: Bacterial polysaccharides; structure and role in nature, production of xanthan gum, biosynthesis of polyesters. Flavors, microbial pigments, microbial lipids and fatty acids.


TEXT BOOKS:

1. Alexander N Glazer – Hiroshi Nikaido (2007) Microbial Biotechnology, W H Freeman & Company New York.

2. Michael J. Waiteset. el. (2001) Industrial Microbiology- Blackwell Sciences limited.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Prescott, Harley and Klein (2013), Microbiology, Mc-Graw- Hill publishers.

2. P.F. Stanbury and A. Whitaker ( 2008), Principles of fermentation technology, Pergamon

Press.




BIOINFORMATICS AND IN SILICO

DRUG DESIGNING

UNIT:1 – BIOLOGICAL DATABASES

Introduction to Bioinformatics, overview of history, scope, databases, types of databases, bibliographic databases, Biological databases, Information flow in bioinformatics, curation, annotation and quality control, flat file formats in different databases, Primary and secondary databases, nucleotide and protein sequence databases, structural databases, specialized databases, expression and proteomics databases, databases of metabolic pathways, genome databases, gene databases, RNA databases, medical databases, integrated retrieval systems.

UNIT:2 – SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT METHODS AND PHYLOGENETIC ANALYSIS

Methods of pairwise sequence alignment, Dot matrix, pair wise sequence comparison, low

complexity regions, repetitive elements Global and local alignment, significance of these

alignments, dynamic programming method, scoring matrices HSP, look up table method and

gap penalties in sequence alignment, statistical significance of alignments, PAM and BLOSUM

matrices, their comparison, database similarity searching, homology versus similarity, FASTA

and BLAST, different flavours of BLAST. Multiple sequence alignment, progressive alignment

methods, Position-Specific Scoring Matrices, Markov Model and Hidden Markov Model.

Introduction to phylogenetic analysis, molecular evolution and molecular phylogenetics, rooted

and unrooted trees, terminology, gene phylogeny versus species phylogeny, forms of tree

representation, tree-building methods, distance-based methods, character-based methods,

distance, parsimony, and maximum likelihood, tree evaluation, phylogenetic programs

(CLUSTAL W, PHYLIP).

UNIT:3 -GENE PREDICTIVE METHODS AND GENOME MAPPING

Introduction to genes, gene signals, computationally predicting genes, locating ORFs, binding sites and promoters, regulatory region finding, transcription prediction,transcription start prediction, splice site prediction programs, translation initiation sites, gene-finding strategies, gene-finding methods, gene prediction in prokaryotes, eukaryotic gene prediction, gene expression analysis, gene prediction using neural networks, assessing gene prediction programs, Performance evaluation,gene finders, software programs used in gene finding, Introduction to genome mapping, HGP, genome sequencing, genome analysis and annotation, genome sequence assembly, comparative genomics, Functional genomics: sequence-based approaches, utility of EST database in sequencing, SAGE, microarray-based approaches, comparison of SAGE and DNA microarrays, SNPs and their relevance.

UNIT:4 PROTEIN PREDICTIVE METHODS

Basics of protein structure, amino acids, peptide formation, dihedral angles hierarchy, secondary structures, tertiary structures, determination of protein three-dimensional structure, protein structure database, identification of motifs and domains in multiple sequence alignment, motif

and domain databases using regular expressions, motif and domain databases using statistical models, protein family databases, motif discovery in unaligned sequences, secondary structure prediction for globular proteins, secondary structure prediction for transmembrane proteins, coiled coil prediction, protein tertiary structure prediction, methods, homology modeling, threading and fold recognition, ab initio protein structural prediction, Protein structure visualization and comparison, visualization software available in public domain viz VMD, Rasmol, Pymol, Spdb viewer,Cn3D and Chime.

UNIT:5 – INSILICO DRUG DESIGN

Molecular modeling in drug discovery, deriving bioactive conformations, molecular docking,

quantitative structure-activity relationship (QSAR), deriving the Pharmacophoric Pattern, Receptor Mapping, Estimating Biological Activities, Ligand - Receptor Interactions: Docking softwares (AUTODOCK, HEX) Calculation of Molecular Properties and Energy Calculation


Text books:

1. Jin Xiong (2006) Essential Bioinformatics, Cambridge University Press,

2. Baxevanis A. D. and B. F. Francis Ouellette, (2001) Bioinformatics a practical guide to the

analysis of genes and proteins. Second edition, John Wiley and Sons

Reference books:

1. David W. Mount (2004). Bioinformatics sequence and Genome analysis. Second Edition,

CBS publishers and Distributors.

2. Shun Oing Ye (2008), Bioinformatics- A practical approach Chapman and Hall.




GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS

COURSE ASSESSMENT METHOD:

UNIT:1 – INTRODUCTION &STRUCTURAL GENOMICS:

Genes structure in prokaryotic and eukaryotic, Polymorphism types of polymorphism, genome sequence And data base subscription. Discovery of new genes and their functions. C-values of genomes, Macromolecular organization of prokaryotic and eukaryotic chromosomes. Organization of mitochondrial and chloroplast genome. Genome projects on E.coli. Arabidopsis and rice. Human genome project.

UNIT:2 – SEQUENCING GENOMES :

Earlysequencingefforts. Preparation of DNA for sequencing. DNA sequencing methods chemical degradation method, dideoxy method, fluorescence methods, automation In sequencing. Whole genome shotgun sequencing.

Gene variation and single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP), Expressed sequences tags (ESTs). Diagnostic genes and drugs targets. Genotypingtools - diagnostic assays and services. Comparative genomics. Functional genomics studies with model system fruit fly, yeast and C. elegans.

UNIT:3 - GENOME MANAGEMENT IN EUKARYOTES:

Cell differentiations and gene regulation. Inheritance pattern In eukaryotes. coordination of gene

expression. Gene silencing by modification of histones and DNA deacetylation and methylation

Regulation of chromatin structure– chromatin remodelling, chromosome condensation.

Interference RNA, RNA silencing, Si-RNA, applications In medicine, agriculture and functional

genomics.

UNIT:4 GENOME ANALYSIS:

Genetic and physical maps linkage maps Molecular markers: RFLP, RAPD, AFLP and

microsatellites. Methods of molecular mapping. Marker assisted selection. Map based cloning, T-

DNA and transposon tagging. Differential display RT-PCR. Micro arrays in functional genomics -

Approaches to physical mapping: FISH Telomerase as molecular markers. Gene mapping

approaches in microbes.

UNIT:5 – PROTEOMICS:

Scope and importance of proteomics. Introduction to proteins, methods of protein isolation,

purifications, quantiation. Large scale preparation of proteins. protein micro arrays, two hybrid

interactions. Mass-spec. post translational modifications, methods of measurements of m-RNA

expression. Two dimensional PAGE for protein analysis. Image analysis of 2D gels. Automation

in proteomics. Applications of proteomics analysis in health and diseases. Drug de


Text books:

1. Biotechnology by Satyanarayana,

2. Biotechnology by B.D. Singh,

Reference books:

1. Principles of Genetic manipulations by Primrose and Twymannn

2. Genome by T A. Brown




ANIMAL AND PLANT

BIOTECHNOLOGY

UNIT:1 – ANIMAL CELL CULTURE TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS

Introduction, history and scope, media for culturing cells and tissues: Composition and preparation

of various tissue culture media, their sterilization and storage, sterilization of various equipment

and apparatus, Isolation of cell lines, culturing, developing, and maintenance of different cell types,

in-vitro culture of different cell types, stem cell isolation and culture, bioreactors and their

applications in animal cell cultures.

UNIT:2 – SCALE UP AND PRESERVATION

Scale-up of animal cell culture – Factors to be considered. Scale-up of suspension cultures - Batch

reactor, continuous culture, perfusion systems. Scale-up of monolayer cultures – roller bottles,

Nunc cell factory, microcarrier cultures, organotypic culture, matrices, factors affecting culture and

perspectives, cryopreservation.

UNIT:3 - NVITRO FERTILIZATION AND ITS APPLICATIONS

Conventional methods of animal improvement, selective breeding and crossbreeding. Embryo

biotechniques for augumentation of reproductive efficiency and faster multiplication of superior

germ plasm. Super ovulation Oestrus synchronization. Embryo collection, evaluation and transfer.

Invitro maturation of oocytes. Invitro fertilisation and embryo culture. Embryo preservation.

Artificial insemination, preparation of foster mother, surgical and non-surgical methods of embryo

transfer, donor and recipient aftercare. Cloning - Micro manipulation and concept of nuclear

transfer, nuclear reprogramming and creation of Dolly. Engineered embryonic stem cell method

of transgenesis. Application of transgenic animals - biopharming, disease models, functional

knockouts.

UNIT:4 PLANT GENETIC ENGINEERING

Induction to Plant Genetic Engineering: Types of plant vectors and their use,Gene transfer

methods-Particle bombardment, electroporation, microinjection. Agrobacterium mediated

transformation – Technique and applications. Ti and Ri-plasmids as vectors. Screening and

selection of transformants – PCR and hybridization methods. Viruses as a tool to delivery foreign

DNA. Transformation of monoctos. Mechanism of transgene interaction - Transgene stability and

gene silencing. Generation and maintenance of transgenic plants

UNIT:5 –APPLICATIONS OF PLANT CELL CULTURE

Production of secondary metabolites: strategies to optimize Production of secondary metabolites,

Plant cell culture for the useful chemical production, selection of high yielding lines, elicitation,

immobilization, Biotransformation and Agrobacterium rhizogenes mediated transformation or hairy

root cultures, bioreactors for suspension culture, their types, Somaclonal and gametoclonal variants,

origin of variability, mechanism of gametic variation, selection of variants, germplasm collection and

conservation and preservation of rare plant species, Germplasm storage Short -medium term and

long term


Text books:

1. Kalyan Kumar De, Plant tissue culture (1992) New Central Book Agency (P) Ltd.

2. Ian Freshney, (2005) Culture of Animal cells, Wiley publications.

Reference books:

1. Bhojwani S.S. & Razdan M. K (1996) Plant tissue culture: Theory and Practice, Elsevier Publisher.

2. John P. Fisher, A G Mikos, Joseph D. Bronzino, (2007) Tissue Engineering, CRC Press.




MOLECULAR DIAGNOSTICS AND

THERAPEUTIC BIOTECHNOLOGY

UNIT:1 ESSENTIALS OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND DIAGNOSTICS

Normal microbial flora, Host-parasite relationships, Factors predisposing to microbial pathogenictiy, Types of infectious diseases, Nosocomial Infections, , Basics and importance of molecular biology, central dogma, Nucleic acid biochemistry, DNA biochemistry, Protein Biochemistry

UNIT:2 ANALYSIS IN MOLECULAR DIAGNOSTICS

Isolation and purification nucleic acids, Resolution and detection of nucleic acids, Molecular cloning, Hybridization techniques, Amplification of nucleic acids: PCR, Reverse Transcriptase PCR, Real Time PCR, Inverse PCR, Multiplex PCR, Nested PCR, Alu PCR, Hot-start PCR, In-situ PCR, Long PCR, Ligase Chain Reaction, DNA sequencing, Single nucleotide polymorphism: Testing DNA variation for disease association, Gene expression analysis-microarray, Methods for analysis of DNA methylation, Florescence In Situ hybridization, Laser capture microdissection.

UNIT:3 MOLECULAR DIAGNOSTICS IN DISEASES

Infectious Diseases: Molecular testing for infection caused by Streptococcus, Coliforms, Salmonella, Vibrio, Chlamydia trachomatis, Neisseria gonorrhoeae and Mycobacterium. Diagnosis of fungal infections, Major fungal diseases: Dermetophytoses, Candidiosis and Aspergillosis. Diagnosis of DNA and RNA viruses: Pox virus, Adenovirus, Hepatitis C, Cytomegalovirus, HPV, Molecular diagnosis of HIV-1. Diagnosis of protozoan diseases: Amoebiosis, Malaria, Leismaniasis. Medical Genetics: Identifying human disease genes, Cancer Genetics: Genetic basis of Neurological disorders, Molecular pathogenesis of Cardiovascular diseases.

UNIT:4 QUALITY ASSURANCE IN MOLECULAR DIAGNOSTICS

Framework for quality assurance, Verification of Molecular Assays, Standards and Standardization

of molecular diagnostics, Laboratory developed tests in molecular diagnostics, Genetic counseling

considerations in molecular diagnostics, Legal, social and ethical issues related to molecular genetic

testing.

UNIT:5 –THERAPEUTIC BIOTECHNOLOGY

Vaccines: Definition of a Vaccine, A brief history, Mechanism of action of vaccines, Production of

vaccines. Hormone related drugs: Brief history, Hormones-types: thyroid hormones, adrenal

hormones, sex hormones. Calcitonin, Parathyroid hormone, Insulin, Growth hormone, Incretins.

Stem cell therapy: Nature of stem cells, Embryonic Stem cell cultures, Preparation of stem cells from

blastocyte, Prospects and Future of regenerative medicine, Gene therapy and other Molecular based

therapeutic approaches


Text books:

1. Alberts B et al. (2008) Molecular biology of the Cell. 6th edition, Taylor and Francis

group,NY.

2. Hartl D.L and L.WJones (2009) Genetics- analysis of genes and genomes. 7th edition, Jones

and Bartlett publishers.

Reference Book:

1. Cooper G.M. and R.E. Hausman (2007). The Cell – A molecular approach 5th edition, ASM

press.

2. Primrose S.B. and R.M. Twyman (2006). Principles of Gene manipulation and Genomics. 7th

edition, Blackwell Publishing.




ANNALYTICAL TECHNIQUES AND

ADVANCED DOWNSTREAM

PROCESSING

UNIT:1 SPECTRSCOPIC TECHNIQUES

Instrumental operation based on electromagnetic radiation: Basic principle, energy, wave length, wave number and frequency. Beer-Lambert’s law, absorption and its transmittance Principle, instrumentation and applications of colorimetry, turbidometry, UV-Vis spectrophotometry, fluorimetry, Luminimetry, atomic absorption and emission spectrophotometry, IR Spectroscopy. Biosensors, mass spectroscopy

UNIT:2 CHROMATOGRAPHY

Introduction, principle, procedure and applications of – Paper Chromatography, Adsorption Chromatography, Thin Layer Chromatography (TLC), Ion-exchange Chromatography, Molecular Sieve Chromatography, Affinity Chromatography, High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC), Gas Liquid Chromatography (GLC).

UNIT:3 CENTRIFUGATION AND FILTRATION TECHNIQUES

Principles of centrifugation and types of centrifuges (batch, continuous and basket). Differential and density gradient centrifugation. Preparative and analytical ultracentrifugation, Principles and applications of dialysis, equilibrium dialysis, ultra-filtration and application

UNIT:4 OVERVIEW OF BIOSEPARATION.

Recovery of intracellular products: Cell disruption methods – physical methods (osmotic shock, grinding with abrasives, solid shear, liquid shear) – chemical methods (alkali, detergents) – enzymatic methods. Separation of cells and other insolubles from fermented broth – sedimentation

UNIT:5 ADSORPTION AND PRODUCT CRYSTALLIZATION:

Theory of adsorption. Industrial adsorbents, adsorption equilibria. Freundlich equation. Single and multi-stage operations. Unsteady stae adsorpton. Equipment for single stage and continuous contact. Product polishing: crystallization and drying. Crystallization: yields and material balances, heat effects and heat balances. Equipment for crystallization. Drying of bioproducts: methods of drying. Equipment for drying. moisture content of bioproducts. Freeze drying. Effect of thermal processing on food constituents.


TEXT BOOKS:

1. Wilson, K and J. Walker (2001) Practical Biochemistry; Principles and Techniques,

Cambridge press.

2. Upadhyayet al., (2006) Biophysical Chemistry, Principles and Techniques: Himalaya

Publishing House.

RENCE BOOKS:

1. Holme, D.J. and Pick, H. (2002)Analytical Biochemistry, Longman Cambridge press.

2. Tinoco et al., (2004), Physical Chemistry: Principles and Applications in Biological Sciences,

Prentice Hall, 4th Edition




BIOPROCESS OPTIMIZATION AND CONTROL

UNIT:1 –Modeling principles:

Fundamentals of modeling, Types of modeling, Development of dynamic differential balances, formulation of balance equations.

UNIT:2 –Bioreactor concepts and biological kinetics:

Information for bioreactor modeling, bioreactor operation, enzyme kinetics, microbial kinetics, structured kinetic models(growth associated and non growth associated).. Bioreactor modeling batch reactors, tank-type biological reactors and tubular plug-flow bioreactors.

UNIT:3 - Scale-up and scale down process and optimization:

Airlift reactors, Aeration and agitation, MassTransfer coefficient, scale-up and scale down

methods bioprocessing. Optimization of medium. Optimization techniques (analytical, gradient,

computerized) used in Bioprocesses. Online, offline and inline Optimization

UNIT:4- Automatic Bioprocess Control:

Elements of feedback control, control principles, On-off controller, Proportional (P) controller,

Proportional-Integral (PI) controller, Proportional-Derivative (PD) Controller, Proportional-

Integral-Derivative (PID) Controller. Controller tuning, Measuring principles, online and offline

sensors, Expert systems in bioprocess control. Artificial intelligence in bioprocess control.

UNIT:5 – Mass transfer in Biological Reactors:

Mass transfer by diffusion, Theories of diffusion mass transfer, mass transfer by convection,

Oxygen mass transfer methodologies in fermenters, general oxygen balances for gas-liquid

transfer. Factors affecting oxygen transfer rate, intra –particle diffusion and reaction rate, selection

criteria.


Text books:

1. Process modeling – Morton M.Denn, Longman Scientific and Technical, 1987.

2. Process dynamics, modeling and control – Ray Ogunnaike, Babatunde A Ogunnaike,

W.Harmon Roy. Oxford University Press, 1994

3. Process dynamics and control by Dale E.Seborg, Duncan A. Mellichamp, Thomas

F.Edgar, Francis J.Doyle III John Wiley & Sons 1989

Reference books:

1. Biological Reaction Engineering, I.J Dunn, E. Heinzle, J. Ingham & J.E Prenosil Wieley-

VCH, 2003

2. Bioprocess Technology: Modeling and transport phenomena- BIOTOL Series




PROCESS MODELING AND

SIMULATION

UNIT:1 –SOLUTIONS FOR VARIOUS MATHEMATICAL EQUATIONS

Solution for linear equations: Cramer’s rule, matrix inversion method, Gauss elimination method, Gauss Jordan elimination method, Jacobi method, Gauss siedel iterative method. Solution for differential equation: Runge Kutta method. Solutions for integral equations: Simpson’s 1/3 rd rule, Simpson’s 3/8 rule and Trapezoidal rule. Solutions for polynomial equation: Newton’s Raphson method.

UNIT:2 –MATHEMATICAL MODELS FOR FLUID FLOW AND ENERGY

TRANSFER

Mathematical model for continuity equation, Mathematical model for flow through Mathematical model for Steady state heat conduction through hallow cylindrical pipe, Mathematical model for unsteady state steam heating of a liquid, Mathematical model, Mathematical model for double pipe heat exchanger and numerical problems.

UNIT:3 - MATHEMATICAL MODELS FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF REACTORS AND

SEPERATION TECHNIQUES

Mathematical model for extraction (steady and unsteady state), Mathematical model for

distillation, Mathematical model for absorption , mathematical models for Batch and continuous

reactors, Mathematical model for evaporators(different effect) and Numerical problems.

UNIT:4-MATHEMATICAL MODELS FOR BIOCHEMICAL REACTIONS AND

NOVEL SEPERATIONS

Mathematical model for biochemical reactor, Mathematical model for reverse osmosis,

Mathematical model for trickle bed reactor, and Mathematical model for spiral wound membrane

module and tubular membrane module, Mathematical model for bauble column reactor and

numerical problems

UNIT:5 – SIMULATION OF BIOCHEMICAL ENGINEERING SYSTEMS.

Process simulation, Scope of process simulation, Formulation of problem Organization of

simulation packages, Professional simulation packages ,HYSIS , HYSIS products, stepwise

methodology of HYSIS usage for problems, FLUENT ,structure of program, Capabilities of

FLUENT, Using FLUENT an overview, Physical models in FLUENT and introduction to MAT

lab.


Text books:

1. J. Dunn, E. Heinzle, J. Ingham, J. E. P. fenosil “Biological Reaction Engineering: Dynamic

Modelling Fundamentals with Simulation Examples” WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.

KGaA, Weinheitn ,2003

2. J.R. Leigh, Modeling and Control of fermentation Processes, Peter Peregrinus, London,

Revised edition, 2000

Reference books:

1. B.V Babu “Process plant simulation “, Oxford university, revised edition 2004.

2. Gaikwad R.W and Dhirendra “Process modeling and simulation - WILEY , Central techno

publications 2008




ECONOMICS AND PLANT DESIGN

UNIT:1 – PROCESS DESIGN DEVELOPMENT AND GENERAL UTILITIES

Design project procedure, types of design: preliminary or quick estimate designs, flow diagrams,

detailed estimate designs, firm process designs, equipment design and specialization, scale up in

design, safety factors, specifications, materials of construction. General design considerations: site

characteristics, plant location, plant layout, plant operation and control, optimum design and design

strategy, health and safety hazards, loss prevention: HAZOPS study and fault-tree analysis.

Bioprocess validation. Water treatment, air handling systems, piping and instrumentation,

mechanical designs of process equipment. Design considerations for maintaining sterility of process

and streams. Design of utilities for cleaning of process equipment.

UNIT:2 – COST ESTIMATION AND ESTIMATION OF TOTAL PRODUCT COST

Capital investments: Fixed capital investment and working capital investment, cost index: marshall

and swift equipment cost index, engineering news record construction cost index, nelson – farrar

refinery construction cost index, chemical engineering plant cost index, estimating equipment cost

by scaling, methods for estimating capital cost: detailed item estimate, unit cost estimate, percentage

of delivered equipment cost, lang factors for approximation of capital investment, power factor

applied to plant capacity ratio, investment cost per unit of capacity, turn over ratio. Manufacturing

cost: Direct production costs, fixed charges and plant overhead cost, general expenses administrative

expenses, distribution and marketing expenses, research and development expenses, financing

expenses and gross earnings expenses, conceptual numerical.

UNIT:3 - Types of depreciations: Physical depreciation and functional depreciation, depletion,

service life, salvage value. Present value: book value or unamortized cost, market value and

replacement value. Methods for determining depreciation: straight line method, declining balance

method, double declining balance method, sum of years digits methods and sinking fund method.

Conceptual numerical. Methods for the evaluation of profitability, return on original investment,

interest rate of return, accounting for uncertainty and variations and future developments,

conceptual numerical

UNIT:4-REPORTS AND LEGAL ISSUES

Functional statement and reports: financial statements, cash flow diagrams, break even analysis.

Design reports: Types of reports, organisation of reports. Case studies. Types of taxes: Property

taxes, excise taxes, income taxes, federal income taxes, normal taxes, surtax and capital gain taxes,

tax returns, insurance: types of insurance, self insurance. Government regulations and other

restrictions

UNIT:5 – PROJECT AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Project network, CPM and PERT analysis, crashing of project network .Basics of TQM , Quality

cycles, Bench marking and ISO principles.


Text books:

1. Peters and Timmer haus,(2007) Plant Design and Economics for Chemical Engineering,

McGraw Hill Book Co.

Reference books:

1. Schwyer H. E (2009) “Process Engineering Economics” Ed.1, McGraw Hill Book Co., New York




BIOREACTION ENGINEERING AND BIOREACTOR DESIGN

UNIT:1 – KINETICS OF BIOCHEMICAL REACTIONS

Chemical kinetics, classifications of chemical reactions, rate of chemical reactions, factors

affecting rate of reactions. Rate constants, elementary and non elementary reactions,

molecularity and order of reaction, representation of elementary and non elementary

reactions, kinetic models for non elementary reactions. Temperature dependent term of rate

equation, temperature dependency from Arrhenius law, collision theory, transition state

theory and from thermodynamics, comparison of theories.

UNIT:2 – EXAMINATION OF KINETICS FOR VARIOUS BIOLOGICAL

REACTIONS

Methods for analyzing kinetic data: integral v/s differential method. Constant and variable volume batch reactor. Use of ideal gas law to calculate concentration, integrated rate equations for different order reactions. Zero order reactions, characteristics of zero order reactions. Irreversible unimolecular type first order reaction, characteristics of first order reactions. Irreversible unimolecular type second order reaction, characteristics of second order reactions. Half life method. Autocatalytic reactions. Reversible reactions, Differential method of analysis of data.

UNIT:3 - DESIGN EQUATIONS FOR IDEAL AND NON IDEAL REACTORS

Design equation for homogeneous reactors: batch, stirred tank and tubular reactors. Size

comparison of reactor systems, combination of reactor systems, optimization of output and

yield problems, consecutive parallel and mixed reactions and recycle, isothermal and non

isothermal homogeneous reactor systems. Adiabatic reactors. Batch and continuous reactors.

Non ideal reactors, residence time distribution studies, pulse and step input response of reactors,

RTD ‘s for CSTR and PFR. Calculations for conversions for first order reaction. Tank in series and

dispersion models.

UNIT:4- DESIGN OF FERMENTORS

History of industrial fermentation and its basis, general requirements of fermentation processes.

Monitor and control of fermentation process parameters. Aerobic and anaerobic fermentation

processes and their application in biotechnology industry. Solid substrate fermentation and its

application. Maintenance of aseptic condition. Different types of bioreactors: fluidized bed reactors,

tank, tubular, airlift, packed bed, hallow fiber bioreactors, photo bioreactors, and solid sate

fermenters. Bioprocess considerations using animal and plant cultures. Mass transfer coefficient in

fermenters. Design of fermenter, basic functions of fermenter for microbial cell culture. Design of

agitator, stirrer glands and bearings and Scale-up of bioreactors.

UNIT:5 – REACTION EQUILLIBRIA

Equilibrium in chemically reactive systems, evaluation of reaction equilibrium constant, effect of

temperature on equilibrium, application to system involving gaseous components, computation of

equilibrium composition.


Text books:

1. Levenspiel, O. (2006) Chemical Reaction Engineering, John Wiley, 3rd Edition.

2. Ganapathy Subramaniam (2007), Bioseparation and Bioprocessing

3. B. Sivasankar(2009) Bioseparations: Principles and Techniques

Reference books:

1. Stanbury, P.F., Whitkar, A. & Hall, S.J. (2007) Principles of Fermentation

Technology, Aditay Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi.

2. Elements Of Chemical Reaction Engineering(copy) by H. S. Fogler, Prentice Hall

International Inc., New Jersey, 2009


DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

Subject Title

http://www.flipkart.com/author/b-sivasankar



Subject

Code

Group-A

DESIGN OF RC STRUCTURES

TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND HIGHWAY DESIGN

APPLIED ELASTICITY, PLASTICITY AND FRACTURE MECHANICS

RESTORATION AND RETROFITTING OF STRUCTURES

Subject

Code

Subject Title

Group-B

ADVANCED EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT STRUCTURES

ROAD SAFETY ENGINEERING

RELIABILITY ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF STRUCTURES

CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY

FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

Group-A


Course Code Course Title

DESIGN OF RC STRUCTURES


• Internal Assessment Marks: 50

• Semester End Exam [ 100 Marks, 3 Hours]

1. Review of Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete Members - Sections Subjected to Axial Load,

Bending, Shear and Torsion.

2. Analysis and Design of Ribbed Slab and Flat slab with and without drop

3. Different loads and load combinations, analysis and design of frames

4. Behavior of Lateral Load Resisting Systems – Different lateral load structural systems. Design of

Shear Walls.

5. Selection of type, Components of Bridges, Abutments and piers, Integral bridges, Loads and stresses,

choice of bridges types, IRC Loadings and other loads on bridges, Preliminary design of Simple

Slab Bridge, T Beam Bridge and Integral bridges.


Text Books:

Varghese P.C. (2009), Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

Krishna Raju, (1986), Advanced R.C. Design, CBS Publishers, New Delhi,

Victor, J.D. (1980), Essentials of Bridge Engineering, Oxford and IBH publication Co., New Delhi.

Reference Books:

Varghese, P.C. (2010), Limit state Design of Reinforced Concrete, PHI learning Pvt. Limited, New Delhi.

Kong, F.K. and Evans R.H. (1987), Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete, ELBS Eidition, Chapman and

Hall, UK.

Park, R. and Paulay, T. (1975), Reinforced Concrete Structures, John Wiley and Sons, New York.

Karve. S.R. and Shah V.L. (1986), Limit State theory and Design of Reinforced Concrete, Pune Vidyarthi

Griha Prakashan, Pune.

Fintel, M. (1974), Handbook of Concrete Engineering, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York NY USA.

Bhavikatti, S.S. (2008), Advanced R.C.C. Design, New Age International Pvt. Limited, New

Delhi.

Taranath, B.S. (1988), Structural analysis and Design of Tall buildings, McGraw Hill Publishers, New

York.

Ponnuswamy, R. (2007), Bridge Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publication, New Delhi.

Raina, V.K. (1991), Concrete Bridge Practice - Analysis, Design and Economics, Tala McGraw-Hill,

New Delhi.

Relevant IS Codes.



TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND HIGHWAY

DESIGN




1 INTRODUCTION TO TRAFFIC ENGINEERING:

Traffic Engineering – Objectives and Scope, Characteristics of the Driver, the Pedestrian, the vehicle and

the road affecting road design and traffic flow.

2 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING STUDIES:

Data collection, Analysis and Interpretation – Classified traffic volume, Spot speed, Speed and delay,

Origin and destination and Parking studies. Sampling techniques, Sample size.

3 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF TRAFFIC FLOW AND ROADWAY CAPACITY:

Traffic flow elements, Speed, Flow and Density relationship, Concept of Passenger Car Units (PCU),

Capacity and Level of Service of Multilane Highways and Intersections

4 INTRODUCTION TO HIGHWAY GEOMETRIC DESIGN: Objectives and Scope, Highway Functional classification, Design Controls and Criteria, Design Vehicle

Specifications, Design elements – Cross section, Sight distance, Horizontal & Vertical alignment and

Intersection elements.

5 INTERSECTIONS:

Importance, Classification, Design principles, Geometric controls. Intersections at Grade –

Requirements, forms, Design considerations, Channelization elements, Rotary/Roundabouts. Grade

Separated Intersections – Warrants, Types and Layouts, Ramps, Design considerations.

6 OTHER TRAFFIC FACILITIES:

Requirements, Types and General design considerations of Auxiliary Lanes, Parking, Pedestrian,

Bicyclists, Underpasses and Overpasses, Railway crossings, Toll plaza facilities

7 TRAFFIC REGULATIONS AND CONTROL: Regulation on Vehicles, Drivers and Traffic flow, Traffic Control Devices – Types & objectives of

Markings, Signs, Signals, Islands, and Delineators. Intersection Control, Design of Signals


Text books: 1. Khanna S. K., Justo, C. E. G., and Veeraragavan (2014) “Highway Engineering”, Nem Chand and Bros.

2. L.R. Kadiyali L. R. (2011) “Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning”, Khanna Publishers

Reference books:

1. Relevant IRC codes.

2. Brian Wolshon and Anurag Pande (2016), “Traffic Engineering Handbook”, John Wiley & Sons.

3. AUSTROADS (2016) “Guide to Road Design Part 3: Geometric Design”, Austroads Inc.

4. AASHTO (2011), “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets”, American Association of

State Highway and Transportation Officials.



APPLIED ELASTICITY, PLASTICITY AND

FRACTURE MECHANICS




APPLIED ELASTICITY:

Introduction

Assumptions, Applications and Concept of Theory of Elasticity, St Venants principle, Principle of

superposition, Uniqueness theorem, Distinction between SOM and TOE

Stresses

Definition and notation of components of stress, Stress at a point, Differential equations of equilibrium,

Stresses on inclined plane, Stress transformation, Principal stresses, Maximum shear stresses, Octahedral

stresses, Plane stress, Mohr Circle of stresses, stress boundary conditions.

Strains

Definition and notation of components of strain, Strain at a point, Strain Displacement relations,

Compatibility equations, Strains on inclined plane, Strain transformation, Principal Strains, Maximum shear

Strains, Octahedral Strains, Plane Strain, Mohr Circle of Strains, Strain boundary conditions.

Stress Strain relations

Fundamental laws of theory of elasticity, Generalized Hooke's Law, Stress strain relations for 3-D problems,

Plane stress and plane strains,

Application problems Airy's stress functions, solution of two dimensional problems using polynomials, stress concentration,

Solution to problems in polar co-ordinates,

Plasticity

General concept, yield criteria, flow laws for perfectly plastic and strain hardening materials, Theories of

failure, simple application problems.

Fracture Mechanics

Introduction, Importance, Quasi brittle materials, Review of concrete behaviour in tension and compression,

Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics – Griffith and Irwin theories, Nonlinear Fracture Mechanics – Discrete

crack concept/Smeared crack concept, Size effect.


Text Books: 1. Valliappan, S., (1982), Continuum Mechanics Fundamentals, Oxford IBH, New Delhi.

2. Timosheko, S.P. and Goodier J.N., (1970), Theory of Elasticity, 3rd Edition. McGraw Hill, New York.

Reference Books: 1. Sitharam, T.G. and Govinda Raju L., (2005), Applied Elasticity, Interline Publishing, Bengaluru.

2. Srinath, L.S. (2009), Advanced Mechanics of Solids, 3rd Edition, Tata-McGraw Hill Pub, New Delhi.

3. Jirasek, M. and Bazant, Z.P., (2002), Inelastic Analysis of Structures, John Wiley and Sons, New York.

4. Karihaloo, B.L. (1995), Fracture Mechanics and Structure Concrete, Concrete Design and Construction

Series, Longman Scientific and Technical, New York.



RESTORATION AND RETROFITTING OF

STRUCTURES


• Internal Assessment Marks: 50 • Semester End Exam [ 100 Marks, 3 Hours]

Assessment of Structural Strength – Need and approach, Testing methodology, Insitu testing of Structures –

Methods. Non destructive testing of concrete structures – Schmidt hammer, Ultrasonic sounding, core

drilling, probes. Assessment of carbonation and permeability testing of steel, masonry and wooden structures.

Diagnosis, damage assessment parameters for repair / restoration strategies, specification and detailing.

Repair methods for concrete structures - slabs, beams, columns and foundations.

Chemicals and materials for repair and restoration – classification – Bending agents, adhesives Grout fillers,

reinforcements polymer infrastructure fibres, etc., Tools for repairs – Drills Grouting Shotcreting, Expansion

bolts.

Earthquake and dynamic load induced damages. Repair strategies, Bracing foundation isolation, dampers,

Ductility provisions.

Fire resistance – Fire rating – Fire damage assessment and restoration measures for concrete and steel

structures, Retrofitting and Strengthening of Structures, Need, Strategies and Techniques Retrofitting – steel

and concrete bridges. Retrofitting of buildings of earthquake resistance.

Special topics – Architectural Restoration – Cracks and waterproofing, Demolition of Structures.


Reference Books:

1. Allen R.T.L. and Edwards (Ed) S.C. (1987), Repair of Concrete Structures, Blackie Academic &

Professional, London.

2. Releur Workshop (1991), Testing during Concrete Construction, Chapman & Hall, London.

3. John M. Bungey, (1982), The Testing of Concrete in Structures, Survey Univ Press (Dh & Hall),

4. Newman P.E. (2001), Structural Renovation of Buildings, Methods, Details & Design Examples,

McGraw Hill, New York.

Group-B



ADVANCED EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT

STRUCTURES




1. Introduction to Structural Dynamics: Static and dynamic loads, D'Alembert's principle, types of

dynamic loads, vibration theory, simple harmonic motion, degrees of freedom, springs in series and

parallel,.

2. Response to single degree of freedom system: Undamped and damped free vibration systems,

Natural frequency of physical systems. Response to harmonic loading, response to ground motion

and vibration isolation, Transmissibility.

3. Seismology: Introduction, Cause, Earthquake waves Intensity, Magnitude, Earthquake Parameters,

Seismographs and strong motion devices, Accelerogram and Seismogram, Ground motion

parameters – Amplitude and frequency content, Influence of ground conditions on earthquake

ground motion.

4. Earthquake engineering Response spectrum concept for elastic and Inelastic response, Seismic

effects on structures, Earthquake resistant design philosophy, Architectural aspects of earthquake

resistant structures- Plan irregularity and vertical irregularity, Behavior of Masonry buildings during

earthquake, Geotechnical aspects of earthquake engineering, Seismic methods of analysis as per IS

codal provisions - Equivalent lateral force method and Dynamic analysis, Base Isolation techniques.


Text Books:

Mario Paz (1990), Structural Dynamics: Theory and Computation, 3rd Edition, Springer; USA.

Agarwal, P. and Shrikhande, M. (2015), Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures, Prentice Hall

India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

Reference Books:

Clough, R.W. and Penzin, J. (1993) Dynamics of structures, 2nd Editon, Mcgraw Hill, Civil Engineering

Series, New York.

Humar, J.L. (1990), Dynamics of Structures, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.

Chopra, A.K. (1995), Dynamics of Structures – Theory and Application to EQ Engineering, Prentice

Hall India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

Downik, D.J. (1987), Earthquake Resistant Design, John Wiley and Sons, New York.

Kramer, S.L., (1996), Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering, Prentice hall, New York.

Duggal, S. K. (2009), Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Warburton, G.B. (1976), The Dynamical Behaviour of Structures, 2nd Edition, Pergamon Press, Oxford.

IS: 1893-2002, Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures, BIS, New Delhi.



ROAD SAFETY ENGINEERING




1 INTRODUCTION:

http://www.bokus.com/cgi-bin/product_search.cgi?publisher=Prentice-Hall%20of%20India%20Pvt.Ltd





Trends in highway development, Problem of road accidents in India, Characteristics of road accidents,

Causes of accidents, Global and Indian road safety scenario, Factors responsible for success stories in

road safety, Role of highway professionals in road safety.

2 PLANNING OF ROADS FOR SAFETY: Land use planning and zoning, Development control and encroachment, Network hierarchy, Route

planning through communities, Access control, Traffic segregation, Traffic calming, Designing for safety

– road links and junctions, Traffic control devices, Road side facilities, Provisions for vulnerable road

users.

3 ACCIDENTS – INVESTIGATION, MONITORING AND EVALUATION: Accidents as the basis of Safety Analysis, Accident data and its limitations – collection, Analysis and

Interpretation, Identification and diagnosis of hazardous locations, Accident reconstruction, Accident

prediction model.

4 COUNTERMEASURES:

Engineering and Non-engineering measures, Selection, Economic appraisal and prioritizing,

Effectiveness evaluation. Traffic Control Devices, Intersection Controls, Roadside Hazard Management,

Roundabouts, Traffic Signals, Parking and Safety, Safety in Residential Streets, Street Lighting, Signs,

Markings and Delineation, Education, training and publicity

5 ROAD SAFETY AUDIT:

Concepts, aims and objectives, roles and responsibility, Procedures, Organizing and conducting a road

safety audit, Design standards, tasks, various stages of safety audits, Example and commonly identified

Issues during RSA, Road safety audit report, Responding to an audit report.

6 TRANSPORTATION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT: Traffic flow improvements, public transit, ridesharing, mobility rest areas, park-and-ride lots, bus bays,

signage, markings; ITS applications - vehicular navigation, crash avoidance system, incident

management, traffic management center, highway side communication.


Text books:

1. Highway Design and Traffic Safety Engineering Handbook by Ruediger Lamm, Basil Psarianos, Theodor

Mailaender, McGraw Hill Publishing, 1999

2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), “Highway Safety

Manual”, AASHTO, 2010

Reference books:

1. Relevant IRC codes (IRC: SP-44:1996, IRC:SP-88-2010)

2. Practical Road Safety Auditing by TMS Consultancy, Thomas Telford Limited, 2008

3. Sustainable safe road design - A practical manual by DHV Environment and Transportation, 2005



RELIABILITY ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF

STRUCTURES




CONCEPTS OF STRUCTURAL SAFETY: Design methods – Permissible Stress Method, Ultimate Load

Method, Limit State Method, Deterministic and Probabilitic design methods.

BASIC STATISTICS: Measures of Central Tendency, Measures of Central Dispersion, Data reduction,

Histograms, Sample Correlation.

PROBABILITY THEORY: Introduction, Random Events, Random Variables, Function of Random

Variables, Moments and Expectations, Common Probability Distributions – Gaussian, Log-normal and

Extremal Distributions.

BASIC STRUCTURAL RELIABILITY: Introduction, Computation of Structural Reliability,

MONTE CARLO STUDY OF STRUCTURAL SAFETY: General, Monte Carlo Method, Applications.

LEVEL 2 RELIABILITY METHODS: Introduction, Basic variables and failure surface, First-order

Second-moment Methods (FOSM) – Hasofer and Lind’s Method, Non-normal Distributions, Determination

of β for present design,

RELIABILITY BASED DESIGN: Introduction, Determination of partial safety factors, Safety Checking

Formats.


Text Books:

1. Ranganathan, R. (1990), Reliability analysis and Design of Structures, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Reference Books: 1. Benjamin, J.R. and Cornell, C.A. (1970), Probability Statistics and Decision for Civil Engineering,

McGraw Hill, New York.

2. Barrata, A. and Casciati, F. (1986), Probabilistic Methods in Structural Engineering, Chapman and Hall, London.

3. Melchers, R.E. (1999), Structural Reliability Analysis and Prediction, John Wiley & Sons, New York. 4. Ang A.H.S. and Tang W.H. (1984), Probability Concepts in Engineering Planning and Design, Vols. 1

and 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York.



CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY




STRUCTURE: Structure of Aggregate Phase, Structure of Hydrated Cement Paste - Mechanism of

Hydration - Hydration Products and Micro Structure - Voids in Cement Paste - Water in Hydrated Cement

Paste - Properties of Hydrated Cement Paste - Transition Zone in Concrete.

STRENGTH: Mechanism of Failure, Strength - Porosity Relationship, Factors Affecting Strength, Micro

Cracking - Relation Between Compressive and Tensile Strength - Other Types of Strength - Behaviour of

Concrete Under Various Stress States - Curing of Concrete – Special Curing Techniques - Testing of

Hardened Concrete - Destructive and Non-destructive Test, Servo Controlled Tests, UPV, Rebound Hammer,

Resistivity and Corrosion Tests.

DEFORMATION: Stress - Strain Relationship - Types of Elastic Moduli - Factors Affecting Modulus of

Elasticity - Determination of Static Elastic Moduli. Shrinkages, Types, Factors Affecting Shrinkage -

Mechanism of Shrinkage, Creep, Factors Influencing Creep - Relation Between Creep and Time, Mechanism

of Creep - Prediction of Creep.

DURABILITY: Permeability of Concrete, Chemical Attack, Cracking in Concrete in Sea Water, Thermal

Properties (fire and temperature) - Resistance to Wear and other Properties.

ADMIXTURES: Classification, Generation, Types, Superplasticizers, Hyperplasticizers, VMA, Rheological

Properties, Optimum Dosage of SP, Mineral Admixtures such as Fly ash, GGBFS, Metakaolin, Rice Husk

Ash etc., Properties of Concrete and Applications.

MIX DESIGN: Basic Considerations - Fundamental Aspects - Mix Design Methods - BIS and ACI.

SPECIAL CONCRETE: High Performance Concrete, Self-compacting Concrete, Geopolymer Concrete,

High Performance Fiber Reinforced Concrete, Materials and Mix Proportion – Applications, Sustainable and

green concrete – Production, Advantages and Disadvantages, Precast concrete, Repair materials and their

application in rehabilitation of structure.


Text Books:

1. Mehta, P.K. (1983), Concrete – Structure, Properties and Materials, Prentice Hall, New Jersy, USA.

2. Neville A.M. (2011), Properties of Concrete, Pearson Education Ltd., England.

Reference Books:

1. Rajamane, N.P., Nataraja, M.C., Jayalakshmi R. and Abdullah, M.M.A.B. (2017), Introduction to Basics

of Geopolymer Technology, Digital Edition, Master Builders, Chennai, India.

2. Mindess, S., Young, J.F. and Darwin, D. (2002), Concrete, Pearson, USA.

3. Hass, A.M. (1983), Precast Concrete, Design and Applications, Taylor & Francis, UK. 4. IS: 10262 (2009), Concrete Mix Proportioning – Guideline, BIS, New Delhi.

5. Relevant National, International codes, Technical Papers and Internet Information for Special Concrete.

6. Web material on sustainable and green concrete.

7. Manual of Concrete Practice (2015), ACI, USA.



FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS




1. Introduction, Historical background, Approximate method of structural analysis, Principles of virtual

displacement and minimum potential energy, Concept of Rayleigh-Ritz method and Galerkin method,

Advantages and disadvantages of FEM, Basic procedure of FEM for structural problems.

2. Finite elements for 1-D, 2-D and 3-D problems, Natural coordinates, Displacement and Shape functions

for standard elements – Bar elements, Beam elements, Truss elements, Triangular elements, Rectangular

elements, Quadrilateral elements – Basic and Higher order Elements. Degree of continuity of shape

functions – C0 and C1 Continuous functions, Lagrangean, Serendipity, Hermitian Polynomials, Pascal’s

triangle, Convergence and compatibility requirements, Patch test, Static condensation. Concept of

Isoparametric elements, sub and super parametric elements, Convergence requirements for Isoparametric

elements.

3. Derivation of element stiffness matrices for Bar, Beam, Truss and Frame elements (planar), Linear static

analysis of one dimensional problems using Linear and Quadratic bar elements, Treatment of boundary

conditions – Elimination approach and Penalty approach. Linear static analysis of continuous beams

using beam elements. Linear static analysis of pin jointed plane trusses.

4. Two dimensional problems, Derivation of element stiffness matrices and equivalent nodal force vectors

for CST elements, Analysis of plate problems using CST element, Derivation of element stiffness

matrices for 4-noded quadrilateral elements, Problems on 4-noded quadrilateral elements, Numerical

Integration – Gauss quadrature.

5. Dynamic analysis, Consistent and Lumped mass matrices in local and global coordinate systems,

Evaluation of Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Free vibration analysis.


Text Books:

1. Chandraputala, T.R. and Belegundu, A.D. (1997), Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, Prentice-Hall of India, Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi.

2. Godbole, P.N. (2013), Introduction to Finite Element Method, I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

References Books:

1. Cook, R.D., Malkus, D.S., Plesha, M.E. and Witt, R.J. (2002), Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, 4th Edition, Wiley, New York.

2. Desai, C.S. and Abel, J.F. (1972), Introduction to Finite Element Method”, CBS Publishers and

Distributors, New Delhi.

3. Krishnamurthy, C.S. (1994), Finite Element Analysis – Theory and Programming, II Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

4. Rajashekaran, S. (2003), Finite Element Analysis in Engineering Design, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 5. Rao, S.S. (2011), The Finite Element Method in Engineering, 5th Edition, Elsevier-Butterworth-

Heinemann, Boston. 6. Yang T.Y. (1986), Finite Element Structural Analysis, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 7. Zienkiewicz, O.C., Taylor, R.L. and Zhu, J.Z. (2005), The Finite Element Method: Its Basis and

Fundamentals, 6th Edition, Elsevier-Butterworth-Heinemann, Boston.

DEPARTMENT OF CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Stream B: Foundational Course

Course Code:

Course Title: ENDURING CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

Construction materials: Concrete- Hydration-microstructure -pore solution composition- control of rheology

and density in fresh concrete- concrete microstructure- deformations and crack control.

Aggregates: Introduction, Historical back ground of Light weight aggregate concrete, Artificial aggregates,

Physical properties of aggregates, Light weight aggregate concrete, Applications of light weight aggregate

concrete, Properties of green light weight aggregate concrete, Effect of size aggregate on the strength properties

of LWAC made with palm oil shells, Recycled aggregate, Pre placed aggregate concrete.

Durability tests: Chemical attack, effect of sea water on concrete, Chloride penetration, compressive strength,

Split tensile, Flexural strength, Fatigue, schmidt rebound hammer, ultrasonic pulse velocity, probe penetration,

pullout test, break off test, pull out test, test combinations, permeability to liquids and/or gases, water absorption

and sorptivity, porosity: pore spacing parameters, mechanical parameters-abrasion resistance chemical

parameters-calcium hydroxide content-degree of hydration physiochemical and electro chemical parameters-

diffusivity and conductivity- resistivity-electrical migration-rapid chloride penetration test.

Corrosion in Concrete: Corrosion in concrete and its protection, Corrosion of rebars in concrete, Influence of

fly ash on the corrosion steel bar in concrete.

Advanced Materials: Adhesives in construction industry-Acrylics, Industrial waste materials in concrete

Rapid wall panels, Moisture Barriers.

References:

1. Adam M Neville, Properties of Concrete, 5th Edition, Longman Sc and Tech Publishers, 2011

2. Kumar Mehta. P and Paulo J M Monteiro, Concrete Microstructure, Properties and Materials,

McGraw Hill, 2006.

3. Mark Alexander, Arnon Bentur and Sidney Mindess,Durability of Concrete,CRC Press.

4. Benoit Bissonnette, Luc Courard, and Andrzej Garbacz, Concrete Surface Engineering, CRC

Press,2017.

Course Code:

Course Title: ADVANCED AND SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS IN INFRASTRUCTURE

Advanced cement composites: Introduction, Infrastructure Degradation, Material Issues, and Construction Materials -

Portland Cements Aggregates, Chemical Admixtures, Mineral Admixtures.

Special concretes: High-Strength Concretes, Ultra-High-Strength Concretes, Fiber Reinforced Concretes, Self-

Compacting Concrete, High-Durability Concrete, Silica Fume Concrete, Self Compacting Concrete, Fiber Reinforced

Plastics and Concrete, Light Weight Concrete, Polymer Modified Concretes.

Composites materials for construction: Types of Steels & Alloys of Steels, Properties And Advantages of aluminium

And Its Products, Types Of Plastics, Properties & Manufacturing Process, Advantages Of Reinforced Polymers, Types

Of FRP, FRP On Different Structural Elements, Applications Of FRP. Building Materials from Agro And Industrial

Wastes.

Sustainable materials: Necessity and Importance Of Sustainable Construction Materials. Material Composition And

Properties Lighter Weight Materials, Embodied Energies And Emissions, Lifetime Energies, Heat-Absorbing Or

Releasing Materials, Using Waste In New Materials, Healthy Materials, Using Recycled Materials.

References:

1. Advanced civil infrastructure materials by Hwai Chung Wu, Woodhead Publishing Limited, First published

2006.

2. Properties of Concrete- Neville, A.M. - ELBS Edition, Longman Ltd., London-2011.

3. Concrete- P.K. Mehta, P J M Monteiro,- Prentice Hall, New Jersey (Special Student Edition by Indian Concrete

Institute Chennai)-2013.

4. Ashby, M.F. and Jones.D.R.H.H. “Engineering Materials 1: An introduction to Properties, applications and

designs”, Elsevier Publications, 2005.

5. Deucher, K.N, Korfiatis, G.P and Ezeldin, A.S, Materials for civil and Highway Engineers, Prentice Hall Inc.,

1998.

6. Mamlouk, M.S. and Zaniewski, J.P., Materials for Civil and Construction Engineers, Prentice Hall Inc., 1999

Course Code:

Course Title: RETROFITTING AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES

General: Introduction, Cause Of Deterioration Of Concrete Structures, Diagnostic Methods & Analysis, Preliminary

Investigations, Experimental Investigations Using NDT, Load Testing, Corrosion Mapping, Core Drilling And Other

Instrumental Methods Quality Assurance For Concrete Construction As Built Concrete Properties Strength, Permeability,

Thermal Properties And Cracking.

Influence on serviceability and durability: Effects due to climate, temperature, chemicals, wear and erosion, design and

construction errors, corrosion mechanism, effects of cover thickness and cracking, methods of corrosion protection,

corrosion inhibitors, corrosion resistant steels, coatings, cathodic protection.

Maintenance and repair strategies: Definitions: maintenance, repair and rehabilitation, facets of maintenance

importance of maintenance preventive measures on various aspects. inspection, assessment procedure for evaluating a

damaged structure causes of deterioration - testing techniques.

Materials for repair: Special concretes and mortars, concrete chemicals, special elements for accelerated strength gain,

expansive cement, polymer concrete, sulphur infiltrated concrete, ferro cement, fiber reinforced concrete.

Techniques for repair: Rust eliminators and polymers coating for rebar during repair foamed concrete, mortar and dry

pack, vacuum concrete, gunite and shot crete epoxy injection, mortar repair for cracks, shoring and underpinning.

References:

5. R.T.L. Allen & S.C. Edwards (Ed), “Repair of Concrete Structures”, Blackie, 1987.

6. Releur Workshop – “Testing during Concrete Construction” – Chapman & Hall, 1991,

Rexom&Maihaganom – Et FN Spon, 1986.

7. Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

8. John M. Bungey – “The Testing of Concrete in Structures, Survey Univ Press (Dh & Hall) 1982,

9. Newman P.E., “Structural Renovation of Buildings, “Methods, Details & Design Examples” – McGraw

Hill, 2001.

10. Sidney, M. Johnson “Deterioration, Maintenance and Repair of Structures”.

11. Dr. R. Jagadeesh, - “Rehabilitation of Renovation and Reconstruction Bedle”, ASCE /ACI Journal.

Course Code:

Course Title: CONSTRUCTION METHODS AND EQUIPMENTS

Construction methods: Conventional and modern methods of construction of building elements, different

stages of construction, types of form works, elements of precasting and prefabricated construction, use of

prestressing.

Construction equipments: General data on mechanized construction equipments. Construction equipments

such as cranes, hoists, mixers, vibrators, scaffolding, shuttering, conveyors, etc., their characteristics,

performance and application to the building process.Excavating equipments, Earthmoving equipments,

Conveying equipments, Hauling equipments,Power requirement, Cycle time, Resistances, output Shovel truck

performance. Performance Characteristics of equipments.Drilling, Blasting & Processing equipments. Asphalt

and concrete plants & Equipments.

References:

1. Mahesh Varma, (1987), "Construction Equipment and its Planning and Application" Metropolitan Book

Co.(P) Ltd.

2. R. L. Peurifoy, W. B. Ledbeffe, (1985), "Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods", McGraw Hill

Book Company.

3. James F. Russell, (1985), "Construction Equipment" Reston Publishing Company, Inc.

4. Prof. S. S. Ataev, (1985), “Construction Technology" Mir Publishers Moscow.

5. M. Antill and Paul W.S. Ryan, (1982), "Civil Engineering Construction" McGraw Hill Book Co ; Sydney.

6. Lindley R. Higgins, (1982), “Practical Construction Equipment Maintenance and Reference Guide" McGraw

Hill Book Company.

7. Back Volumes of Civil Engg and Construction Review, India.

Course Code:

Course Title: CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Introduction: Construction Projects- Concept, Project Categories, Characteristic of projects, project life cycle

phase.

Project Management- Project Management Function, Role of Project Manager. Organising For Construction

- Principles of organisation, type of organisation structure.

Project Feasibility Reports: Introduction, Significance in feasibility report- Technical analysis, Financial

analysis, Economic analysis, Ecological analysis, Flow diagram for feasibility study of a project.

Project planning Scope: Planning Process, Objectives, Types of Project plans, Resource Planning Process.

Scheduling : Introduction, Scheduling using Net work analysis- PERT and CPM Network, and related

problems.

Precedence Network : A-O-N Network-Logic and Precedence diagrams, advantages, Drawing A-O-N

network from A-O-A network and related problems.

Time Cost relationship: Direct and indirect cost, step in optimization of cost, related problem.

Allocation of resources: Histogram, Resource smoothening, Resource leveling and related problem.

Project updating using CPM network.

References:

1. Tenah Kwaku A. / Gvevara lose M., (1985), "Fundamentals of construction management and organization",

Rertan publishing Co. Inc.

2. Raina V.K., (1988), "Construction Management practice", Tata – McGraw Hill publishing co. Ltd.

3. George 1. Ritz, (1994), "Total Construction Project Management", McGraw - Hill Inc.

4. Sengupta B., Guha M, (1998), "Construction Management and Planning" ,McGraw Hill Companies.

5. Punmia B.C. and Khandelwal K.K., (1989), "Project Planning and Control with PERT. and CPM", Laxmi

Publication II Edn..

6. K K Chitkara, (1999), "Construction Project Management", Tata- McGraw Hill publishing co. Ltd.

7. Seetharaman. S., (1997), "Construction Engg. and Management", Umesh Publication.

8. Vaid K.N.,(1988) "Construction Safety Management" National Institute of Construction management,

Mumbai.

9. Krishna, N.V., (1983) "An Introduction to Safety Engineering and Management" OPS Publishers Limited

14, Hare street, Calcutta, first Edition.

10. David Goldsmith (1987) "Safety Management in Construction and Industry" - McGraw Hill book company.

Stream C: Advanced Course

Course Code:

Course Title: CONCRETE SURFACE ENGINEERING

Introduction: Fundamentals of surface engineering, Concept and significance of surface engineering applied

to concrete

Surface of concrete: Surface of concrete: Concepts and definitions , Concrete surface composition , Formed

concrete surface , Original finished concrete surface , Usual finishing considerations , Architectural finishing

considerations , Altered (treated) concrete surface , Analogy with interfacial transition zone , Surface concrete

defects , Effective composition of the near-to-surface layer.

Characterization of a concrete surface : Introduction , Surface profile : General characteristics of the

evaluation techniques , Concrete surface profile , Mechanical properties , Cracking , Porosity , Moisture content

, In situ techniques , Laboratory techniques , Surface composition , Chemical contamination , Aesthetics , Other

properties , Surface evenness , Electrical resistivity , Wear resistance.

Surface Preparation : Objectives, Concrete removal techniques, Hammering, Scabbling, High-pressure water

jetting, Scarification and milling, Surface preparation techniques, Manual brushing (Wire brush), Mechanical

brushing (rotary wire brushes), Sandblasting, Hydro blasting, Shot blasting, Grinding, Thermal methods,

Chemical methods, Effects of preparation techniques on surface roughness, Microcracking and bruising,

Comparison and limitation of techniques, Moistening the surface, Conclusion.

Surface treatment: Types of surface treatment for concrete, Evaluation of adherence, Bond strength , Repair

and overlay materials, Traffic-Bearing Elastomeric, coatings and membranes, Assessment of bond quality,

Multilayer repaired structure, Detection of defects at the interface (non-zero-air volume defects), Detection of

bond discontinuities(non-zero-air volume defects).

References:

1. Mark Alexander, Arnon Bentur and Sidney Mindess,Durability of Concrete,CRC Press.

Benoit Bissonnette, Luc Courard, and Andrzej Garbacz, Concrete Surface Engineering, CRC Press, 2017

Course Code:

Course Title: SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES IN MASONRY STRUCTURES

Issues in Sustainability: Economic Development, Energy and building- embodied energy of building materials Use and

Carbon Emissions, Energy and Building, Sustainable Resources for Building construction, Green Buildings, affordable

housing.

Wall Construction: Materials and process: Burnt Brick Stabilized Mud Block, Adobe, Stabilized Adobe,

Concrete Blocks, rammed earth, fly ash blocks/bricks, natural stone, hollow clay blocks, types of mortars,

alternatives to river sand, Design of Walls, masonry retaining walls

Floor and Roofing systems: Process: Filler slab, composite beam and roof panels, Jack arch roofing system,

Masonry Vaults and domes, Ferro cement and ferro concrete roofing elements.

Renewable Materials: Utilization of Bamboo, construction and Demolition (C & D) Waste for sustainable

and durable housing.

References:

1. Sustainable Building Technologies-K.S.Jagadish-I.K.International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi-2019

2. Alternative building materials and Technologies- K.S.Jagadish, B.V. Venkatarama reddy, K.S. Nanjunda rao –

New age international publishers

3. Structural masonry - K.S.Jagadish

4. Design of masonry structures - A.W.Hendry - B.P.Sinha and S.R. Davis E& SN SPON-2004.

5. Brick and reinforced brick structures- P Dayartnam,P.Sarah, MEDTECH- Second edition.

6. Masonry and timber structures-A.S. Arya Nem Chand & Brothers

7. Masonry structures –Robert G Drysdale, Ahmad A Hamid, Lawrie R Baker Prentice hall -1994

Course Code:

Course Title: CONSTRUCTION ECONOMICS AND ACCOUNTING

Economics: Industrial Development - Matters related to Construction Industry- Market Demand and Supply -

Theory of Production – Economics of Scale- Cost Concepts - Theory of Costs and Break Even Analysis - Its

importance- Contracts.

Financial Accounting : Meaning and Importance - Journal, Ledger, Trial Balance and Bank Reconciliation

Statement. Preparation of financial statements Its nature, importance and interpretation.

Management Accounting: Meaning, importance and scope. Techniques or Tools of Management Accounting

- Comparative and Common sized Balance sheet - Ratio analysis.

Financial Management: Meaning, scope and importance – Investment evaluation- capital budgeting, Budgets

and Budgetary Control.

Business finance: Source of finance - short term and long term – Working Capital.

References:

1. Varshney R L, Maheswari K. L., (2005), 'Managerial Economics', Sultan Chanda and Sons, New Delhi.

2. H.L. Ahuja, (2005), 'Business Economics', S. Chand and Co., New Delhi.

3. M.C. Shukla and T.S. Grewal, (2002), 'Advanced Accounts', S.Chand and Co., New Delhi.

4. Pandey LM., (1998), 'financial Management', Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.

5. Khan M.Y., and Jain P.K., (1992) 'financial Management', Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Course Code:

Course Title: CONSTRUCTION QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Foundations of Total Quality Management: Understanding quality, TQM philosophy: Concept of Deming,

Juran, Crosby, Imai, Ishikawa, Taguchi, Shingo philosophies. Models and frame works.

TQM Tools: An overview of Flowcharts, Check sheets, Histogram, Cause and effect diagrams, Pareto diagram,

Scatter diagram and Control charts.

Planning: Policy, Strategy and goal deployment, Partnership and resources, Design for quality.

Performance: Measurement frame works, Self-assessment audit and review, benchmarking. Process

management, Redesign, Quality management system, Quality assurance.

People: Human resource management(Introduction only), Cultural change, Innovation and learning,

Leadership and commitment.

Implementing TQM: TQM and management of change, Planning and implementation of TQM, Sustained

improvement, TQM models in practice.

ISO 9000 quality systems, Six sigma practice. Customer-Supplier Chain, Continuous improvement. ISO 14001

quality systems.

References:

1. Oakland John S (2006) “ TQM”, Text with cases, Butterworth- Heinemann, Oxford.

2. Zairi Mohamed, (1992) "Total Quality Management For Engineers", Aditya Books, NewDelhi.

3. Goetsch David L., Davis Stanley B., (1997) "Introduction to Total Quality", Prentice Hall International Inc.

4. Feigenbaum Armand V., (1991) "Total Quality Control", McGraw Hill Inter- national Edition.

5. Dalela Suresh, Saurabh, (1997) "ISO-9000 A Manual for Total Quality Management", S.Chand, NewDelhi.

6. Logothetis N., (1997) "Managing For Total Quality", Prentice Hall India, NewDelhi.

7. Bank John, (1996) "Essence Of Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall India, New Delhi.

8. Joseph, Berk Susan, (1995) "Total Quality Management", Excel Books, Delhi.

9. Kanji Gopal K., Asher Mike (1996) “100 Methods for Total Quality Management”,Sage publications ,New

Delhi.

10. Woodside Gayle, Aurrichio Patrick (2000) “ ISO 14001,Auditing manual” Mc-graw Hill, New Delhi.

11. Bhat Sridhara K (2007) “Total Quality Management”, Himalaya Publication House, Mumbai

Course Code:

Course Title: CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL MANAGEMENT

Integrated material Management : Meaning, Functions, and Advantages. Selective Control, Codification and

Standardization. Material planning and budgeting. Price forecasting, Purchasing under uncertainties,

Purchasing Capital equipments. Source selection.

Stores management: Principles and Practice

Inventory management: Different inventory costs, Static risk model, EOQ, Practical systems, - P and Q

systems, Probability base inventory control, OR Techniques in Material Management. Statistical methods and

application of computers.

References:

1. Gopal Krishnanan P., Sundaresan M., (1992) "Material Management Integrated Approach", Prentice Hall

India, New Delhi.

2. Datta A.K., (1988) "Material Management and Inventory Control: Principles and Practice", Jaico Publishing

House, Bombay.

3. Shah N.M., (1988) "Integrated Concept of Material Management", Tata Mc Graw Hill.

4. Michael R. Leenders, Fearn, ( 1977) "Purchasing and Material Management", D.B. Tarporevale Sons and

Co., Bangalore.

5. Tersine, Richard J., (1994) "Principles of Inventory and Material Management", Prentice Hall International.

6. Zipkin, Paul H., (2000) "Foundations of Inventory Management", McGraw Hill International

DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

Stream B: Basic/Fundamental Subjects

SI. No. Subject

1. Applied Environmental Chemistry and Microbiology

2. Environmental Fluid Mechanics

3. Water and Wastewater Treatment Systems

4. Atmospheric Environmental Engineering

5. Integrated Solid Waste Management

6. Applications of Statistics in Environmental Engineering

Applied Environmental Chemistry and Microbiology

Applied Environmental Chemistry

Unit-1

Introduction-

Importance of Environmental Chemistry as applied to Environmental Engineering, Calculation of molar

masses, Determination of percent composition of compounds, Solubility and concentration units in

solution, Gas laws, Henry’s and Raoult’s law.

Types of reactions - REDOX, Balancing chemical equations, Exothermic and endothermic reactions

(determination of energy), acid/base (Calculation of pH of combined solutions), precipitation,

reversible and irreversible reactions. Concepts of equivalent mass in relation to acids, bases, salts and

oxidizing and reducing agents. Chemical equilibrium – Kc and its determination, Prediction of

equilibrium by test quotient. (Including problems).

Unit-2

Chemical kinetics –

Reaction rates, laws and orders; Half-life of a reaction; Temperature dependence and Arrhenius

equation, Catalysis, Enthalpy and entropy, Gibbs free energy.

Inorganic chemistry-

Alkanes—Simple Carbon Chains, Drawing Organic Molecules, Functional Groups, Alkenes, Alkynes,

Other Groups, Branches; Aromatic Compounds, Isomers and Congeners; Essentials of Polymer

Chemistry - Addition Polymers, Condensation Polymers, Common Polymers, Polymer Concerns.

Unit-3

Colloidal and surface chemistry-

Colloids – Types, properties and environmental significance. Colloidal dispersions in water, air and

emulsions. Theory of colloids – double layer theory, zeta potential, destabilization of colloids (Schulze

– Hardy rule) as applied to coagulation process. Absorption and adsorption process, adsorption

isotherms (Problems on isotherms).

Applied Environmental Microbiology

Unit-4

Introduction-

Microscopic flora and fauna and their importance in environmental protection, microorganisms of

importance in air, water and soil environment. Microbial enumeration techniques.

Microbial metabolism-

Metabolic activity, anabolism and catabolism, influencing parameters, microbial metabolism of toxic

chemicals and trace organics, bio concentration and bio magnification.

Bacteria: Morphology, spore formation, typical bacterial growth curve, Nutritional requirements,

Growth Models specific growth rate and generation time, numerical problems.

Algae: Occurrence, morphology, classification and environmental applications

Fungi: Classification, characteristics and environmental applications

Virus: Types, characteristics and enumeration methods.

Unit-5

Enzymes-

Classification, kinetics of enzymatic reactions, Michaelis - Menten equation, factors influencing

enzyme reactions, problems.

Recent trends-

Use of microbial consortia in water and wastewater treatment, Emerging Microbial Contaminants-

chemical and antibiotic resistant microbes, Microbes for remediation of oil and metal contaminated

sites.

References:

1. Chemistry for Environmental Engineering and Science by Sawyer C.N. & McCarty, P.L.

2. Chemistry for Environmental Engineering by Armen S. Casparian & Gergely Sirokman.

3. Microbiology for Sanitary Engineers by McKinney R.E.

4. Microbiology by Pelczar, Chan and Ried.

5. Chemistry for Environmental Engineering and Science by Sawyer C.N. and McCarty, P.L.

6. Microbiology for Environmental Scientists and Engineers by Gaudy and Gaudy.

7. Ecosystem Modeling in Theory and Practice: An Introduction with Case Histories by Mall C.A.S and Day J.W.

8. Textbook of Microbiology by Chakraborthy P.

Journal extracts

Non-predatory peer reviewed journal articles.

Science Direct/Springer/Taylor & Francis/Wiley Journals

Water Research, Colloids and Surfaces; Chemosphere, Water Research, Environmental management; Journal of

Hazardous materials; EIA review, Cleaner Production, Environmental Science and Pollution Research, etc.

American chemical society Journals

o Industrial and Engineering Chemistry Research (acs.org)

o Environmental Science and Technology (acs.org)

Environmental Fluid Mechanics

Unit-1

Properties of fluids

Fluids and Continuum, properties of Fluids, Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids: applications,

Capillarity. Newton’s law of Viscosity, Surface Tension – Numerical problem solving.

Dimensional analysis

Units, Scale effects, Dimensional Homogeneity, Methods of Analysis, Model Studies, Similitude,

Dimensionless parameters. Froude’s and Reynold’s models - Numerical problem solving.

Unit-2

Flow through open channels

Closed and open channel flow, Geometric properties. Chezy’s and Manning’s equations. Hydraulic

flow Characteristics for different cross sections, Derivations and Numerical problem solving. Specific

energy curve and its applications, Minimum specific energy and Maximum discharge, Critical flow,

Hydraulic jump in rectangular channels, Derivation with Froude number concept, Conjugate depth

relationships - Numerical problem solving.

Unit-3

Flow Measurements –

Flow Measurements - Orifices and Mouth pieces - Classification, Discharge Equations, Hydraulic

Coefficients, Equations for coefficient of velocity - Numerical problem solving.

Unit-4

Closed conduit flow-

Flow through pipes, Hydraulic and Energy gradients, Major and Minor losses in pipe flow, Head loss

due to friction -Friction factor for commercial pipes, Head loss due to sudden expansion and

contraction. Pipes in Series and Parallel, Equivalent pipe – Numerical problem solving, Moody diagram

for Pressure drop/ Flow rate computation. Electronic sensors for water and Wastewater flow

measurements.

Unit-5

Water hammer-

Pressure rise due to gradual and Sudden closure of valves in rigid and Elastic pipes, Control techniques

– Types and functions, related Numerical problem solving.

Pumps-

Types of pumps, Working principle, Characteristic curves, Priming, Work done and efficiency,

Cavitation in Centrifugal pumps, Submersible pumps, Multistage pumps, Sludge pumps, Booster

pumps and solar pumps. Numerical problem solving.

References:

1. Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics by P. N. Modi and S. M. Seth.

2. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by R. K. Bansal.

3. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines - Problems and Solutions by K. Subramanya.

4. Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machines by K. R. Arora.

5. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines by S. K. Som and G. Biswas.

Journal extracts








Water and Wastewater Treatment Systems

Unit-1

Water Sources, need for water supply schemes-types and objectives. Drinking water quality

parameters, guidelines and standards – International, national, regional and local. Population

forecasting methods, limitations and numerical problems.

Water treatment: Unit operations and processes, treatment flow sheets for different sources of water.

Design principles of aeration, sedimentation – types of settling, sedimentation with coagulation and

flocculation, pulsators, DAF, filtration and disinfection.

Miscellaneous treatment- defluoridation, water softening, arsenic removal –numerical problems.

Unit-2

Recent trends: Advances in water treatment, SCADA systems for treatment and supply, economics,

Package treatment units and patented material, implications of 24x7 supply. House service

connections – HDPE, EF tapping, Ferrule, MDPE service pipe, Control valve and water meter.

Intermittent residual chlorine boosting in the water distribution system, water quality in distribution

system. Application of nanomaterials in water treatment.

Unit-3

Need for sanitation, Urban and rural sanitation systems. Sources of domestic wastewater, Types of

sewerage systems. Characteristics of wastewater. Estimation of dry and wet weather flow, estimation

of storm water flow; simple problems.

Hydraulic design of sewers - Hydraulic formulae, self-cleansing and non-scouring velocities, hydraulic

elements curve, Design of sewers.

Sewer appurtenances – Housed drainage connection - Tee, bends, closets, traps, manholes, inverted

siphons. Materials of sewers, laying, joining and testing.

Unit-4 Unit operations and unit processes, process flow sheets. Reaction kinetics, biokinetic coefficients and

types of reactors. Unit operations - Pumps, screens, equalization, comminutor, grit chamber, oil and

grease removal, primary sedimentation tank, design criteria and examples.

Unit processes - Aerobic, Anoxic and Anaerobic systems, Suspended and attached growth systems,

activated sludge process and modifications, trickling filters, rotating biological contactors, SBR,

secondary sedimentation, design criteria and examples.

Unit-5

Sludge Treatment - Quantification and characteristics, SVI, CSI, sludge digestion–aerobic and

anaerobic, quantification of Methane, sludge thickeners, sludge drying beds, sludge filter press, design

criteria and examples.

Recent Trends in Wastewater Treatment: Decentralized wastewater treatment Systems – DeWATS,

Tertiary and advanced wastewater treatment systems

References:

1. Wastewater Engineering, Treatment and Reuse by Metcalf and Eddy.

2. Environmental Engineering by Peavy H.S, Rowe D.R and Tchobanoglous G.

3. Wastewater Treatment Plants – Planning, Design and Operation by Quasim S.R.

4. CPHEEO Manual on Wastewater Treatment (Recent Edition)

5. Peavy, H.S., Rowe, D.R., and Tchobanoglous, G., (1986), “Environmental Engineering”, McGraw Hill Book Co.

6. Viessman W, HammerM.J., Perez E.M., Chandik P.A., (2009), ‘Water supply and pollution control’ eighth edition,

PHI Learning Private Ltd., New Delhi.

7. CPHEEO manual on water supply and treatment (recent edition)

8. Weber M.J. (1974), “Physico chemical Processes”, McGraw Hill International

Journal extracts








Atmospheric Environmental Engineering

Unit-1

Introduction-

Composition and structure of the atmosphere; sources, characterization and classification of

atmospheric pollutants, air pollution episodes. Effects of air pollutants on human health, vegetation,

animals and materials and monuments. Visibility and other related atmospheric characteristics. Units

and conversions.

Unit-2

Water treatment methods –

Wind circulation, solar radiation, lapse rates, atmospheric stability conditions, wind velocity profile,

Maximum Mixing Depth, Ventilation coefficient, Temperature Inversions, plume behavior, Wind rose

diagram, general characteristics of stack emissions, heat island effect.

Air quality monitoring –

Respirable and non-respirable particulate matter. Monitoring of gaseous pollutants – CO, CO2,

Hydrocarbons, SOX and NOX, photochemical oxidants. Monitoring equipment and sampling devices –

stack sampling (Isokinetic sampling), air samplers, and gas exhaust analyzer. Air Pollution Index.

Unit-3

Pollutant dispersion modeling-

Point, line and areal sources models. Box model, Gaussian plume dispersion model – for point source

(with and without reflection), Gaussian dispersion coefficient, Pasquill and Gifford atmospheric

stability classification. ISCST3 and AERMOD model, Determination of ground level concentrations.

Infinite line source Gaussian model. Plume rise and effective stack height calculations.

Unit-4

Air pollution control equipment-

Mechanisms, Control equipment for particulate matter – gravity settling chambers, centrifugal

collectors, wet collectors, scrubbers, fabric filters, electrostatic precipitator (ESP) - Design principles

and criteria with design. Control Equipment for gaseous pollutants – adsorption, absorption,

condensation and combustion. Design principles.

Unit-5 Indoor air pollution-

Sources, indoor air contaminants, effects and control. air changes per hour (ACH), IAQ Standards.

References:

1. Air Pollution - Its Origin and Control by Wark K, Warner C.F, and Davis W.T.

2. Air Pollution by Perkins H.C.

3. Air Pollution Control Theory by Crawford M.

4. Air Pollution by Stern A.C.

5. Air Pollution: The Effects of Air Pollution by Stern A.C.

6. Environmental Engineering - A Design Approach by Sincero, A.P. and Sincero, G.A.

Journal extracts


Integrated Solid Waste Management

Unit-1

Introduction-

Sources and engineering classification, characterization, generation and quantification; Objectives,

principles, functional elements of solid waste management system – Regulatory aspects of solid waste

management, major problems. Environmental implications of open dumping, Construction debris –

management and handling, E- Waste Management, Rag pickers and their role.

Unit-2

Waste generation –

Rate of generation, frequency, storage and refuse collection, physical and chemical composition,

quantity of waste, engineering properties of waste, prediction, modelling concepts.

Collection, segregation and transport –

Handling and segregation of wastes at source, Collection (primary and secondary) and storage of

municipal solid wastes, collection equipment, transfer stations, collection route optimization and

economics, regional concepts. System dynamics

Unit-3

Waste minimization-

Reduce, recover, recycle and reuse, case study, guidelines.

Treatment of solid waste-

Refuse processing technologies. Mechanical and thermal volume reduction. Biological and chemical

techniques for energy and other resource recovery: composting, vermicomposting, termigradation,

fermentation. Incineration of solid wastes.

Unit-4

Disposal methods-

Impacts of open dumping, site investigation and selection, sanitary land filling - Types, geotechnical

considerations, design criteria and design, Liners - earthen, geo membrane, geo synthetics and geo

textiles.

Operational aspects of landfills-

Daily cover, leachate disposal, Ground Water monitoring, leachate and gas collection systems –

Design, leachate treatment. Landfill Final Cap Design and Water Balance, Modelling (HELP – Hydraulic

Evaluation of Landfill Performance), post-closure environmental monitoring; landfill remediation.

Unit-5

Recent developments in MSW reuse and disposal-

Power Generation, Blending with construction materials and Best Management Practices (BMP).

Community based waste management, Waste as a Resource concept, Public private partnership (PPP).

Role of various organizations in Solid Waste Management-

Governmental, Non-Governmental, Citizen Forums.

References:

1. Solid Waste Engineering Principles and Management Issues by Tchobanoglous G., Theissen H., and EIiassen R.

2. Handbook of Solid Waste Disposal by Pavoni J.L.

3. Environmental Engineering by Peavy, Rowe and Tchobanoglous.

4. Solid Waste Management by Mantell C.L.

5. WHO Manual on Solid Waste Management.

6. Solid Waste Engineering by Vesiland A.

7. Management of Solid Wastes in Developing Countries by Frank Flintoff.

Journal extracts








Applications of Statistics in Environmental Engineering

Unit-1

Introduction-

Sample and Population; Discrete and Continuous; Subdivisions – Descriptive, Inferential and Decision

Theory; Collection, Arranging and Presentation of data; Frequency grouping; Frequency and relative

frequency distribution; Cumulative frequency; Surge’s rule; Frequency polygon; Ogives; Problems.

Unit-2 Characteristics and distributions –

Central Tendency – Averages: Arithmetic mean (Ungrouped data and Grouped data); Median

(Ungrouped data and Grouped data); Mode (Ungrouped data and Grouped data); Skewness;

Geometric mean; Weighted mean; Moving averages – equations to river hydraulics; Problems.

Unit-3

Probability –

Basic concepts; Types – Classical approach, Relative frequency approach, Subjective approach;

Probability rules; Problems.

Probability distribution-

Binomial distribution – derivation; Poisson distribution – derivation; Normal distribution – errors,

Gauss function, Area under normal curve, Use of standard normal probability distribution table;

Problems.

Unit-4

Correlation and regression analysis-

Scatter Diagrams; Correlation coefficient; Multiple correlation coefficient; Simple linear regression;

Multiple regression equation; Estimation using regression line; Method of Least Squares; Standard

error of estimate; Problems.

Unit-5

Testing hypothesis-

Concepts basics; Null hypothesis; Level of Significance; Degrees of Freedom; Hypothesis testing of

Means; The Chi-Squared test; F distribution; Students t-test; DoE - Analysis of Variance – within

samples and between samples; Problems.

References:

1. Basic Statistical Methods for Engineers and Scientists by Adam M. Neville and John B. Kennedy.

2. Statistics for Management by Richard I. Levin and David S. Rubin.

3. Statistics for Experiments - An Introduction to Design, Data Analysis, and Model Building by George E. P. Box,

William G. Hunter, and J. Stuart Hunter.

Journal extracts








Stream C: Advanced/Specific Subjects

SI. No. Subject

1. Hybrid Wastewater Treatment Systems

2. Fundamentals and Applications of Thermodynamics in Environmental

Engineering.

3. Advanced Industrial Wastewater Treatment

4. Pollutant Transport Modelling in Environmental Systems

5. Environmental Impact Assessment of Developmental Projects

6. Toxicology and Environmental Risk Assessment

7. Biological Wastewater Treatment Systems

8. Environmental Forensics and Economics

Hybrid Wastewater Treatment Systems

Unit-1

Futuristic advanced wastewater treatment methods for treatment of domestic wastewaters and

Industrial wastewaters. Construction processes of Water/wastewater treatment facilities and Layout

systems. Spatial foot print and cost effectiveness of treatment methods. Sewer corrosion and control.

CREP standards and PCB standards for discharge.

Unit-2

Use of various units in Wastewater treatment pertaining to wastewater and sludge and conversions –

Problem solving. Wastewater parameter selection and its inter-links. Data logging, data analysis and

automation using SCADA systems. Lab scale – pilot scale – Real scale applications. Merits and demerits

of electrochemical treatment systems.

Unit-3

Post ECC Supernatant and sludge’s. Characterization and its linkages with choosing electrode material

and coagulant aid. Scale-up aspects in Electrochemical treatment systems. Two dimensional and three-

dimensional particle electrodes for wastewater treatment. Use of coagulant aid as advanced post ECC

supernatant, adsorption/biosorption for clean water reclamation for re-use. Cost aspects and formulae

– Problem analyses.

Unit-4

Post ECC Supernatant – settling and filtration of slurry. Formulae and equations; SVI, CSI, sludge settling

curve analyses, Solids flux. Toxicity tests LD50 on post ECC supernatant. Down line ECC sedimentation

tank design and filtration. Filterability aspects using various materials. Filterability equations for

estimation cake resistance and resistance to the filter medium – problem solving. Adsorption equations

– different equations applicable. Problem solving using laboratory experimental information.

Unit-5

Design of advanced hybrid/dual wastewater treatment systems – Pre-treatment, main treatment and

tertiary treatment systems involving SBR, Coagulant Aid. Adsorption (batch and column) with or without

nano-coatings. Relevant equations in adsorption for batch and continuous treatment systems.

Magnetics in adsorption processes.

Sludge characterization- Proximate analysis and ultimate analysis. Sludge analyses using analytical

equipment viz., EDS, FT-IR, AAS, ICP, XRD, SEM, TEM, particle analyzer, calorific value based on CHNSO

data. Safe sludge disposal options for reuse, recovery and reclamation.

References:

1. Richard O Mines. Principles and Practices in Environmental Engineering. 2011. Wiley Blackwel publications.

2. Wun Jern. Industrial wastewater treatment by, 2006. Prentice Hall Inc. Publications.

3. Prasanna Chandra. Projects – Planning, analysis, selection, financing, Implementation and Review. 2009, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi

4. Banga & Sharma. Industrial Organization and Engineering Economics. 2007, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.

5. Sangeeta Sharma & Binod Mishra. Communication skills for Engineers & Scientists. 2009. PHI learning Private.

Ltd. New Delhi.

6. Karia and Christian. Wastewater treatment. Recent edition.

7. Samuel D. Faust. And Osman M. Aly. Adsorption processes for Water Treatment. Recent Edition. Butterworths,

London.

Journal extracts

Non-predatory peer reviewed journal articles on water and wastewater treatment and sludge.







Fundamentals and Applications of Thermodynamics in

Environmental Engineering

Unit-1

Introduction-

Introduction to chemical reactions and kinetics and its impact on environmental components and waste

treatment systems; Units and Dimensions; Energy and forms.

Unit-2

Fundamentals of thermodynamics-

Definition of equilibrium; Laws; States; Gibbs free-energy (Temperature and Pressure); Chemical

potential.

Unit-3

Equilibrium thermodynamics-

Ideal and Non-ideal fluids; Fugacity; Dilute solutions; Henry’s and Roult’s law, Vapor pressure of

organics; Octanol-water partitioning coefficients; Activity coefficients and Solubility; Solubility

estimation of inorganics in water; Hydrophobicity; Adsorption on surfaces and interfaces.

Application of equilibrium thermodynamics-

Air-water in atmosphere and wastewater treatment systems; Soil-water in subsurface; Air-aerosol

system; Adsorption on activated carbon in wastewater treatment; Bio concentration Factor.

Unit-4

Chemical reaction kinetics-

Reaction rates, order, constants and laws; Parallel reactions; Effect of solvents on rates; Oxidation-

reduction-catalysis and photo chemical reactions: Fundamentals and environmental perspective;

Diffusion in heterogeneous (Porous soil) medium; BOD in natural streams; Oxidation and photo-

chemical reactions in wastewater treatment and natural streams; kinetics of global warming and Green

House Gas emissions, Ozone, reactions in ambient water droplets; Soil-air and Soil-water chemical

exchange.

Unit-5

Electrochemical equilibrium kinetics and thermodynamics-

Definition of electrochemistry; Oxidation and reduction reactions in EC; Electrode potential- Definition,

Temp. and pH dependencies, metal and non-metal potentials in aqueous solutions; Cell voltage in

aqueous system; Determination of electrode potential of zero charge in electrolyte solutions; Free-

energy of adsorption at electrode surfaces; Kinetics of electrode processes at electrode-electrolyte

interface; Pourbaix diagrams.

References:

1. Elements of Environmental Engineering: Thermodynamics and Kinetics by Kalliath T. Valsaraj.

2. Electrochemistry: Electrochemical Thermodynamics and Kinetics by M.D. Lechner and R. Holze.

3. Electrochemical Methods in Soil and Water Research by T.R. Yu and G.L. Ji.

4. Lectures on Electrochemical Corrosion by Marcel Pourbaix.

Journal extracts

Non-predatory peer reviewed journal articles on water and wastewater treatment.







Advanced Industrial Wastewater Treatment

Unit-1

Introduction-

Effects of Industrial Wastes on sewerage system and sewage treatment plants and receiving water

bodies. Effects of waste additions on physical and chemical properties of soil. Effluent standards and

receiving water quality standards. Different aspects and choices of various disposal alternatives

Unit-2

Waste surveys and monitoring

Industrial Waste survey - Process flow charts, condition of waste stream. Material balance, Sampling –

Grab, Composite and integrated samples. Continuous monitoring – pH, Conductivity, Biomonitoring

Unit-3

Treatment technologies for industrial effluents

Pretreatment of Industrial Wastewater – Volume reduction, Strength reduction, Neutralization,

Equalization and Proportion, Removal of Organic and inorganic dissolved solids. Wastewater Treatment

in specific industries: Distillery, Sugar, Pulp and paper, Cement, Textile, Dairy, Fertilizer, Pesticides,

Pharmaceutical.

Unit-4

Design of treatment systems and site remediation

Design of complete treatment system and disposal for industries: Distillery, Diary, Textile, paper and

pulp mill to meet P.C.B. norms. Radio Active Wastes treatment- Low activity and high activity radiation,

application of radio-active techniques for wastewater treatment. Bio-Remediation of contaminated soils

Unit-5

Environmental auditing and regulations

Environmental Auditing: Introduction, Cost of Pollution, Environmental audit solutions, Financial and

Managerial opportunities. Criminal and Regulatory liabilities

References:

1. Industrial Waste Treatment – Contemporary Practices and Vision for Future by Nelson L. Nemerow.

2. Handbook of Industrial Wastewater Management by Azad N.S.

3. Pollution Control in Process Industries by Mahajan.

4. Process Engineering for Pollution Control and Waste Minimization by Donald L. Wise and Debra J. Trantolo.

4. Industrial Water Pollution Control by Eckenfelder.

5. Environmental Bioremediation Technologies by Shree N. Singh and Rudra D. Tripathi.

Journal extracts

Non-predatory peer reviewed journal articles on water and wastewater treatment and sludge.







Pollutant Transport Modeling in Environmental Systems

Unit-1 Models as comprehensive tools in environmental management; Diffusion and dispersion; Molecular,

turbulent and shear diffusion; Fick’s laws of diffusion and convection; Turbulent and shear flow

equations.

Unit-2 Steady state water quality modeling; Models for non-conservative pollutants in rivers, 1D oxygen

balance models – Streeter Phelps equation; Critical point method; Estimation of decay and reaeration

rates; Measurement of errors in modeling. (Derivations and Problems)

Unit-3 Mixing zones in rivers; 2D analysis of pipe and diffuser outfalls; lateral mixing coefficients, critical point

method (Derivations and Problems); Dissolved oxygen models for lakes (Stratified and Completely

mixed); Eutrophication models – Nutrient loading models for rivers and lakes

Unit-4 Subsurface Water Quality Assessment: Basic one and two dimensional mass balance equations and their

analytical solutions. Impacts of point source discharges and leachate from land fill sites. Simple

problems.

Unit-5 Impact of Wastewater Application on Land: Effects of application rates, mode etc., on different types of

soils. Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR). Microbiological effects in different soils with and without

treatment of wastewater. Seasonal effects. Design problems.

References:

1. Systems Approach to Water Quality management by Thomas R.V.

2. Models for Water Quality Management by Biswas A.K.

3. Modeling and Control of River Water Quality by Rinaldi S.D, Soncini R.

4. Principles of Water Quality Management and Control by Thomann and Mueller.

5. Steven C. Chapra (1997), Surface water Quality Modeling, McGraw Hill Inc.

Journal extracts



Journals on Environmental Modeling




Environmental Impact Assessment of Developmental Projects

Unit-1

Introduction-

Environment and its interaction with human activities. Environmental imbalances, basic concepts of EIA.

Elements of EIA. Environmental attributes, Indicators – Screening and Scoping Environmental Impact

Statement (EIS).

Environmental setting-

Environmental Inventory, environmental indicators – Parameters, Indicators for terrestrial subsystems,

Indicators for aquatic subsystems, socio-economic indicators, indicators for health and nutrition.

Unit-2

Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies-

Important consideration for choosing a methodology; categorization of methodologies. Review criteria,

Environmental Management Plan (EMP). Step by step procedure for preparing on EIA. Prediction and

Assessment of Impacts on the Air Environment, on the surface water environment, on vegetation and

wild life, EIA-EMS relationship.

Unit-3

Public participation in Environmental Decision making, practical consideration in preparing EIA and

Statements, salient features of project activity. Prediction and Assessment of impacts on soil and ground

water environment; on the biological and socio-economic environment. Prediction and Assessment of

impacts on the cultural environment. Decision methods for evaluation of alternatives, public

participation.

Unit-4

Environmental Audit-

Environmental legislation, objectives Environmental Audit, types, audit protocol, evaluation of audit

data and preparation of audit report. Preparation of Impact Assessment for some industries and case

studies – standard and mandatory requirements. EIA for various civil engineering projects.

Unit-5

EIA of developmental activities-

Open cast coal mining, Chemical industry, Thermal power plant, Aluminum industry, Industrial complex,

Hazardous waste disposal sites, Accidental spills, Paper and pulp mill, Highway project, Harbor project,

Reservoir/dams.

References:

1. Environmental Impact Assessment – A Guide to Best Professional Practices by Charles H. Eccleston.

2. Environmental Impact Assessment for Developing Countries by Asit K. Biswas and S.B.C. Agarwal.

3. Environmental Impact Analysis by R.K. Jain, L.V. Urban and G.S. Stray.

4. Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies by Anjaneyulu and Valmanickam.

4. Environmental Impact Assessment by J.G. Ran and Wooten D.C.

5. A Practical Guide on Environmental Impact Assessment by Betty Bowers Mariott.

6. Introduction to Environmental Toxicology – Impacts of Chemicals upon Ecological Systems by Landis W.G and

Ming-Ho Yu.

Journal extracts








Toxicology and Environmental Risk Assessment

Unit-1 Introduction-

Significance, Applications, and Importance

Unit-2 Risk assessment

Assessment methods, Human exposure assessment, characterization of health risks. LD50 and LC50

concentrations

Unit-3 Toxicology

Exposure, toxic effects, dose response relationships, carcinogens and non-carcinogens.

Unit-4 Toxicology and epidemiology

Public health and Risk assessment, Epidemiology and its importance

Unit-5 Hazard identification, exposure and toxicity assessment, Risk characterization, risk communication,

Ecological risk assessment – Monte Carlo methods, case studies.

References:

1. Hazardous Waste Management by La Grega M.D, Buckingham P.L, Evans J.C.

2. An Applied Approach to Epidemiology and Toxicology for Engineers – Instructor’s Resource Guide by David G.M,

Haner N.B.

3. Recommended Health Based Limits in Occupational Exposure to Heavy Metals by W.H.O.

4. A text book on Primer on Toxicology Principles and Applications by Kamrin S.E.

4. Toxicology and Risk Assessment- Principles, Methods and Applications by Fan A.M, Chang L.W.

5. Environmental Toxicologyand Risks Assessment– Recent Advancement in Environmental Fate and Transport by

Prince F.T, Nancy Lane, Briq K.V.

6. Introduction to Environmental Toxicology – Impacts of Chemicals upon Ecological Systems by Landis W.G and

Ming-Ho Yu.

Journal extracts








Biological Wastewater Treatment Systems

Unit-1

Composition of wastewater

Organics & inorganics – Types and Characteristics, Nutrients, Sludges.

Microbes in biological treatment of wastewater

Organisms and their selection, Conversion of organic matter,

Microbial Growth

Stoichiometry (Anabolism & Catabolism), Kinetics (Growth, Hydrolysis, Endogenous metabolism,

Coefficients), Rate equations.

Unit-2

Biological wastewater treatment processes

Role of biological processes in wastewater treatment, Fundamentals of attached and suspended growth

system and its application.

Aerobic – Theory, Efficiency of O2 transfer, Aerobic reactions and conversions, Yield constants, Nutrients,

Impact of environmental factors on the process (Temp., O2, pH, Toxics, Nitrogen & Phosphorus), Unit

processes (ASP, TF, Lagoons, Oxidation ponds & ditches - Types, principles and design).

Anaerobic – Microbiology and biochemistry, Evaluation of biomass and microbial activity, Principles &

Designs of - Anaerobic digesters, Septic tanks, Fixed-fluidized bed reactors, Baffled & UASB reactors.

Sequencing Bath reactors – Principles and design.

Xenobiotics in wastewater and its removal.

Unit-3

Nitrogen removal

Forms and reactions, Mass balance, Stoichiometry of reactions, Nitrification (Kinetics, capacity &

potential, process in non-aerated zones, design procedure), Denitrification (Kinetics, system

configuration, capacity), Available nitrates, Determination of nitrogen removal capacity, Kinetics of high

rate ammonium oxidation, Optimization of complete and incomplete nitrogen removal, ANNAMOX

(Process, design and configuration), Nitration- ANNAMOX dual process.

Phosphorus removal

Removal mechanisms, Biological model (Enhanced cultures, Mixed cultures, denitrification of biological

phosphorus), Optimization.

Unit-4

Membrane Bio-Reactors & Moving Bed Bio-Reactors

MBBR - Configurations, carriers, Sieves & mixers, integrated fixed film, Nitrogen and phosphorus

removal, Pre & Post MBBR treatment required, Solids removal from MBBR treated effluent.

MBR – Theory, Configurations, Membranes, pre-treatment, Design considerations, Hybrid MBR with

Microbial Fuel Cells.

Odour in biological wastewater treatment

Development of malodours, Threshold concentrations, Depletion of DO and nitrate, Volatile acids,

Sulphates and hydrogen sulphide, Odour control measures (Treatment/removal of Septicity,

Compounds, Gases causing malodours).

Unit-5

Sludge bulking, scum and foam formation

Microbiology of bulking, Dependency on substrate concentration, Design based controlling, bulking in

anoxic-aerobic reactors, Control measures, Scum formation and its control, Foaming (Stiff white, Brown,

Dark brown and filamentous).

Sludge treatment and disposal

Quality and quantity, Sludge thickeners, Aerobic digesters ( Kinetics, processes, design and operation),

Anaerobic digesters (Stoichiometry, configurations, gas production, removal of volatile and organics,

nutrient balance), Natural sludge drying (Determination of percolation time, evaporation time and effect

of precipitation), Accelerated drying (Solar, combustion heating and thermal composting).

References:

1. Handbook of Biological Wastewater Treatment – Design & Optimization of Activated Sludge Systems by A.C. Van

Haandel & J.G.M. Van Der Lubbe.

2. Biological Wastewater Treatment Processes – Mass & Heat Balances by Davide Dionisi.

3. Biological Wastewater Treatment Processes – Anaerobic Reactors by Carlos Agusto.

4. Wastewater Treatment – Biological & Chemical Processes by U. Fostner, R.J. Murphy, W.H. Rulkens.

5. Biological Nutrient Removal Operation in Wastewater Treatment Plants by Water Environment Federation &

ASCE.

6. The Handbook of Water & Wastewater Microbiology by Duncan Mara & Nigel Horan.

Journal extracts








Environmental Forensics and Economics

Unit-1

Environmental Forensics-

Definition, Need for environmental forensics and Requirements; History of environmental forensics.

Field investigations and data collection-

Requirements of field investigative team, Essential observations, Source identification, Sampling

techniques and sampling plan, Site assessment report and Standard protocol.

Chemical Fingerprinting of Contaminants-

Methods for fingerprinting airborne toxins, hydrocarbons in soil and water, pathogens in water supply.

Unit-2

Application of transport models in forensics-

Contaminant modeling process, Numerical representation of problem, Model implementation and

limitations, Determination of model bias, Different models used in environmental engineering (Case

study on forensic applications).

Forensic evaluation of environmental data-

Statistical evaluation of data distribution, comparison of data sets, reviewing data analysis techniques,

Study on variance of samples and probability plots.

Unit-3

Risks in environmental forensics-

Data collection, Gaps/incomplete/fuzzy data, Exposure and pathways, Calculation of risk, Litigation.

Oil spills forensics-

Site investigation, Sampling plan for known and unknown sources, Source identification and its

methods, Application of remote sensing for oil spill forensics.

Case studies on environmental forensics-

Investigative case studies on: Water borne diseases (epidemics); Soil contamination (Industrial

effluent discharges, pesticides and fertilizers); Nuclear or radioactive episodes; Oil spills

(Ocean/sea/river, subsoil and groundwater); Urban air quality; Lake/river contamination from sewage

disposal.

Unit-4

Economics of environmental pollution–

Ecological economics, Pollution- damages, reduction and abatement policies, property rights for

environmental resources.

Environmental resource accounting-

Resource capacity, Accounting pollution damages, Accounting methods, Deficiencies, Implications.

Unit-5

Environmental economics of waste management systems-

Economic impacts on selection of Water and wastewater treatment systems, Air pollution control

units, Waste recovery-reuse-recycle technologies.

Economics of environmental forensics-

Legal implications of environmental forensics on property sale agreements and site remediation. Role

of environmental forensics in insurance claims. Misuse of environmental forensics for extortion

(Environmental extortion).

References:

1. Environmental Forensics by R.E. Hester and R.M Harrison.

2. Environmental Forensics – Principles and Applications by Robert D. Morrison.

3. Statistics for Environmental Engineers by Paul Mac Berthouex and Linfield C. Brown.

3. Practical Environmental Forensics – Process and Case Histories by Patrick J. Sullivan, Franklin J. Agardy and

Richard K. Traub.

4. Oil Spill Environmental Forensics - Finger Printing and Source Identification by Zhendi Wang and Scott A. Stout.

5. Natural Resources and Environmental Economics by Tony Prato.

Journal extracts



Environmental Forensics, Forensic Environmental Chemistry, Journal of Environmental Economics and

Management.

Department of Industrial and Production Engineering

The following List of subjects to be offered for Ph.D course work (Stream B: Basic/ Foundation Course and

Stream C: Advanced course) for I&PE Department.

Stream B:Basic/Foundational Course Stream C:Advance Course

Sl No Subjects Sl No Subjects

1. Maintenance Engineering 1. Advanced Operation Research

2. Marketing Management 2. Layout Optimization Technique

3. Manufacturing Process 3. Just in Time Manufacturing

4. Organizational Behaviour 4. Total Quality Management

5. Recent Trends in Manufacturing 5. Composite Material

6. Theory of Elasticity 6. World Class Manufacturing

7. Finite Element method 7. Agile Manufacturing

8. CAD/CAM 8. Digital Marketing

9. Product Design and Development 9. Human Factors in Engineering

10. Lean Manufacturing 10. Welding Technique

11. Quality Control 11. Probability and Statistics

12. Non Destructive Methods 12. Additive Manufacturing

13. Non traditional Machining 13. Project Management

14. Work System Design 14. Total Productive Maintenance

15. Human Resource Management

16. Technological Management

Maintenance Engineering

MODULE -1

Maintenance systems: Maintenance objectives and scopes; Maintenance strategies & organizations;

Maintenance works; life cycle costs Preventive Maintenance: Principles of preventive maintenance, procedures

& selection; Preventive Maintenance planning, scheduling and control; Forms & resources; Maintenance work

measurement; Modeling and analysis techniques in PM and inspections; Predictive maintenance.

Computerized Maintenance Management systems: Benefits and applications; Work order systems & plant

registers; Maintenance reports, analysis and monitoring; Introduction to commercial packages Equipment

maintenance: Installation, commissioning and testing of plant equipment, checking for alignment, lubrication

and lubrication schedule; maintenance of typical rotating and process equipment systems like turbines, pumps

and fans, centrifuges, heat exchangers, boilers and pressure vessels etc.

MODULE -2

Reliability & probability Concepts: Basic concepts of probability theory and distributions, definition of

reliability, failure probability, reliability and hazard rate function, MTBF and MTTR, System reliability , series

and parallel system, redundancy.

MODULE -3

Reliability Centered Maintenance: principles of RCM, Benefits of RCM, application of RCMStep-by-step

procedure in conducting RCM analysis. The Plant Register. Functions and Failures. Failure mode and effect

analysis (FMEA). Failure consequences. Maintenance and decision making. Acturial analysis and Failure

data. Perspective loops. Default action. The RCM Decision diagram. The nature of Failure and Technical

history.

MODULE -4

Total Productive Maintenance: Goals of TPM and methodology, TPM improvement plan & procedures. The

modern role of care and asset management through TPM The use of TPM concepts consisting of Pareto ABC

analysis, Fishbone diagrams, OEE and 5S. Fault analysis.

MODULE -5

Condition Monitoring: Measurable phenomena from different Plant Items: Measurable phenomena associated

with degradation from a range of plant items including motors/generators, transformers, cables, bushings,

connectors, capacitors and circuit breakers. Fault diagnosis of Rotational Machines: Unbalance, shaft and

coupling misalignments, bent shafts, gear and bearing wear, oil whirls and shaft eccentricity.

Measurement Strategies and Techniques:

A wide range of strategies and associated technologies will be discussed including light emission (photo

multipliers, fiber optic techniquesetc.), heat emissions (IR, cameras, direct temperature measurement, etc.),

electrical charges (tan d, electrical particle discharge, etc.), force, power and vibration.

Data Processing and Analysis:

For each of the approaches, options with respect to data processing and analysis will be discussed including

digital signal processing and computational techniques. Close attention will be paid through examples of the

cost benefits and the reliability which can be placed on data with respect to formulating a view on the condition

of a give item of plant.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Practical machinery Vibration Analysis & Predictive Maintenance, C. Scheffer and P. Girdhar,, IDC

technologies, 2004.

2. Introduction to Machinery Analysis and Monitoring, John S. Mitchell, PennWell Books, 1993.

3. Machinery Vibration, Measurement and Analysis, Victor Wowk, Mc Craw Hill,1991

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Handbook of Condition Monitoring, B.K.N. Rao,1996

2. Reliability Engineering, Srinath L S,

3. Maintenance Replacement and Reliability, Jardine AKS,

4. Practical reliability engineering, Oconnor, Patrick D T

5. Reliability and Maintainability Engineering, Charles E Ebeling

6. Introduction to Reliability Engineering Lewis E.

MARKETING MANAGEMENT

01 Market, Marketing and Marketing Management: Introduction: Historical development marketing

management, tasks and philosophies, modern marketing concepts, importance of marketing in the

India Socio – economic system. Marketing System- Company marketing system – levels in

marketing environment of a company, marketing Process, marketing mix, and marketing strategy.

02 Consumer Markets and Buying Behavior: Classification of consumer products, participants in the

consumer buying decision, factors influencing consumer buying behavior, characteristics

influencing consumer behavior, major stages in buying Process.

03 Marketing Information Systems and Research: Components of marketing information system. A

sample case study towards establishing a Marketing information systems – benefits and uses

marketing research system

04 Marketing Research: Steps of marketing research, measurement of market demand. Types of

Market Research, Feasibility study for a consumer product.

05 Products Planning and Development: The concept of a product, features of a product, classification

of products, product policies – product planning and development, product line, product mix –

factors influencing change in product mix, product mix strategies, meaning of ―New – product;

major stages in new – product development product life cycle.

06 Branding, Labeling, and Packaging: Branding Reasons for branding, functions of branding features

of types of brands, kinds of brand name. Labeling - Types, functions advantages and disadvantages,

Packaging- Meaning, growth of packaging, function of Packaging, kinds of packaging, Copy rights

and Trade Marks, Patents.

07 Pricing and Distribution: Importance of Price, pricing objectives, factors affecting pricing

decisions, procedure for price determination, kinds of pricing, pricing strategies and decisions.

Distribution - Marketing channels – functions, types of channels of distribution number of channel

levels.

08 Advertising and Sales Promotion: Objectives of advertisement function of advertising,

Classification of advertisement copy, advertisement media – kinds of media, advantages of

advertising. Objectives of sales promotion, advantages sales promotion.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Philip Kotler ―Marketing Management‖, Prentice – Hall.

2. Michael R Czinkota, Marketing Management, Vikas Publishing House, REFERENCE BOOKS:

3. Wiliam J Stannon, ―Fundamentals of Marketing‖, McGraw Hill

4. R.S.N. Pillia and Mrs. Bagavathi ―Marketing‖S. Chand & Co. Ltd

5. S.A Sherlaker, ―Marketing Management‖

6. Rajagopal, marketing Management Text & Cases, Vikas Publishing House, ISBN 81-259- 0773-4

MANUFACTURING PROCESS

Module-1- CASTING PROCESS

CASTING PROCESS

Introduction: Concept of Manufacturing process, its importance.Classification of Manufacturing processes.

Introduction to Casting process &steps involved. Varieties of components produced by casting

process.Advantages& Limitations of casting process.Patterns: Definition, functions, Materials used for pattern,

various patternallowances and their importance.Classification of patterns.

Sand Moulding : Types of base sand, requirement of base sand.Moulding sand mixture ingredients for different

sand mixtures. Method used for sand moulding, such as Green sand, dry sand and skin dried moulds.

Binder: Definition, Types of binder used in moulding sand. Additives: Need, Types of additives used and their

properties

Module-2-CORES

Cores:

Definition, Need, Types. Method of making cores, Binders used,core sand moulding.

Concept of Gating & Risers.

Principle and types. Fettling and cleaning of castings.Basic steps, Casting defects, Causes,features and

remedies.

Moulding Machines:

Jolt type, Squeeze type, Jolt & Squeeze type and Sandslinger.

Special moulding Process:

Study of important moulding processes, No bake moulds, Flask less moulds, Sweep mould, CO2 mould,

Shell mould, Investment mould.

Module-3- Metal moulds

Metal moulds:

Gravity die-casting, Pressure die casting, Centrifugal casting, Squeeze Casting, Slush casting, Thixo-casting

and Continuous Casting Processes.

Melting Furnaces: Classification of furnaces. Constructional features &working principle of coke fired, oil

fired and Gas fired pit furnace, Resistance furnace, Coreless Induction furnace, Electric Arc Furnace, Cupola

furnace

Module-4-WELDING 8HRS

WELDING

Welding process:

Definition, Principles, Classification, Application, Advantages& limitations of welding.

Arc Welding:

Principle, Metal Arc welding (MAW), Flux Shielded MetalArc Welding (FSMAW), Inert Gas Welding (TIG

& MIG) Submerged ArcWelding (SAW) and Atomic Hydrogen Welding processes. (AHW)

Gas Welding:

Principle, Oxy – Acetylene welding, Chemical Reaction inGas welding, Flame characteristics. Gas torch

construction &working.Forward and backward welding

Module-5 Special types of welding

Special types of welding:

Resistance welding - principles, Seam welding, Butt welding, Spot welding and projection welding. Friction

welding, Explosive welding, Thermit welding, Laser welding and Electron beam welding.

Inspection Methods –

Methods used for Inspection of casting and welding. Visual, Magnetic particle, Fluorescent particle,

Ultrasonic, Radiography, Eddy current, Holography methods of Inspection.

ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

01 Introduction: Definition of Organization Behavior and Historical development, Environmental

context (Information Technology and Globalization, Diversity and Ethics, Design and Cultural,

Reward Systems). The Individual: Foundation of individual behavior, Personality theory and

Individual ability

02 Learning: Definition, Theories of Learning, Individual Decision Making, classical conditioning,

operant conditioning, social making, learning theory, Dreyfus Skill acquisition principles, continuous

and intermittent reinforcement.

Perception: Definition, Factors influencing perception, attribution theory, selective perception,

projection, stereotyping, Halo effect.

03 Values and Attitudes: Definition – values, Attitudes: Types of values, job satisfaction, job

involvement, professional Ethics, Organizational commitment, cognitive dissonance, Values and

attitudes- terminal values and instrumental values, formation of attitudes, sources of attitudes and

measurement of attitudes. Organizational communication types, mediums and barriers to

communication, Conflict Management: Definition of conflict, functional and Dysfunctional conflict,

stages of conflict process.

04 Motivation: Maslow‘s Hierarchy of Needs, Mc. Gregor‘s theory X and Y, Herzberg‘s motivation

Hygiene theory, David Mc Cleland three needs theory, Victor Vroom‘s expectancy theory of

motivation.

Leadership: Definition, Behavioral theories – Blake and Mounton managerial grid, Contingency

theories – Hersey - Blanchard‘s situational theory, Leadership styles –

characteristics, Transactional, transformation leaders

05 The Group: Definition and classification of groups, Factors affecting group formation, stages of

group development, Norms, Hawthorne studies, group processes, group tasks, group decision

making. Workplace stress management and job satisfaction-its relationship to productivity,

Absenteeism and employee turnover.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Organizational Behaviour - Stephen P Robbins –Pearson Education Publications

2. Organizational Behaviour – Schermerhorn - Wiley India Pvt Ltd.

3. Management of Organizational Behavious - Paul Henry and Kenneth H. Blanchard - Prentice Hall of

India.

4. Organizational Behaviour – Fred Luthans - Mc Graw Hill International Edition REFERENCE

BOOKS:

5. Organisation Behaviour – Hellriegel, Srocum and woodman, Thompson Learning - Prentice Hall

India -.

6. Organizational Behaviour – VSP Rao and others – Konark Publishers

RECENT TRENDS IN MANUFACTURING

Module I

Advanced Machining Processes Introduction Process principle Material removal mechanism Parametric

analysis and applications of processes such as ultrasonic machining (USM) Abrasive jet maching (AJM) Water

jet machining (WJM) Abrasive water jet machining (AWJM) Electrochemical machining (ECM) Electro

discharge machining (EDM) Electron beam machining (EBM) Laser beam machining (LBM) processes.

Module II

Advanced Casting Processes Metal mould casting Continuous casting Squeeze casting Vacuum mould casting

Evaporative pattern casting Ceramic shell casting, Advanced Welding Processes Details of electron beam

welding (EBW) laser beam welding (LBW) ultrasonic welding (USW) .

Module III

Advanced Metal Forming Processes Details of high energy rate forming (HERF) process Electro-magnetic

forming, explosive forming Electro-hydraulic forming Stretch forming 4 Contour roll forming.

References:

1. "Materials and Processes in Manufacturing" (8th Edition), E.P. DeGarmo, J. T Black, R.A.Kohser,Prentice

Hall of India, New Delhi (ISBN 0-02-978760).

2. "Manufacturing Science" A. Ghosh, and A.K. Mallik, Affiliated East-West Press Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.

3. "Non-traditional Manufacturing Processes", G.F.Benedict, Marcel Dekker, Inc. New York (ISBN 0-8247-

7352-7).

THEORY OF ELASTICITY

Module-1

Analysis of Stress: Definition and notation of stress, equations of equilibrium in differential form, stress

components on an arbitrary plane, equality of cross shear, stress invariants, principal stresses, octahedral stress,

planes of maximum shear, stress transformation, plane state of stress, Numerical problems

Module-2

Analysis of Strain: Displacement field, strains in term of displacement field, infinitesimal strain at a point,

engineering shear strains, strain invariants, principal strains, octahedral strains, plane state of strain,

compatibility equations, strain transformation, Numerical Problems.

Module-3

Two-Dimensional classical elasticity Problems: Cartesian co-ordinates - Relation between plane stress and

plane strain, stress functions for plane stress and plane strain state, Airy’s stress functions, Investigation of

Airy’s stress function for simple beams, bending of a narrow cantilever beam of rectangular cross section under

edge load. Bending of simply supported beam under UDL. General equations in polar coordinates, stress

distribution symmetrical about an axis, Thick wall cylinder subjected to internal and external pressures,

Numerical Problems.

Module-4

Axisymmetric and Torsion problems: Stresses in rotating discs of uniform thickness and cylinders. Torsion

of circular, elliptical and triangular bars, Prandtl’s membrane analogy, torsion of thin walled thin tubes, torsion

of thin walled multiple cell closed sections. Numerical Problems

Module-5

Thermal stress and Elastic stability: Thermo elastic stress strain relations, equations of equilibrium, thermal

stresses in thin circular discs and in long circular cylinders. Euler’s column buckling load: clamped-free,

clamped-hinged, clamped-clamped and pin-ended, Numerical Problems.

FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

Module I

Introduction to Finite Element Method : General description of the finite element method. Engineering

applications of finite element method. Boundary conditions: homogeneous and nonhomogeneous for structural,

heat transfer and fluid flow problems. Potential energy method, Rayleigh Ritz method, Galerkin’s method,

Displacement method of finite element formulation. Convergence criteria, Discretisation process, Types of

elements: 1D, 2D and 3D, Node numbering, Location of nodes. Strain displacement relations, Stress strain

relations, Plain stress and Plain strain conditions, temperature effects.

Interpolation models: Simplex, complex and multiplex elements, Linear interpolation polynomials in terms of

global coordinates 1D, 2D, 3D Simplex Elements.

Module II

One-Dimensional Elements-Analysis of Bars and Trusses, Linear interpolation polynomials in terms of

localcoordinate’s for1D, 2Delements. Higher order interpolation functions for 1D quadratic and cubic elements

in natural coordinates, , , Constant strain triangle, Four-Nodded Tetrahedral Element (TET 4), Eight-Nodded

Hexahedral Element (HEXA 3 8), 2D isoparametric element, Lagrange interpolation functions, Numerical

integration: Gaussian quadrature one point, two point formulae, 2D integrals. Fore terms: Body force, traction

force and point loads,

Numerical Problems: Solution for displacement, stress and strain in 1D straight bars, stepped bars and tapered

bars using elimination approach and penalty approach, Analysis of trusses.

Module III

Beams and Shafts: Boundary conditions, Load vector, Hermite shape functions, Beam stiffness matrix

based on Euler-Bernoulli beam theory, Examples on cantilever beams, propped cantilever beams,

Numerical problems on simply supported, fixed straight and stepped beams using direct stiffness method

with concentrated and uniformly distributed load.

Torsion of Shafts: Finite element formulation of shafts, determination of stress and twists in circular shafts.

Module IV

Heat Transfer: Basic equations of heat transfer: Energy balance equation, Rate equation: conduction,

convection, radiation, energy generated in solid, energy stored insolid, 1D finite element formulation using

vibrational method, Problems with temperature gradient and heat fluxes, heat transfer in composite sections,

straight fins.

Fluid Flow: Flow through a porous medium, Flow through pipes of uniform and stepped sections, Flow

through hydraulic net works.

Module V

Axi-symmetric Solid Elements: Derivation of stiffness matrix of axisymmetric bodies with triangular

elements, Numerical solution of axisymmetric triangular element(s) subjected to surface forces, point loads,

angular velocity, pressure vessels.

Dynamic Considerations: Formulation for point mass and distributed masses, Consistent element mass matrix

of one dimensional bar element, truss element, axisymmetric triangular element, quadrilateral element, beam

element. Lumped mass matrix of bar element, truss element, Evaluation of eigen values and eigen vectors,

Applications to bars, stepped bars, and beams.

Text Books:

1. Logan, D. L., A first course in the finite element method,6th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.

2. Rao, S. S., Finite element method in engineering, 5th Edition, Pergaman Int. Library of Science, 2010.

3. Chandrupatla T. R., Finite Elements in engineering, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2013.

Reference Books:

1. J.N.Reddy, “Finite Element Method”- McGraw -Hill International Edition.Bathe K. J. Finite Elements

Procedures, PHI.

2. Cook R. D., et al. “Conceptsand Application of Finite Elements Analysis”- 4th Edition, Wiley & Sons,

2003.

CAD/CAM

Module I

Introduction CAD/CAM

The influence of computers on manufacturing environment, Introduction of CAD/CAM, the product cycle &

CAD/CAM, automation and CAD/CAM, the common database as linkage to various computerized

applications. Product engineering, Benefits of CAD/CAM, Concurrent engineering.

Module II

Geometric Modeling

Data base: Design database concept, objectives, data structures, creation of data files in application programs

and relational database management system.

Requirement of Geometric Modeling, Geometric models, Geometric construction Methods, other modeling

methods,

curve representation, desirable modeling facilities & rapid prototyping.

3D representation of surfaces and solids; Plane surface, surfaces of revolution, Bezier surfaces, spline

surfaces, Solid entities, basic set theory.

Module III

Numerical Control

Introduction to Numerical Control, Basic components of an NC system, the NC procedure, NC coordinate

systems, NC motion control systems, applications of Numerical Control, Introduction to Computer Control in

NC, problems with conventional NC, Computer Numerical Control, Direct Numerical Control, Combined

DNC/CNC system, Adaptive control machining system,

NC Part Programming

Introduction to NC Part Programming, Manual part programming, Computer assisted part programming, the

APT (Automatically Programming Tool) language, MACRO statement in APT, Advantages of CAD/CAM in

NC programming.

Module IV

Group Technology

introduction to group technology, part families, parts classification & coding, three parts classification &

coding system, group technology machine cells, benefits of group technology

Computer integrated manufacturing (CIM) system

Introduction of CAPP, Flexible manufacturing system, benefits.

Module V

Finite Element method

Introduction, types of analysis, general procedure of finite element analysis- stiffness matrix, solution

procedure, one dimensional problem.

TEXT BOOKS

1. CAD/CAM Principles & Applications – P.N. Rao – TMH Publication

2. CAD/CAM Computer Aided Design & Manufacturing – Mikell P. Groover, Emory W. Zimmer – Pearson

Education

3. Concept and application of Finite element analysis, R D Cook, John Wiley

REFERENCES BOOKS

1. CAD/CAM Theory & Practice – Ibrahim Zied – TMH Publication

2. CAD/CAM – Surendra Kumar

PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

Module -1

Introduction: Characteristics of successful product development, Design and development of products, duration

and cost of product development, the challenges of product development.

Development Processes and Organizations: A generic development process, concept development: the front-

end process, adopting the generic product development process, the AMF development process, product

development organizations, the AMF organization.

Product Planning: The product planning process, identify opportunities. Evaluate and prioritize projects,

allocate resources and plan timing, complete pre project planning, reflect all the results and the process.

Module - 2

Identifying Customer Needs: Gather raw data from customers, interpret raw data in terms of customer needs,

organize the needs into a hierarchy, establish the relative importance of the needs and reflect on the results and

the process.

Product Specifications: What are specifications, when are specifications established, establishing target

specifications, setting the final specifications.

Concept Generation: The activity of concept generation, clarifies the problem, search externally, search

internally, explore systematically, reflect on the results and the process.

Module -3

Concept Selection: Overview of methodology, concept screening, and concept scoring,

Concept Testing: Define the purpose of concept test, choose a survey population, choose a survey format,

communicate the concept, measure customer response, interpret the result, reflect on the results and the process.

Product Architecture: What is product architecture, implications of the architecture, establishing the

architecture, variety and supply chain considerations, platform planning, related system level design issues.

Module -4

Industrial design: Assessing the need for industrial design, the impact of industrial design, industrial design

process, managing the industrial design process, assessing the quality of industrial design.

Design for Manufacturing: Definition, estimation of manufacturing cost, reducing the cost of components,

assembly, supporting production, impact of DFM on other factors.

Prototyping: Prototyping basics, principles of prototyping, technologies, planning for prototypes.

Module -5

Product Development Economics: Elements of economic analysis, base case financial mode,. Sensitive

analysis, project trade-offs, influence of qualitative factors on project success, qualitative analysis.

Managing Projects: Understanding and representing task, baseline project planning, accelerating projects,

project execution, post mortem project evaluation.

TEXT BOOK:

Product Design and Development - Karl.T.Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger - Irwin McGrawHill - 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Product Design and Manufacturing - A C Chitale and R C Gupta, PH1, - 3rd Edition, 2003.

2. New Product Development - Timjones. Butterworth Heinmann -Oxford. UCI -1997

3. Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly - GeofferyBoothroyd, Peter Dewhurst and Winston Knight

– 2002

LEAN MANUFACTURING

Module I

Just in Time Production System. JIT Logic -Pull system Japanese approach to production elimination of

waste - JIT implementation requirements JIT application for job shops, Case studies.

Module II

Kanban System:- Kanban rules supplier Kanban and sequence schedule used by supplier. Monthly information

& daily information. Later replenish system by Kanban sequenced withdrawal P system by sequence schedule

table -problems & counter measures in applying Kanban system to subcontractors -Supplier Kanban circulation

in the paternal manufacturer - structure of supplier Kanban sorting office. The rise & fall of Mass Production

Mass production, work force, organization, tools, product – logical limits of mass production, Sloan as a

necessary compliment to Ford. Case study:- Rouge Production Plant.

Module III

The Rise of Lean Production: - Birth place, concrete example, company as community, Final assembly plant,

product development and engineering. Changing customer demand, dealing with the customer, future of lean

production.

Shortening of Production Lead Times -reduction of setup times, practical procedures for reducing setup time

Module IV

Standardization of Operations. Machine layout, multi function workers and job rotation. Improvement

activities to reduce work force and increase worker morale - foundation for improvements.

Elements of Lean Production viz G M Framingharn -Toyota Takaoka Mass Production V /s lean production,

diffusing lean production.

Module V

Managing lean enterprise:- Finance, Career ladders, geographic spread and advantages of global enterprise.

Prospects for catching up. Simplicity in the natural state -institutional factors -life time employment -

educational commodities -quality & productivity in full circle.

An Action Plan : Getting started - Creating an organization to channel your streams. Install business system

to encourage lean thinking. The inevitable results of 5 year commitment.

References

1 Productions and Operations Management - Chasel Aquilino - Mcgra-hill company – 9 th edition - 2001.

2 Toyoto Production System -An integrated approach to Just in Time - Yasuhiro Monden - Engineering aild

Management Press, Institute of Industrial Engineers Norcross Georgia.- 1983

3 The Machine that Changed the World. The Story of Lean Production - James P Womack, Daniel T Jones,

and Daniel Roos - Harper Perennial edition published - 1991.

4 Lean Thinking - James Womack - Simon & Schuster Adult - ISBN: 0743249275, 2003.

5 Japanese Manufacturing Techniques. The Nine Hidden Lessons by simplicity - Richard Schourberger. -

Free Press - 1st edition, ISBN-10: 0029291003, 1982.

6 Quality Function Development - James Bossert - ASQC Press – 2000.

QUALITY CONTROL

01 Introduction: Definition of Quality, Quality function, Dimensions of quality, Quality engineering

terminology, Brief history of quality methodology, Statistical methods for quality improvement,

Quality Costs - four categories costs and hidden costs. Brief discussion on sporadic and chronic

quality problems. Introduction to Quality Function

Deployment.

02 Quality Assurance: Definition and concept of quality assurance, departmental assurance

activities. Quality audit concept, audit approach etc., structuring the audit program, planning and

performing audit activities, audit reporting, ingredients of a quality audit program.

03 Statistical Process Control (SPC): Frequency distribution and Histogram. Probability

distributions – Hyper- geometric, Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution. Introduction to

statistical process control – Chance and Assignable causes of variation. Basic principles of

control charts, choice of control limits, sample size and sampling frequency, rational subgroups.

Analysis of patterns of control charts. Case studies on application of

SPC. Process capability - Basic definitions, standardized formula, relation to product

tolerance and Six-Sigma concept of process capability.

04 Control Charts for variables: Control charts for X-bar and Range(R), statistical basis of the charts,

development and use of X-bar and R charts, interpretation of charts. Control charts for X-bar and

standard deviation (S), development and use of X-bar and S charts.

05 Control Charts for Attributes: Control chart for fraction non-conforming (defectives) -

development and operation of control chart, brief discussion on variable sample size. Control

chart for non-conformities (defects) - development and operation of control chart for constant

sample size and variable sample size. Choice between variables and attributes control charts.

Guidelines for implementing control charts.

06 Inspection planning - locating inspection stations, interpretation of quality characteristics,

sensory characteristics etc. Automated inspection, inspection accuracy. Concept of accepting

sampling, economics of inspection. Brief introduction on measurement system analysis (MSA).

07 Operating characteristic curves - construction and use. Acceptance plans - single, double and

multiple sampling. Determinations of average outgoing quality, average outgoing quality level,

average total inspection, production risk and consumer risk. ISO 9000 and its applications

TEXT BOOKS:

1. ―Introduction to Statistical Quality Control‖: D.C. Montgomery, John Wiley and Sons

2. ―Quality Planning and Analysis‖: J.M. Juran and Frank M. Gryna, TATA McGraw-Hill

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. ―Statistical Quality Control‖: Grant and Leavenworth, McGraw-Hill.

2. Janet L. Novack and Kathleen C. Bosheers, ―The QS9000 Documentation Toolkit‖ Prentice Hall PTR

―ISO9000 A Manual for total Quality Management‖: Suresh Dalela and Saurabh, S. Chand and

Company Ltd, RamNagar, New Delhi.

NON DESTRUCTIVE METHODS

01 INTRODUCTION TO ND TESTING: Selection of ND methods, Scope and advantages of NDT.

Comparison of NDT with DTSome common NDT methods used since ages, Flaws

and Defects Terminology.

02 Magnetic Particle Inspection: Methods of generating magnetic fields – types of magnetic particles and

suspension liquids – steps in inspection – application and limitations. Eddy Current Inspection: Principles,

operation variables, procedure, inspection coils, and detectable discounts by the method. Visual inspection,

Equipment used for visual inspection. Ringing test chalk test (oil whitening test). Attractive uses of above tests

in detecting surface cracks, bond strength & surface defects. Advantages, limitations Interpretation of results.

DC & AC magnetization, Skin Effect, use of dye & wet powders for magna glow testing, different methods to

generate magnetic fields, Applications.

02 ULTRA SONIC INSPECTION: Introduction, Principle of operation, Piezoelectricity. Ultrasonic probes,

Basic equipment characteristics of ultra sonic waves, variables in inspection, inspection methods – pulse

echo A, B, C, scans, transmission, resonance techniques, transducer elements, couplets, search units, contact

types and immersion types. CRO techniques, advantages, Limitation & typical applications. Applications in

inspection of castings, forgings, Extruded steel parts, bars, pipes, rails and dimensions measurements. Case

Study – Ultrasonography of human body.

03 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION: Principles, radiation sources, x-rays andgamma rays: x- rays tubes, radio

graphic films, screens and filters, image intensifiers, technique charts, industrial radiography, electro-

radiography, image quality, radiographic sensitivity, electron neutron radiography. X-ray radiography

principle, equipment & methodology. Applicability, types of radiations, limitations. Interpretation of

Radiographs, limitations of y-ray radiography – principle, equipment. Attenuation of electro magnetic

radiations, source of radioactive materials & technique. Photo electric effect, Rayleigh‘s scattering (coherent

scattering), Compton‘s scattering (Incoherent scattering). Pair production, Beam geometry, Scattering factor.

Advantages of y-ray radiography over X-ray radiography Precautions against radiation hazards. Case Study

— X-ray of human body

04 INDUSTRIAL COMPUTED TOMOGRAPHY: Basic principles, capabilities, and comparison with other

NDE methods – application of ICT. Thermal inspection principles, equipment inspection methods

applications.

05 EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION

Principle, Methods, Advantages, Scope and limitations. Types of Probes. Case Studies

06 RECENT NDT METHODS

Die penetrate test (liquid penetrate inspection), Principle, scope. Equipment & techniques, Tests stations,

Advantages, types of penetrant and developers. Illustrative examples – Heavy castings of large size, frame

of jet engine, porosity testing of nickel alloys, leak testing. Zyglo test

TEXT BOOKS:

1. ASM Handbook Vol. 11, 8th Edition – Non-destructive Testing & Evaluation

2. Research Techniques in NDT Vol.3, R.S. Shah, Academic

3. Industrial Quality Control, Webstar

4. Bray, Don E. and Stanley, Roderic K., Nondestructive Evaluation: A Tool in Design, Manufacturing,

and Service., CRC Press New York.

NON TRADITIONAL MACHINING

01 Introduction: History, Classification, comparison between conventional and non-

conventional machining process selection.

02 Mechanical Process: Ultrasonic Machining (USM): Introduction, Equipment, tool materials &

tool Size, Abrasive slurry, USM process Characteristics:-Material removal rate, tool wear,

Accuracy, surface finish., Applications, Advantages & Disadvantages of USM

03 Electrochemical Machining(ECM): Introduction, Study of ECM machine, Elements of ECM

process:-Cathode tool, Anode work piece, source of DC power, Electrolyte. Chemistry of the

process, ECM process characteristics-Material removal rate, Accuracy,

Surface finish

04 ECM Tooling: ECM tooling technique & example, Tool & insulation materials, Tool

size,Handling of slug., Applications such as Electrochemical turning, Electrochemical Grinding,

Electrochemical Honing, deburring, Advantages, Limitations

05 Chemical Machining (CHM): Introduction, Elements of process, Chemical blanking Process,

Preparation of work piece, preparation of masters, masking with photo resists, etching for

blanking, Accuracy of chemical blanking, Applications of chemical blanking.

06 Chemical milling (Contour machining):- Process of steps-masking, Etching, process

characteristics of CHM:- material removal rate. Features of Hydrogen embrittlement,

Advantages & applications.

07 Abrasive Jet Machining (AJM): Introduction, Equipment, Variables in AJM:- Carrier Gas, Type

of abrasive, Size of abrasive grain, velocity of the abrasive jet, Work material, standoff

distance(SOD), Nozzle design, Shape of cut. Process characteristics-Material removal rate,

Nozzle wear, Accuracy & surface finish. Applications, Advantages & Disadvantages of AJM

08 Plasma Arc Machining (PAM): Introduction, equipment non-thermal generation of plasma,

selection of gas, Mechanism of Metal removal, PAM parameters, Process characteristics. Safety

precautions, Applications, Advantages and limitations.

09 Thermal Metal Removal Processes: Electrical discharge machining(EDM)-introduction,

machine, mechanism of metal removal, dielectric fluid, spark generator, EDM tools(electrodes)

Electrode feed control, Electrode manufacture, Electrode wear, Choice of machining operation,

electrode material selection, under sizing and length of electrode, Machining time. Flushing-

Pressure flushing, suction flushing, side flushing, EDM process characteristics: Metal removal

rate, Accuracy surface finish, Heat affected Zone. Machine tool selection, Application: EDM

accessories /applications, electrical discharge grinding, Travelling wire EDM.

TEXT BOOKS :

1. Modern Machining Process- Pandey And Shah, Tata Mcgraw Hill

2. New Technology - Bhattacharaya

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Production Technology - HMT TATA McGraw Hill.

2. Production Technology - R.K.Jain

3. Production Technology - O.P.Khanna

4. Production Technology - Amitabh Ghosh&Mallik

WORK SYSTEM DESIGN

Module I

Work System Design: Introduction, Introduction and Concept of Productivity, Measurement of Productivity,

Productivity Measures, Case StudiesNumerical Problems. Case StudiesNumerical Problems, Causes of Low

Productivity, Productivity Measurement Models, Factors Influencing Productivity, Productivity Improvement

Techniques. Work Study: Basic Concept, Steps Involved in Work Study, Human Aspects of Work Study,

Techniques of Work Study, Concept of Work Content.

Module II

Method Study: Basic Concept, Steps Involved in Method Study, Recording Techniques, Operation Process

Charts, And Operation Process Charts: Examples. Flow Process Charts, Flow Process Charts: Examples, Two-

Handed-Process Charts, Multiple Activity Charts, Flow Diagrams. String Diagrams, Critical Examination

Techniques, Development and Selection of New Method, Installation and Maintenance of Improved Methods,

Principles of Motion Economy. Micro-Motion Study, Therbligs, SIMO Charts, Memo-Motion Study, Cycle

graph and Chrono-Cycle Graph.

Module III

Work Measurement: Basic Concept, Techniques of Work Measurement, Steps Involved in Time Study, Time

Study Equipment, and Performance Rating.

Performance Rating: Examples, Allowances, Computation of Standard Time, Case Studies Numerical

Problems. Work Sampling: Basics, Design of Work Sampling Study, Case Studies Numerical Problems,

Predetermined Motion Time Systems, Introduction to MTM and MOST Ergonomics: Basic Concept, Industrial

Ergonomics, Constituent Areas of Ergonomics, Man-Machine System, Anthropometry. Case Studies of Office

Chair, Tower Crane Cabin, Car Seat, Computer System, Assembly Line Worker.

Reference :

1. Introduction to Work Study: International Labor Office (ILO), Geneva.

2. Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work: Ralph M. Barnes, Wiley, The University of

California.

3. Industrial Engineering and Production Management: M. Telsang, S. Chand and Company Ltd

ADVANCED OPERATION RESEARCH

Chap

.No.

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01 Introduction: Definition of OR, OR Phases, Features and Limitation of OR,

Application of

12

OR to Engineering and Managerial problems.

02 Linear Programming: Definition, mathematical formulation, standard form, solution

space,

solution – feasible, basic feasible, optimal, infeasible, multiple, optimal,

Redundancy,

Degeneracy. Graphical solutions.

Simplex methods: Variants of Simplex algorithms, Dual Simplex and Big M

methods.

UNIT

II

03

04

Transportation Problem: Formulation of transportation model, Basic feasible

solution using different methods, Optimality Methods, Unbalanced transportation

problem. Degeneracy in transportation problems: Concept of Degeneracy and its

application in Transportation problems.

Assignment Problems: Formulation, unbalanced assignment problem, and cases of

traveling salesman problems.

12

UNIT

III

07

08

Project Management Using Network Analysis: Overview of Project management

fundamentals, Network construction, CPM - Determination of critical path and

duration, floats. Least cost project scheduling. Flow in networks: Determination of

shortest route, Determination of Maximum flow through the networks, PERT-

Estimation of project

duration, types of estimation and calculation of variance. Concept of Crashing.

12

Hrs

UNIT

IV

09 Queuing Theory: Queuing system and their characteristics. The M/M/I Queuing

system,

Steady state performance analyzing of M/M/1 and M/M/C queuing model

08

Hrs

UNIT

V

10 Game Theory: Formulation of games, Two person–Zero sum game, games with

and

without saddle point, Graphical solution (2xn, mx2 game), and dominance

property.

08

Hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Taha H A - Operation Research and Introduction, McMillian.ISBN-0-02-418940-5

2. Philips, Ravindran and Soleberg-Principles of Operations Research-Theory and practice, PHI

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Hiller and Liberman, Introduction to Operation Research, McGraw Hill 5th edn

2. S.D. Sharma – Operations Research, Kedarnath, Ramnath &Co

3. J K Sharma, Operations Research Theory and Application, 2nd Edn, ISBN-0333-92394-4

4. Kanthi swarup & Others – Operations Research., Sultanch and Sons

LAYOUT OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

Chap.

No.

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01 Plant Location: Factors influencing plant location, Theories of plant location and

location

economics, location problems

04

Hrs

02 Objectives of plant layout: Principles of plant layout, types of plant layout,

Merits and

Demerits of plant layout, Function of Plant layout, types of layout problems.

06

Hrs

UNIT II

03 Material Handling: Principles of material Handling, Objectives of Material

handling, Unit

load concept, classification of Material handling equipments.

05

Hrs

04 Basic devices used in Material Handling: Basic devices & Types of Material

handling

equipment, unit load concept with examples.

05

Hrs

UNIT III

05 Computerized layout planning: CRAFT, COFAD,PLANET, CORELAP ,

ALDEP,

concepts of the above systems and use of flow chart

04

Hrs

06 Plant Design: Systematic layout planning, activity relationship chart,

relationship diagram, space relationship diagram to plant layout, layout

procedures- Immer , Nadler,

Richard Muther , James apple approaches to layout procedures.

06

Hrs

UNIT

IV

07 Space Determination: Space determination and area allocation, factors in space

planning, receiving storage production shipping, tool room, tool crib and other

auxiliary

services, Factors to be considered for expansion, Flexibility aisles, columns etc.

10

Hrs

UNIT

V

08 Area Allocation-2: Allocation procedure for area, plot plan, sequence demand,

straight line and directional methods and simple problems, line balancing.

Assembly line balancing, fabrication line balancing, simple problem in line

balancing, Ranked position

weight method, JR Jackson‘s Method

06

Hrs

09 Detailed construction of the layout: Methods of constructing the layout,

evaluation of the

layout, efficiencies indices, presenting detailed layout to management

06

Hrs

TEXT BOOKS :

1. Plant layout and material handling- James apple.

2. Plant layout and design – James Moore.

REFERENCES :

1. Facilities planning and Design – Tom Pkins.

2. Plant layout materials handling – Richard Muther

3. Facilities design – SundereshHergur.

JUST IN TIME MANUFACTURING

Chap

No

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01 JIT-An Introduction: Spread of JIT movement, the new production system research

association of Japan, some definitions of JIT, core Japanese practices of JIT, creating

continuous manufacture, enabling JIT to occur, basic element of JIT, benefits of JIT.

03

Hrs.

02 Toyota Production System: Key features and basic framework, Production smoothing,

production planning, adaptability to demand fluctuations, sequencing method for the

mixed model assembly line to realize smoothed production, Shortening lead time and

reducing the setup time in Toyota production system

07

Hrs

UNIT II

03 Kanban system – Basics of Kanban system, Kanban rules, adapting to fluctuations in

demand through Kanban, Types of Kanbans cards- Withdrawal, Production ordering,

subcontract, emergency Kanbans, concept of whirligig, Andon, determining the number

of Kanbans, detailed Kanban systems with examples.

06

Hrs

04 Value Stream Mapping – The concept, the symbols, current state value stream

mapping and future state value stream mapping, Value Network Mapping, a case study

to implement VSM, pokayoke mistake proofing.

04

Hrs

UNIT III

05 Design, Development and Management of JIT Manufacturing Systems: Plant

configurations and flow analysis, comparison of JIT‘s ―demand pull‖ system with

conventional ―push type‖ planning and control systems, quality management system,

product design, human resource management, flexible workforce system, creation and

maintenance of teams for the implementation of JIT in an industry. Assessing

performance in JIT manufacturing systems, product costing information systems in JIT

manufacturing, Case studies

12

Hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. M.G. Korgaonker, ―Just In Time Manufacturing‖, Macmillan India Ltd.

2. Richard J. Schonberger, ―Japanese Manufacturing Techniques‖ The Free Press –

Macmillan Pub. Co., Inc. New York

UNIT IV

06 Supply Management For JIT: JIT purchasing-the Japanese way, some studies in

JIT purchasing, experience of implementation organizations, surveys on JIT

purchasing, buyer-seller relationship in JIT purchasing, quality certification of

suppliers in JIT purchasing, some problems in implementation of JIT

purchasing, reduction freight costs in JIT purchasing, monitoring supplier

performance for JIT purchasing, audit in JIT purchasing, implementation of JIT

to international sourcing, frequency of shipments, inventory policy, supplier

reaction capability, quality, communication sole sourcing,

delivery performance and supplier flexibility, conclusion.

10

Hrs

UNIT V

07 Framework for Implementation of JIT: Implementation risks - Due to

inappropriate understanding, technical, operational and people problems, in

Kanban system, Value stream Mapping. Activities to be performed during the

implementation, steps in

implementation, a case study to implement JIT.

10

Hrs

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Module - 1

Principles and Practice: Definition, basic approach, gurus of TQM, TQM Framework, awareness,

defining quality, historical review, obstacles, benefits of TQM.

Quality Management Systems: Introduction, benefits of ISO registration, ISO 9000 series of

standards, ISO 9001 requirements.

Module - 2

Leadership: Definition, characteristics of quality leaders, leadership concept, characteristics of

effective people, ethics, the Deming philosophy, role of TQM leaders, implementation, core values,

concepts and framework, strategic planning communication, decision making,

Module – 3

Customer Satisfaction and Customer Involvement: Customer Satisfaction: customer and

customer perception of quality, feedback, using customer complaints, service quality, translating

needs into requirements, customer retention ,case studies. Employee Involvement – Motivation,

employee surveys, empowerment, teams, suggestion system, recognition and reward, gain sharing,

performance appraisal, unions and employee involvement, case studies.

Module - 4

Continuous Process Improvement: process, the Juran trilogy, improvement strategies, types of

problems, the PDSA Cycle, problem-solving methods, Kaizen, reengineering, six sigma, case studies.

Statistical Process Control : Pareto diagram, process flow diagram, cause and effect diagram, check

sheets, histograms, statistical fundamentals, Control charts, state of control, out of control process,

control charts for variables, control charts for attributes, scatter diagrams, case studies

Module - 5

Tools and Techniques: Benching marking, information technology, quality management systems,

environmental management system, and quality function deployment, quality by design, failure mode

and effect analysis, product liability, total productive maintenance.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Total Quality Management: Dale H. Besterfield, Publisher -Pearson Education India, ISBN:

8129702606, Edition 03.

2. Total Quality Management for Engineers: M. Zairi, ISBN:1855730243, Publisher: Wood head

Publishing

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Managing for Quality and Performance Excellence by James R.Evans and Williuam M

Lindsay,9th edition, Publisher Cengage Learning.

2. 2 A New American TQM, four revolutions in management, ShojiShiba, Alan Graham, David

Walden, Productivity press, Oregon, 1990

3. 3. Organizational Excellence through TQM, H. Lal, New age Publications, 2008

COMPOSITE MATERIALS

Chap.

No.

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01 INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITE MATERIALS:

Definition, classification and characteristics of composite materials –

fibrous composites, laminated composites, particulate composites. Properties and

types of reinforcement and matrix materials.

06

Hrs.

02 FIBRE REINFORCEMENT PLASTIC PROCESSING: Layup and curing,

fabricating process – open and closed mould process – hand layup techniques –

structural laminate bag molding, production procedures for bag molding –

filament winding, pultrusion,

pulforming, thermo – forming, injection, injection molding, liquid molding, blow

molding.

06

Hrs

UNIT II

03 FABRICATION OF COMPOSITES: Cutting, machining, drilling, mechanical

fasteners and adhesive bonding, joining, tooling, fabrication equipment.

06

Hrs

04 CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES: Their fabrication technologies. 06

Hrs

UNIT

III

05 APPLICATION OF COMPOSITES: Characterization of composites using

Scanning

Electron Microscope (SEM), Introduction to shape memory alloys

08

Hrs

UNIT

IV

06 APPLICATION OF INDUSTRIAL EXPERIMENTATION: Fabrication and

testing of composites.

06

Hrs

07 STUDY PROPERTIES OF MMC‘S: Physical Mechanical, wear, machinability

and other properties. Effect of size, shape and distribution of particulate on

properties.

06

Hrs

UNIT

V

08 ADVANCED COMPOSITES: Such as Polymer based Sandwich structures of

Nano composites. Introduction to shape memory alloys.

08

Hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Composite Science and Engineering - K.K.Chawla Springer Verlag 1998.

2. Introduction to composite materials - Hull and Clyne, Cambridge University Press,

2nd Edition, 1990.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Composite Materials hand book - MeingSchwaitz,, McGraw Hill Book Company,

2. Mechanics of Composite Materials - Robert. M. Jones, McGraw Hill Kogakusha Ltd.,

3. Forming Metal hand book - ASM handbook,.

4. Mechanics of composites - Autar K kaw, CRC Press,

5. Composite Materials - S.C. Sharma Narora publishing house,

6. Principles of Composite Material mechanics - Ronald. F. Gibron

WORLD CLASS MANUFACTURING

Chap.

No.

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01 Principals and Practices of WCM: Introduction to WCM,Evolution of WCM;

Ohno‘s View on WCM; Principles and Practices; Quality in WCM; Deming‘s

& Shingo‘s

Approach to Quality Management

06

Hrs

02 Gaining Competitive Edge Through World Class Manufacturing:

Manufacturing Excellence and Competitiveness, What is world-Class

Manufacturing?-Hall‘s framework of world-Class Manufacturing (WCM),

Gunn‘s Model of World-Class Manufacturing, Maskell‘s Model of World-Class

Manufacturing, America‘s Best Plants Model of World

Class Manufacturing.

06

Hrs

UNIT II

03 Definition of Reengineering:Definition of reengineering, Michael Porter‘s

five factor model applicable to product and service organizations, Case

studies on five factor model.

06

Hrs

04 Importance of 3Cs-customers takes charges, Characteristics of BPR, Role of

information technology in reengineering process, barriers to reengineering,

Deming prize and Baldridge award.

UNIT III

05 Benchmarking: Definition, mission and objectives, managing benchmarking

process, phases of benchmarking process, Xerox‘s and

AT&T‘s benchmarking

10

Hrs

process, Documentation, performance measures, improving business processes.

Whom to benchmarks: Developing candidate list, systematic search, refining

the initial list.

06 Employee engagement: Motivation, Employee surveys, Empowerment, Team

dynamics. Decision making methodology, Suggestion system, Performance

appraisal, Unions and employee involvement, benefits of employee

involvement.

UNIT

IV

07 Total Productive Maintenance: Introduction, Foundational Pillars of TPM, The

Plan, Learning the New Philosophy, Promoting the Philosophy, Loss areas of

TPM and OEE, Training, Improvement Needs, Goal, Developing Plans, Case

examples.

10

Hrs

08 Management Tools: Why Why analysis, Force Field Analysis, Nominal Group

technique, Affinity diagram, Interrelation diagraph, Process Decision Program

Chart, Activity network diagram.

UNIT

V

09 Theory of Inventive Problem Solving (TRIZ), Overview of 40 principles and 39

Parameters, applications of TRIZ and case examples on minimum ten principles.

08

Hrs

10 Six Sigma: The Basics, The core of Six Sigma (DMAIC), design for Six Sigma,

DFSS

and the customer, Quality time and the Bottom line , core of DFSS-IDOV

method, DFSS Metrics, DFSS Infrastructure –People and resources,

Implementing DFSS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Reengineering the corporation -Hammer, Michael and James Champy. –

2. A Manifesto for Business revolution, Nicholas Brealey Publishing ,London.-

1993

3. Finding and implementing best practices -Champ ,Robert C. Business

Process Benchmarking:, Vision Books- New Delhi – 2008

4. World class manufacturing -Sahay B S ,Saxena K B C, Ashish Kumar,

- A Strategic Perspective: MacMillan – India Ltd, ISBN 0333-93-

4741.

5. Six sigma for Managers -Greg Brue, TMH 2002, ISBN- 0-07-048639-5

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Design for Six Sigma -Grege, ,TMh

2. Design for Six Sigmain Technology and Product Development -Creveling,

Pearson Education.

3. Total Quality Management -Dale H. Besterfield,carolBesterfield-

Minchna,glen H Besterfield and Mary Besterfield –scare, Pearson

education, ISBN 81-297-0260-6

4. Total Quality Management - Kesavan R - I K International Publishing house

Pvt. Ltd

AGILE MANUFACTURING

MODULE 1

Agile Manufacturing: Definition, business need, conceptual frame work,

characteristics, generic features. Four Core concepts: Strategy driven approach-

integrating organization, People technology, interdisciplinary design methodology.

MODULE 2

Developing Agile Manufacturing: Enterprise design, System concepts as the basic

manufacturing theory-joint technical & Organizational design and a model for the

design of agile manufacturing enterprise. Enterprise design process insights into

design processes, what is interdisciplinary design, main issues, and simple design

example. Integration of Product /Process Development: Principles, Robust

design approach, Approaches to enhance ability in manufacturing, Role of QFD,

Managing People in Agile organization, Approaches.

MODULE 3

Application of IT/IS Concepts In Agile Manufacturing: Strategies, Management

of complexities and information. flow, approaches, applications of multimedia to

improve agility in manufacturing, system concepts.

Agile Supply Chain Management: Principles, IT/IS concepts in supply chain

management, enterprise integration and management in agile manufacturing,

concepts, Agility, Adaptability And learners – comparison of concepts.

MODULE 4

Computer Control Of Agile Manufacturing: CAPP for capacity planning and

production line design / redesign manufacturing, concepts, examples.

Corporate Knowledge Management In Agile Manufacturing: Strategies,

strategic options in Agile manufacturing, Role of standards.

MODULE 5

Design of Skill & Knowledge: Enhancing technology for Machine tool system,

Resumption of design requirement geometry, definition, methods, decision support

for selection of cutting parameters, design enhancements, parametric approach only.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. ‘Agile Manufacturing - Forging Mew Frontiers’,Poul T Kidd , Amagow Co. UK,

ISBN-0- 201-63163-6, 1994.

2. ‘‘Agile Manufacturing”, A Gunasekharan, the 21stCenturyCompetitive strategy,

ISBN - 13978-0-08-04 3567-1, Elsevier Press, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. O Levine Transitions to Agile Manufacturing, Joseph C Moutigomery and

Lawrence – Staying Flexible for competitive advantage, ASQC quality press,

Milwaukee. Wisconsin, USA, 1996.

2. Agile Development for Mass Customization, David M Anderson and B Joseph

Pine,Irwin Professional Publishing, Chicago, USA, 199

DIGITAL MARKETING

Unit 1:

Introduction to digital marketing: Online marketplace analysis:

microenvironment, The Internet macro-environment. E-Marketing Plan: Overview of

the E-Marketing Planning Process – Creating an E Marketing Plan– A Seven-Step E-

Marketing Plan The E-Marketing Environment: Overview of Global E-Marketing

Issues – Country and Market Opportunity Analysis – Technological Readiness

Influences Marketing – Wireless Internet Access – The Digital Divide Ethical and

Legal Issues – Privacy – Digital Property – Online Expression – Cyber Security –

Cyber Crime.

Unit 2 :

E-Marketing Research: Data Drive Strategy – Marketing Knowledge Management –

Monitoring Social Media – Technology-Enabled Approaches – Real-Space Approaches –

Marketing Databases and Data Warehouses – Data Analysis and Distribution – Knowledge

Management Metrics - Consumer Behaviour Online – Segmentation – Targeting –

Differentiation – Positioning Strategies. Data Analytics: Introduction, Key terms and concepts.

Working with data. Setting objectives, goals and KPIs. Tracking and collecting data. Analysing

data. Advantages and challenges.

Unit 3 :

E-Marketing Management: Product – Products on Internet – Creating Customer Value

Online– Product Benefits – E-Marketing Enhanced Product Development – Price – Change in

Pricing Strategies – Buyer and Seller Perspectives – Payment Options – Pricing Strategies –

Distribution– Online Channel Intermediaries – Distribution Channel Length and Functions –

Channel Management and Power – Distribution Channel Metrics.

Unit 4:

Search Engine Optimisation (SEO) Introduction, Understanding SEO. Search engine friendly

website structure. SEO and key phrases. Link popularity. User insights. Benefits and

challenges.Content Marketing: Introduction, Key terms and concepts, meaning, Strategic

building blocks. Content creation. Advantages and challenges.

Search Advertising: Introduction, Key terms and concepts. Advertising in search. The

elements of a search ad. Targeting options. Bidding and ranking for search ads. Tracking.

Advantages and challenges.

Online Advertising: Introduction, Key terms and concepts. Types of display adverts. Payment

models for display Advertising. Getting your ads online. Targeting and optimising. Step-by-

step guide to online Advertising. Advantages and challenges.

Affiliate Marketing: Introduction, Key terms and concepts. The building blocks of affiliate

marketing. Setting up a campaign. Advantages and challenges.

Unit 5:

Customer Acquisition and Retention: Profile of Consumers – Browsing Behaviour Model –

Elements of Social Media – Social Media Strategies – Social Media Performance Metrics –

Building Customer Relationships – Relationship Marketing – Stakeholders – Three Pillars of

Relationship Marketing – Customer Relationship Management (CRM) – CRM Building

Blocks – Ten rules for CRM Success.

Unit 6:

Social Media Channels: Introduction, Key terms and concepts, Traditional media vs Social

media. Social media channels: Social networking. Content creation, Bookmarking &

aggregating and Location & social media. Tracking social media campaigns.Social media

marketing: Rules of engagement. Advantages and challenges.

Social Media Strategy: Introduction, Key terms and concepts. Using social media to solve

business challenges. Step-by-step guide to creating a social media strategy. Documents and

processes. Dealing with opportunities and threats. Step-by-step guide for recovering from an

online brand attack. Social media risks and challenges.

RECOMMENDED BOOKS:

1. Digital Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and Practice, Chaffey D., Ellis-

Chadwick, 5th Edition, F., Pearson, 2012.

2. https://www.redandyellow.co.za/content/uploads/woocommerce_

uploads/2017/10/emarketing_textbook_download.pdf.

3. E-Marketing, Judy Strauss and Raymond Frost, Prentice Hall, 6th Edition,

https://www.redandyellow.co.za/content/uploads/woocommerce_%20uploads/2017/10/emarketing_textbook_download.pdf

https://www.redandyellow.co.za/content/uploads/woocommerce_%20uploads/2017/10/emarketing_textbook_download.pdf

2013

4. Internet Marketing: Integrating Online and Offline Strategies. M. L. Roberts

and Debra Zahay, 3rd edition, Cengage Publishing, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. The Essential Guide to Online Marketing, Rob Strokes, Quirk, ISBN: 9781936126323

2. E-Commerce: An Indian Perspective, P. T. Joseph, Prentice Hall, 4th Edition, 2013

3. Electronic Commerce: A Simplified Approach, Munesh Chandra Trivedi, Jaico

Publishing House, 2011.

HUMAN FACTOR IN ENGINEERING

Chap.

No.

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01 Productivity Definition of productivity, task of management. Productivity of

materials, land, building, machine and power. Measurement of productivity,

factors affecting the

productivity, productivity improvement programmes

05

Hrs.

02 Work Study:Definition, objective and scope of work study. Human factors in

work study.

Work study as applied to the top management, supervisors and the worker.

05

Hrs

UNIT

II

03 Method Study: Definition, objective and scope of method study, activity

recording and

exam aids. Outline process charts, flow process charts, travel chart.

04

Hrs

04 Multiple activity charts: Charts to record movement at work place - principles of

motion economy, classification of movements, two handed process chart, SIMO

chart, spaghetti diagram and other important micro motion studies.

06

Hrs

UNIT

III

05 Work Measurements: Definition, objectives and benefit of work measurement.

Work measurement techniques. Work sampling – need, confidence levels,

sample size

determinations, random observation, conducting study with the simple problems.

05

Hrs

06 Time study: - Definition, time study equipment, selection of job, steps in time

study. Breaking jobs into elements, recording information. Rating and standard

rating, standard performance, scales of rating, factors affecting rate of working,

allowances and standard

time determination.

07

Hrs

TEXT BOOKS :

1. Introduction to Work Study – ILO, Recent Edition,

2. Barnes, ―Motion and Time

Study‖, Wiley

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. M.S. Sunders and E.J. Mckmic, ―Human Factors in Engineering

Design‖, Recent Edition, McGraw Hill

2. S. Dalela and Sourabh, ―Work Study and Ergonomics‖.

3. Kharger and Bahya; Engineered work measurement, Weldon, ELBS

UNIT

IV

07 Predetermined motion time study: Method Time Measurement (MTM) 04

Hrs

08 Ergonomics: Introduction, areas of study under ergonomics, system approach to

ergonomics model, man-machine system. Components of man-machine system

and their functions - work capabilities of industrial worker, study of development

of stress in

human body and their consequences.

06

Hrs

UNIT

V

09 Design of Man-Machine System: Fatigue in Industrial workers. Quantitative,

qualitative representation and alphanumeric displays. Controls and their

design criteria, control types, relation between controls and displays, layouts

of panels and machines.

05

Hrs

10 Design of work place: Value Stream Mapping in optimizing the layout,

influence of climate on human efficiency, influence of noise, vibration

and light.

05

Hrs

WELDING TECHNIQUES

Module-1

Introduction : Definition, Classification of manufacturing processes. Metals cast in the

foundry-classification, factors that determine the selection of a casting alloy.

Introduction to casting process & steps involved. Patterns: Definition, classification, materials

used for pattern, various pattern allowances and their importance.

Sand molding: Types of base sand, requirement of base sand. Binder, Additives definition,

need and types

Preparation of sand molds: Molding machines- Jolt type, squeeze type and Sand slinger. Study

of important molding process: Green sand, core sand, dry sand, sweep mold, CO2 mold, shell

mold, investment mold, plaster mold, cement bonded mold.Cores: Definition, need, types.

Method of making cores, concept of gating (top, bottom, parting line, horn gate) and risering

(open, blind) Functions and types.

Module-2

Melting & Metal Mold Casting Methods-

Melting furnaces: Classification of furnaces, Gas fired pit furnace, Resistance furnace,

Coreless induction furnace, electric arc furnace, constructional features & working principle

of cupola furnace.

Casting using metal molds: Gravity die casting, pressure die casting, centrifugal casting,

squeeze casting, slush casting, thixocasting, and continuous casting processes.

Module-3

Solidification & Non Ferrous Foundry Practice Solidification: Definition, Nucleation,

solidification variables, Directional solidification-need and methods. Degasification in liquid

metals-Sources of gas, degasification methods. Fettling and cleaning of castings: Basic steps

involved. Sand Casting defects- causes, features and remedies. Advantages & limitations of

casting process

Nonferrous foundry practice: Aluminum castings – Advantages, limitations, melting of

aluminum using lift-out type crucible furnace. Hardeners used, drossing, gas absorption,

fluxing and flushing, grain refining, pouring temperature. Stir casting set up, procedure, uses,

advantages and limitations.

Module-4

Welding process: Definition, Principles, Classification, Application, Advantages & limitations

of welding. Arc welding: Principle, Metal arc welding (MAW), Flux Shielded Metal Arc

Welding (FSMAW), Inert Gas Welding (TIG & MIG) Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) and

Atomic Hydrogen Welding (AHW).

Special type of welding: Resistance welding principles, Seam welding, Butt welding, Spot

welding and Projection welding. Friction welding, Explosive welding, Thermit welding, Laser

welding and electron beam welding.

Module-5

Soldering, Brazing And Metallurgical Aspects In Welding Structure of welds, Formation of

different zones during welding, Heat Affected Zone (HAZ), Parameters affecting HAZ. Effect

of carbon content on structure and properties of steel, Shrinkage in welds& Residual stresses,

Concept of electrodes, filler rod and fluxes. Welding defects- Detection, causes & remedy.

Soldering, brazing, gas welding: Soldering, Brazing, Gas Welding: Principle, oxy-Acetylene

welding, oxy-hydrogen welding, air-acetylene welding, Gas cutting, powder cutting.

Inspection methods: Methods used for inspection of casting and welding. Visual, magnetic

particle, fluorescent particle, ultrasonic.Radiography, eddy current, holography methods of

inspection.

Text Books:

1. “Manufacturing Process-I”, Dr.K.Radhakrishna, Sapna Book House,5th Revised

Edition 2009.

2. “Manufacturing & Technology: Foundry Forming and Welding”,P.N.Rao, 3rd Ed.,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

Reference Books :

1. “Process and Materials of Manufacturing”, Roy A Lindberg, 4th Ed.Pearson Edu.

2006.

2. “Manufacturing Technology”, SeropeKalpakjian, Steuen. R. Sechmid,Pearson

Education Asia, 5th Ed. 2006.

3. “Principles of metal casting”, Rechard W. Heine, Carl R. LoperJr.,Philip C.

Rosenthal, Tata McGraw Hill

Probability and Statistics

Introduction to statistics: Statistical Thinking, Collecting data, Statistical Modeling Frame

work, measure of central tendency and variance, Importance of Data summary and Display,

Tabular and Graphical display.

Discrete Random Variables and Probability distribution: Discrete Random variables,

Probability distributions and Probability mass functions, Cumulative distribution functions,

Mean and Variance of a discrete random variable, discrete uniform distribution, Binominal

distribution, Hyper Geometric distribution, Poisson distribution, Applications.

Continuous Random Variables and Probability Distributions: Continuous random

variables, Probability distributions and probability density functions, cumulative distribution

functions, Mean and Variance of a continuous random variable, uniform distribution, Normal

distribution, Normal approximation to Binominal and Poisson distribution, Exponential

distribution.

Testing of Hypothesis: Estimation theory, Hypothesis testing, Inference on the mean of a

population (variance known and unknown), Inference on the variance of a normal population,

Inference on a population proportion, Testing for Goodness of Fit, Inference for a difference

in Means, Variances known, Inference for a difference in means of two normal distributions,

Variances unknown, Inference on the Variances of two normal populations, Inference on two

population proportions.

Simple Linear Regressions and Correlation: Simple Linear Regression, Properties of Least

square Estimators and Estimation of variances, Transformations to a straight line, Correlation.

Multiple linear regressions model, least square estimation of parameters, Matrix approach to

multiple linear regression, properties of least square estimators and estimation of variance.

Introduction to DOE: Completely Randomised Block Design (CBD) and Randomised Block

Design(RBD)

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1 Applied statistics and Probability for Engineers – Douglas C Montgomery - George C

Runger - John Wiley and Sons - 2nd Edn, ISBN-0-471-17027-5.- 2000.

2 Statistics for Management - Richard I Levin - David S Rubin - Prentice Hall India - 6th

Edn, ISBN-81-203- 0893-X.- 1979.

3 Probability and Statistics in Engineering - William W Hines - Douglas C Montgomery -

John Wiley and Sons - 2nd Edn, ISBN: 0471240877.

4 Business Statistics for Management and Economics - Daniel, Terrell - Houghton Mifflin

Company - 6th Edn, ISBN-0-395-62835-0.

5 Probability and Statistics - Walpole & Mayer - MacMillan Publishing Company -1989.

Additive Manufacturing

Chap.

No.

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01

02

INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Prototyping, Traditional Prototyping Vs.

Rapid Prototyping (RP), and classification of Rapid Manufacturing Processes:

Additive, Subtractive, Formative, Generic RP process.

Overview of additive manufacturing – History – Need-Classification -Additive

Manufacturing Technology in product development-Materials for Additive

Manufacturing Technology – Tooling – Applications

08

Hrs.

UNIT

II

03

04

LIQUID BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS Classification –

Liquid based system – Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Principle, process,

advantages and applications – Solid based system –Fused Deposition Modeling

– Principle, process, advantages and applications, Laminated Object

Manufacturing

Solid-based AM Systems: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM): Models and

12

Hrs

specifications, Process, working principle, Applications, Advantages and

Disadvantages,

Case studies. Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM): Models and specifications,

Process, working principle, Applications, Advantages and Disadvantages, Case

studies.

Multi-Jet Modelling (MJM): Models and specifications, Process, working

principle,

Applications, Advantages and Disadvantages, Case studies.

UNIT III

05 POWDER BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING and 3D Printing

SYSTEMS:

12

Selective Laser Sintering – Principles of SLS process – Process, advantages and Hrs

applications, Three Dimensional Printing – Principle, process, advantages and

applications- Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS), Electron Beam Melting.

06 Rapid Tooling: Introduction to Rapid Tooling (RT), Conventional Tooling Vs

RT, Need

for RT. Rapid Tooling Classification: Indirect Rapid Tooling Methods: Arc

Spray Metal

Deposition, Investment Casting, Sand Casting, 3D Keltool process.Direct Rapid

Tooling: Direct AIM,LOM Tools, DTM Rapid Tool Process, EOS Direct Tool

Process

and Direct Metal Tooling using 3DP

UNIT

IV

07 AM & REVERSE ENGINEERING 12

Basic Concept – Digitization techniques – Model Reconstruction – Data

Processing for

Hrs

Additive Manufacturing Technology, concept of Reverse Engineering, nature

and

characteristics.

08 AM Data Formats: Reengineering for Digital Representation, STL Format, STL

File Problems, Consequence of Building Valid and Invalid Tessellated Models,

STL file

Repairs: Generic Solution, Other Translators, Newly Proposed Formats. Mesh

Refining

by Sub division Techniques. AM Software‘s: Need for AM software, Features of

various

AM software‘s like Magics, Mimics, SolidView, View Expert, 3 D View,

Velocity 2, Rhino,

STL View 3 Data Expert and 3 D doctor, Surgi Guide, 3-matic, Simplant, Mesh

Lab.

UNIT

V

09 AM Applications: Application – Material Relationship, Application in Design,

Application in Engineering, Analysis and Planning, Aerospace Industry,

Automotive Industry, Jewelry Industry, Coin Industry, GIS application, Arts and

Architecture.

08

Hrs

10

RP Medical and Bioengineering Applications: Planning and simulation of

complex surgery, Customised Implants & Prosthesis, Design and Production of

Medical Devices, Forensic Science and Anthropology, Visualization of Bio-

molecules. Web Based Rapid Prototyping Systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., ―Rapid prototyping: Principles and

applications‖, Third Edition, World Scientific Publishers,.

2. Gebhardt A., ―Rapid prototyping‖, Hanser Gardener Publications.

REFERENCES:

1. Additive Manufacturing Technologies: 3D Printing, Rapid Prototyping, Springer,

Brent Stucker, David W. Rosen, and Ian Gibson,

2. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., ―Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool

box for prototype development‖, CRC Press

3. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., ―Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice‖, Springer,

2006.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Chap.

No.

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01 Introduction: Definition of project, characteristics of projects, understand

projects, types of projects, scalability of project tools, project roles

04

Hrs

02 Project Selection and Prioritization – Strategic planning process, Strategic

analysis, strategic objectives, portfolio alignment – identifying potential

projects, methods of selecting projects, financial mode / scoring models to

select projects, prioritizing projects, securing and negotiating projects.

06

Hrs

UNIT II

03 Planning Projects: Introduction, developing the project management plan,

understanding stake holders, communication planning, project meeting

management, communication needs of global and virtual project teams,

communication technologies, Constructing Work Breakdown Structures – scope

planning, scope definition, work breakdown structures (WBS), Using Microsoft

project for work breakdown structures

08

Hrs

UNIT III

05 Scheduling Projects: purpose of a project schedule, historical development,

how project schedules are limited and created, develop project schedules,

uncertainty in project schedules, Gantt Chart, Using Microsoft Project for

critical path schedules.

06

Hrs

06 Project Risk Planning: Risk Management Planning, risk identification, risk

analysis, risk response planning, Project Quality Planning and Project Kickoff:

Development of quality concepts, project quality management plan, project

quality tools, kickoff project, baseline and communicate project management

plan, using Microsoft Project for project baselines.

06

Hrs

UNIT IV

07 Resourcing Projects: Abilities needed when resourcing projects, estimate

resource needs, creating staffing management plant, project ream composition

issues, assign resource to each activity, resource overloads, critical chain project

management (CCPM), compress the project schedule, Using Microsoft Project

for resource allocation.

Budgeting Projects: Cost planning, cost estimating, cost budgeting,

establishing cost control, using Microsoft Project for Project Budgets,

10

Hrs

UNIT V

09 Performing Projects: Project supply chain management: - Plan purchasing and

acquisitions, plan contracting, contact types, project partnering and

collaborations, project supply chain management, Leading and Managing

Project Teams – Acquiring, developing, managing and leading the project team,

managing stakeholders, managing project conflicts

06

Hrs

10 Determining Project Progress and Results: Project Balanced Scorecard

Approach, Internal project, customer, financial issues, Using Microsoft Project

to monitor and control projects.

Finishing the project: Terminate project early, finish projects on time, secure

customer feedback and approval, knowledge management, perform

administrative and contract closure, celebrate success and reward participant,

provide ongoing support

06

Hrs

TEXT BOOK:

1. Project Management, Timothy J Kloppenborg, Cengage Learning, Edition 2009.

2. Project Management, A systems approach to planning schuduing and

controlling by Harold kerzner, CBS publication.

3. Project Management- Planning, analysis, selection, implementation and

Review, Chandra, Prasanna 7th edition, New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill.

REFERENCE:

1. Project Management Refer, Pennington Lawrence, Mc Graw hill

2. Project Management,A Moder Joseph and Phillips New Yark Van Nostrand,

Reinhold.

3. Project Management, Bhavesh M. Patal, Vikas publishing House,

TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE

UNIT I : MAINTENANCE CONCEPTS

Objectives and functions – Tero technology – Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) –

maintainability prediction – availability and system effectiveness- maintenance costs –

maintenance organization

UNIT II : MAINTENANCE MODELS

Minimal repair – maintenance types – balancing PM and breakdown maintenance- PM

schedules: deviations on both sides of target values – PM schedules: functional characteristics

– replacement models

UNIT III : TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE

Zero breakdowns – Zero Defects and TPM – maximizing equipment effectiveness –

autonomous maintenance program – five pillars of TPM – TPM small group activities – TPM

organization – management decision – educational campaign creation of organizations –

establishment of basic policies and goals – formation of master plan. – TPM implementation

UNIT IV: MAINTENANCE LOGISTICS

Human factors in maintenance – maintenance manuals – maintenance staffing methods –

queuing applications – simulation – spare parts management – maintenance planning and

scheduling

UNIT V : ONLINE MONITORING

Condition Monitoring Techniques– Vibration Monitoring, Signature Analysis – Wear Debris

Monitoring – Maintenance Management Information System – Expert systems – Corrosion

Monitoring and Control

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Seiichi Nakajima, “Introduction to TPM”, Productivity Press, Chennai, 1992.

2. Gopalakrishnan, P. and Banerji, A.K., “Maintenance and Spare Parts Management”,

Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1991.

REFERENCES:

1. Goto, F., “Equipment planning for TPM Maintenance Prevention Design”,

Productivity Press, 1992.

2. Shirose, K., “Total Productive Maintenance for Workshop Leaders”, Productivity

Press, 1992.

3. Shirose, K., “TPM for Operators”, Productivity Press, 1996.

4. Suzuki, T., “New Directions for TPM”, Productivity Press, 1993.

5. Kelly, A.., “Maintenance Planning and Control”, Butterworth, London, 1991.

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Chap.

No.

Topics Hrs

UNIT I

01 Introduction: Overview, Objectives, competitive advantage, skills required. H.R.

Policies,

conceptual framework, methodologies

04

Hrs.

02 Human Resource Planning: Integrated strategic planning and human resources

planning

HRP at different levels, Process of HRP, Control and review mechanism.

06

Hrs

UNIT

II

03 Recruitment: Need, Sources and techniques of recruitment assessment of

recruitment programs Selection, Placement and Induction: Meaning, Significance

factors affecting decisions, procedure, concept of testing, Interviews, Placement

and induction process Training the work force: Importance, scope, training verses

development, training

10

Hrs

process, techniques - Career Management - Planning and Development.

UNIT III

04 Leading: Motivation – Human factors in managing, Motivation and Motivators,

The hierarchy of needs theory, Theory X and Theory Y, The Motivation-Hygiene

theory, Immaturity-Maturity theory, A systems and contingency approach to

Motivation,

Situational, or Contingency, approach to leadership

06

Hrs

05 Performance Appraisal: Meaning, need, purpose, content, legalities of

performance appraisal. Methods of performance appraisal – traditional, graphic

rating scales, ranking, paired comparison, forced distribution, checklist, critical

incidence, essay or free form,

group confidential reports. Behaviourally Anchored Rating Scales (BARS) and

related Modern Scales

06

Hrs

UNIT

IV

06 HR audit, HR accounting, absenteeism, labour turnover, separations,

promotion, transfer, research in HRM, HR records, importance of HRIS,

management of knowledge workers - HRM in future, International HRM.

05

Hrs

07 Compensations Management: Concept and Theories of wage machinery,

Benchmarking

– Performance linked compensation system – statutory requirement in

compensation Management.

05

Hrs

UNIT V

09 Industrial Safety and Welfare:

1. The Factories Act 1948: Health, safety and welfare - hours of work -

holidays and leave with pay - employment of women and children

inspection and regulation.

2. The Employees Provident Fund Act 1952.

3. The Industrial Disputes Act 1947.

4. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946

5. The Payment of Wages Act 1936

10

Hrs

6. The Minimum Wages Act 1948

7. The Payment of Bonus Act 1965

8. The Equal Remuneration Act 1976.

TEXT BOOKS :

1. P. Subba Rao, ―Human Resource Management and Industrial

Relations‖, Text, Cases and Games, New Delhi:Himalaya Publishing

House

2. Human resource and personnel management by K.Aswathappa.

3. C.B. Memoria, ―Personnel Management‖

Himalaya Publishing House

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Dessler, Gary, Human Resources Management, New Delhi: Prentice Hall of

India Pvt.Ltd.

2. Saiyadain, Mirza S., Human Resource Management, New Delhi: TMH,.

3. San Beardwell and Len Holden, Human Resource Management, New Delhi:

Macmillan,

4. Nair,N.G. and Latha Nair, Personnel Management and Industrial

Relations, New Delhi: S.Chand& Co.

5. Peter C.Cairo, ―Counselling in Industry – Personnel Psychology‖

6. Wayne F Cascio, ―Management Human Resources‖ TATA McGraw Hill New

Delhi.

7. H.John Bernardino, and Joyce E.A Russel, ―Human Resource

Management‖, McGraw Hl International Editions.

TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT - Evolution of Management thoughts – Contribution of Selected

Management Thinkers – Various approaches to management – contemporary management practice –

Managing in global environment – Managerial functions.

UNIT II

PLANNING - Importance of planning – Types of planning – decision making process – Approaches to

decision making – Decision models – Pay off Matrices – Decision trees – Break Even Analysis.

UNIT III

ORGANISING - Departmentation – Span of Control – Delegation – Centralisation and Decentralisation –

Committees – Line and Staff relationships – Recent trends in organisation structures.

UNIT IV

STAFFING - Process of Recruitment, Selection, Induction Training – Motivation – Leading – Leadership

styles and qualities – Communication – process and barriers.

UNIT V

CONTROLLING - Managements control systems – techniques – Types of control.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Stephen P. Robbins and David A. Decenzo, Fundamentals of Management, Pearson Education, 8th

Edition, 2012.

2. J.S.Chandan, Management Concepts and Strategies, Vikas Publishing House, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS :

1. Tim Hannagan, Management Concepts and Practices, Macmillan India Ltd., 5 th Edition,2009.

2. Hellriegel, Jackson and Slocum, Management: A Competency-Based Approach, South Western, 11th

edition, 2007.

3. Stewart Black and Lyman W. Porter, Management – Meeting New Challenges, Prentice Hall, 2000. 4.

Koontz, Essentials of Management, Tata McGraw-Hill, 7 th Edition, 2006.

5. Bateman Snell, Management: Competing in the new era, McGraw-Hill Irwin, 5 th Edition,2002

Mechanical Syllabus

Stream B: Basic/Foundational Course

MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Introduction: Objectives and Functions of maintenance. Factors influencing plant availability,

Maintenance control, Maintenance Strategies, Organization for Maintenance. Failure

Statistics: Breakdown time distributions, Running- in failures, Time independent failures,

Wear-out failures, Failure Probability, Survival Probability and age specific failure rates.

UNIT- 2

Overhaul and Repair: Meaning and difference, optimal overhaul / Repair / Replace

maintenance policy for equipment subject to breakdown. Replacement Decisions: deterministic

and stochastic replacement situations, failure and preventive replacement, Optimal Interval

between preventive replacement of equipment subject to breakdown, group replacement.

UNIT- 3

Maintenance Systems: Fixed time maintenance, Condition based Maintenance, operate to

failure, Opportunity Maintenance, Design out maintenance, Total Productive Maintenance.

Maintenance Planning: Establishing maintenance plan and schedule, illustrative examples,

Preventive Maintenance: Designing a Technically sound preventive maintenance program,

failure data, FMECA, Maintenance to prevent failures, lubrication program development.

UNIT- 4

Inspection Decisions: Optimal Inspection frequency (for maximization of profit and

minimization of downtime). Shut down planning using CPM & PERT.

UNIT- 5

NUCREC Method of prioritizing maintenance work. Spare Parts Management:

Classification of spares, traditional approach to spares inventory, MUSIC-3D Approach to

spares inventory, optimum number of spares to satisfy given service level, simulation

technique.

Text Books:

1. A KELLY AND M J HARRIS, “Management of Industrial Maintenance”, Butterworth’s Co,

Ltd.

Reference Books:

1. AKS JARDINE “Maintenance, Replacement and Reliability” Pitman publishing Co.

2. A KELLY, “Maintenance planning and control”, Butterworth Co, Ltd.

TRIBOLOGY AND BEARING DESIGN

Course Content

UNIT – 1

Introduction to Tribology: Properties of oils and equation of flow: Viscosity, Newton’s Law

of viscosity, Hagen-Poiseuille Law, Flow between parallel stationary planes, viscosity

measuring apparatus. Lubrication principles, classification of lubricants. Hydrodynamic

Lubrication: Friction forces and power loss in lightly loaded bearing, Petroff’s law, Tower’s

experiments, idealized full journal bearings.

UNIT – 2

Mechanism of Pressure Development In An Oil Film: Reynold’s investigations, Reynold’s

equation in two dimensions - Partial journal bearings, end leakages in journal bearing,

numerical problems. Slider / Pad Bearing with a Fixed and Pivoted Shoe: Pressure distribution,

Load carrying capacity, coefficient of friction, frictional resistance in a pivoted shoe bearing,

influence of end leakage, numerical examples.

UNIT – 3

Oil Flow and Thermal Equilibrium Of Journal Bearing: Oil flow through bearings, self-

contained journal bearings, bearings lubricated under pressure, thermal equilibrium of journal

bearings, Hydrostatic Lubrication: Introduction to hydrostatic lubrication, hydrostatic step

bearings, load carrying capacity and oil flow through the hydrostatic step bearing.

UNIT – 4

Bearing Materials: Commonly used bearings materials, properties of typical bearing

materials.

Wear: Classification of wear, wear of polymers, wear of ceramic materials, wear

measurements, effect of speed, temperature and pressure.

UNIT – 5

Behavior of Tribological Components: Selection, friction, Wear of ceramic materials, wear

measurements, effects of speed, temperature and pressure. Tribological measures, Material

selection, improved design, surface engineering.

Text books:

1. Basu S K., Sengupta A N., Ahuja B. B., Fundamentals of Tribiology PHI 2006.

2. Mujumdar B. C., Introduction to Tribiology Bearings, S. Chand company Pvt. Ltd 2008.

Reference books:

1. Fuller, D. , Theory and Practice of Lubrication for Engineers, New York Company 1998.

2. Principles and Applications of Tribiology, Moore, Pergamaon press 1998.

3. Srivastava S., Tribiology in Industries, S Chand and Company limited, Delhi 2002.

4. Redzimovskay E I., Lubrication of bearings – Theoretical Principles and Design, Oxford

press company 2000.

ADVANCED THEORY OF VIBRATIONS

Course Content

UNIT-1

System with single degree of freedom: Review of simple harmonic motion, analysis of free

and forced vibration with or without different types of damping, numerical problems related

logarithmic decrement, force transmission to foundations, vibration isolation and

transmissibility.

UNIT-2

System with More than one degree of freedom: Systems, with two degree of freedom,

undamped vibration absorbers, equation of motion using influence Coefficients, generalized

coordinates and co-ordinates coupling, Orthogonality of natural modes; free and forced

vibration of multi-degree of freedom with viscous Damping: Lagrange's equations

UNIT-3

Vibration Measuring Instruments & Application: Principles of vibration measurement,

construction features of accelerometer and vibrometers, steps involved in vibration

measurement, Vehicle suspension, Dynamic vibration Absorber, Dynamics of Reciprocating

Engines.

UNIT-4

Solution of Eigen-Value problem, Transfer Matrix and Modal Analysis: self-excited

vibrations, criterion of stability, effect of friction OIL stability with common examples.

UNIT-5

Non-Linear Vibrations: Introduction of Non-linear vibration, free vibration with Non-linear

spring force or non-linear damping, phase plane, energy curves, integral curves lie nard's graphical

construction, method of isoclines.

Text Books:

1. L. Meirovitch, “Elements of Vibration Analysis”, McGraw Hill.

2. Kelly, Schaum’s“Mechanical Vibrations” O utline Series, Mc Graw Hill 1996.

Reference Books:

1. W. T. Thomson, M. D. Dahleh and C. Padmanabhan, “Theory of Vibration with

Applications”, Pearson Education Inc, 5th edition, 2008.

2. S. Graham Kelly, Schaum’s, “Mechanical Vibrations” outline Series, Tata McGraw Hill,

Special Indian Edition, 2007.

3. J. S. Rao“Theory and Practice of Mechanical Vibrations ”

FAILURE MECHANISM AND ANALYSIS

Course Content

UNIT-1

Introduction to Failure Analysis: Definition of failures, Classification of failures,

Instantaneous failures, Cumulative failures, Fundamental causes of failures-Deficiencies in

design, Deficiencies in selection of materials, Imperfection in materials, Deficiencies in

processing techniques, Errors in assembly, Improper service conditions. Objectives of Failure

analysis, Step by step procedure for Metallurgical failure analysis, Fracture types, Brittle

fractures, Ductile fractures, Fatigue fractures.

UNIT-2

Environment Induced Failures: Corrosion damage, Forms of corrosion-Uniform attack, Two

metal corrosion or galvanic corrosion, Crevice corrosion, Pitting corrosion, Inter-granular

corrosion, Selective leaching, Erosion corrosion, Corrosion cracking- Stress Corrosion

Cracking, Corrosion fatigue, Hydrogen cracking, Hydrogen degradation, Liquid metal

embrittlement, High temperature corrosion, corrosion failure mechanisms and Preventive

techniques.

UNIT-3

Wear Failures: Definition of wear, Types of wear-adhesive wear, Abrasive wear, Corrosive

wear,Erosive wear, fretting wear, Fatigue wear, Wear failure mechanisms and Preventive

techniquesFailure of fraction surfaces- failure of clutches, Failure of brakes, Failure of seals,

Creep failures,Stages of creep, Creep curve, Stress rupture, Failure modes and Preventive

techniques of frictionsurface and Seals.

UNIT-4

Failure mechanisms of important components: Failure modes of Shafts- Fatigue failures,

Wearfailures, Brittle fracture of failures, Ductile fracture of shafts, Distortion failure of shafts,

Corrosionfailure of shafts, Prevention technique, Failure modes of Bearings- Failure by wear,

Fretting,corrosion, Plastic flow, Brinelling, Rolling contact fatigue, Cavitation Failure modes

of gearsfailureby fatigue, Impact, Wear, Stress rupture. Failure modes of pressure vessels-

failure by25overheating, Stress corrosion cracking, Hydrogen embrittlement, Brittle fractures,

Ductile fractures, Creep and Stress rupture.

UNIT-5

Tools for failure analysis: Microscopic Examination-Metallurgical Microscope,

ScanningElectron Microscope, Transmission Electron Microscope, Physical testing-Tension

test, Hardnesstest, Impact test, Fatigue test Non-Destructive Testing techniques-Magnetic

particle inspection,Radiography, Liquid penetrant inspection, Eddy current testing, Ultrasonic

testing, AcousticEmission Testing, Thermography, Chemical analysis- Spectroscopy, Atomic

absorptionspectroscopy, Atomic emission spectroscopy.

Text Book:

1. Failure Analysis & Prevention American Society of Metal Handbook V 10.11 and 17.

Reference Books:

1. L.F. Pau “Failure Diagnosis and Performance Monitoring”.

2. H.P. Garg “Industrial Maintenance”.

MAINTENANCE OF MACHINERY

Course Content

UNIT – 1

Modes of Mechanical Failure: Definition of Failure Mode -Failure modes observed in

practice -Different Failure modes and their importance in maintenance.

UNIT – 2

Functions of Failure: Functions and Performance Standards -Functional Failures – Failure

Modes -Failure Effects. Failure Consequences: Hidden Failure Consequences -Safety and

Environmental consequences- Operational Consequences -Non-Operational Consequences.

UNIT – 3

Reliability Centred Maintenance: Introduction -Changing world of maintenance -

Maintenance and RCM -The seven Basic Questions –Implementing RCM - Achievements of

RCM.

UNIT – 4

Classification of mechanical Equipments and its maintenance: Machine Tools- Utilities-

Equipment- working principal – Basic Maintenance needs- Maintenance efforts – trouble

shooting- maintenance checklists- Pneumatics and Hydraulics in Maintenance.

UNIT – 5

Maintenance Procedures and Processes: Methods of Stopping Corrosion–Painting,

Electroplating and Coating Processes.

Text Books:

1. William T. File- Butterworth and Heinemann, “Cost Effective Maintenance -Design and

Implementation”.

2. John Moubray -Butterworth and Heinemann, “Reliability Centred Maintenance”.

Reference Books:

1. “Lindley Higgings”,“Maintenance Engineering Handbook”.

2. Stainer,“Plant Engineering Handbook” -McGraw Hill.

3. J.A. -John wiley and Sons,“Failure of Materials in Mechanical Designs -Analysis, Prediction

and Prevention” - Collins.

CONDITION BASED MAINTENANCE

Course content

UNIT-1

Condition Based Maintenance: Principal types and methods, Economics and application,

Computer applications to condition monitoring.

UNIT-2

Vibration Monitoring and analysis: Introduction machinery signature, transducers

selection,analysis technique, measurement location, severity criteria, permanent monitoring,

rotatingmachinery signals.

UNIT-3

Dynamic balancing and alignment of machinery: Dynamic balancing of rotors, Field balancing

inone plane, two planes and in several planes, Machinery alignment methods. rough alignment

method, Face peripheral dial indicator method, reverse indicator method Condition monitoring

ofball and roller bearings: Shock pulse method, The Kurtosis method, fibre optics method,

Contactresistant method, rolling element bearing activity monitor,(REBAM)

UNIT-4

Mechanical fault diagnosis by wear monitoring and lubricant analysis: Sources of

contamination,Wear process monitoring techniques. Performance trend monitoring: Machine

performancemonitoring, component behaviour monitoring. Corrosion monitoring: Need for

Corrosionmonitoring, Fields of application, Methods Corrosion monitoring

UNIT-5

Specialized condition monitoring techniques: Thermography, Radiography, Ferrography,

Acoustic emission monitoring, Noise monitoring. On line monitoring and diagnostic systems.

Condition monitoring in power plants, chemical plants and petrochemical plants.

Text Books:

1. R.A. Caollactt Chapman and hall, “Mechanical Fault Diagnosis and Condition Monitoring”,

1977.

Reference Books:

1. L.F. Pau Marcel Deker, Failure Diagnosis and Performance Monitoring.

2. Condition Monitoring and Condition based Maintenance, Update CEP ISTE New Delhi.

MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT-1

INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT- Role of marketing in today‘s

organizations – core concepts of marketing management: Orientation of businesses – the

evolution of marketing management concept. Marketing Mix: The 4ps namely Product, Price,

Place and promotion. Unique Selling Proposition. MARKETING ENVIRONMENT– actors

in the company‘s Micro Environmental Factors.: Customers, competitors, public, suppliers,

and Government agencies. Macro Environmental Factors: Demographic, Cultural, Social,

Technological and political influences on the company‘s marketing performance. Changes in

the company‘s marketing plan.

UNIT-2

CONSUMER MARKETS AND BUYING BEHAVIORS –A Model of consumer behaviour

– Major factors influencing consumer behaviour; Social, cultural, Personal and Psychological

factors. The buying decision process. The model of the buyer decision process. Types of buying

behaviour ORGANIZATIONAL MARKETS AND BUYING BEHAVIOR –the industrial

market – the reseller market – the government market. INDUSTRIAL MARKETS –

Characteristics of Industrial markets, Model of Buyer Behaviour, Major types of Buying

situations, Participants in the Business Buying Process. Major influences on Industrial Buyers,

The Industrial buying process. Differences between Industrial Markets & consumer Markets

with examples. THE GOVERNMENT MARKET- Characteristics of Government markets,

Problems & prospects of operating in Government markets, Advantages &limitations of

operating in the reseller market.

UNIT-3

MARKET SEGMENTATION – MARKET TARGETING – MARKET POSITIONING–

the marketing plan. Stages in the Segmentation Process, Segmentation variables:

Demographic, Geographical, Psychographic and behavioural variables evaluating market

segments, Target marketing, Patterns of target market selection, Market coverage strategies.

Market positioning: Definition, steps in market positioning, Competitive advantage through

positioning strategies, choosing the right competitive advantage. CONCEPT OF PRODUCT

LIFE CYCLE. - Different stages in the PLC, Different strategies in the stages of PLC. NEW

PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT PROCESS- Definition, Types of New products, eight

successive Stages in the new product development process. Reasons for new product failure.

UNIT-4

PRICING AND CHANNEL DECISIONS –The pricing objectives, methods and steps.

Channel types, General pricing approaches, Price discounts, types of Price discounts, Major

factors influencing pricing decisions. Channel Decisions: Types of channels, selection of

appropriate channel for consumer goods. PRODUCT BRANDING AND PACKAGING

DECISIONS- Branding decisions; Family brands, multi brand decisions, Brand extensions

Nature and importance of brands, Characteristics of a good brand name, Branding strategies of

producers and middlemen ,Building and using brand equity. Packaging & labelling decisions:

Nature and importance of packaging and labelling, Packaging strategies.

UNIT-5

COMMUNICATION AND PROMOTION MIX DECISION-.Steps in developing effective

communication. Objectives of promotional plan, six common promotional strategies. Above &

below the line advertising, Promotional mix, promoting products through Advertising,

Personal Selling, Publicity and Sales promotion. Advertising: Definition, Types of advertising,

Characteristics, advantages and limitations of different media, Sales promotion: Objectives of

sales promotion, types of sales promotion, Strategies of sales promotion: Push, pull and

combination strategies, methods of sales promotion Personal Selling: Definition, steps in

direct selling, advantages and limitations of direct selling. Publicity: Definition, Importance

of publicity in promotion, advantages and limitations. Popular publicity campaigns in Indian

Environment.

Text Books:

1. Marketing Management: analysis, planning and control – Philip Kotler & Kevin Lane

Keller – PHI. 13thEdition.

Reference Books:

1. Fundamentals of Marketing – William J Stanton – John Wiley., 2000

2. Marketing Management-Global Perspective, Indian context, Ramaswamy and

Namakumari, Macmillan India Ltd. 2014, 5thEdition.

QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES

Course Content

UNIT – 1

Introduction: Arranging data, frequency distributions, graphing frequency distributions.

Measures of Central tendency: Definition, objectives, types and application of: Mean,

median, mode. Measures of Dispersion: The idea of dispersion, the range, the quartile

deviation, the mean deviation, the standard deviation, the coefficient of variation, Skewness

and Kurtosis.

UNIT – 2

Probability: The concept, types of probabilities, Laws of probability, Probabilities under statistical

independence and dependence, conditional probability and Baye's theorem.

Probability distributions: Concept, Discrete and continuous probability distributions, Binomial,

Poisson, Poisson as an approximation to binomial and Normal distributions.

UNIT –3

Sampling: Types of sampling, sampling distributions, Estimation: Point & interval estimates,

Features of a good estimator, Confidence intervals for mean & proportion, sample size

determination.

UNIT – 4

Testing of hypothesis: Hypothesis testing of mean and proportion, differences between means

& proportions, Chi-square test for independence & goodness of fit -Analysis of variance.

UNIT - 5

Correlation and Regression: Introduction, Scatter diagram and types of correlation,

Estimation using least square regression, Standard error of estimate and prediction intervals,

Coefficient of determination, Correlation coefficient.

Text Books:

1. Richard I. Levin, ―Statistics for management‖, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, 1990.

Reference Books:

1. S.C. Gupta & V. K. Kapoor, ―Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics‖, Sultan Chand &

sons publishers, 1987.

2. N. P. Bali, P. N. Gupta, C. P. Gandhi, ―Quantitative Techniques‖, Firewall Media, 2007.

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT – 1

Introduction to Operations Management: Historical development of OM. Discussion on

goods and service Transformation process Types of Decision making process in OM

Discussion on production function (Conversion Process) Types of production systems with

examples. Introduction to demand forecasting, Factors affecting demand forecasting and types

of demand. Types and characteristics of forecasting methods. Moving average method of

forecasting with example Weighted average method with examples. Time series method with

examples. Regression method. Exponential smoothening method with examples

UNIT –2

Introduction to plant location: Factors affecting plant location. Discussion of methods

implant location like factor rating method, load distance model and gravity model Problems

related to plant location. Introduction to plant layout.: Discussion of types of product flow

Types of layout Product layout Process layout Fixed position layout Line balancing Method

adopted in line balancing Discussion on relationship diagram Discussion on factor to be

considered in designing plant layout.

UNIT - 3

Product Development and Design: Introduction, purpose of product design, product analysis,

framework of process design – Product Planning, Process Design: MACRO & MICRO, design

for manufacture, Design for Excellence. Introduction to materials management, purchasing,

stores management, Inventory control or management, standardization, simplification and

value analysis, Ergonomics and Just in Time (JIT) manufacturing.

UNIT – 4

Introduction to Materials Planning: Discussion on procedures and benefits. Product tree

structure and MRP. Introduction to Inventory management, material classification and

codification, Problems on MRP. Aggregate planning and its strategies Discussion on pure

strategies Aggregate planning as distribution model. Problems related to Aggregate planning.

UNIT – 5

Introduction to job scheduling: Discussion on Different types of scheduling Forward loading

and backward loading Assumption made in job sequencing Problems on n _Jobs 2 Machine

Problems on n _Jobs 3 Machine Problems on n-jobs m machine. Introduction to Supply chain

management, steps involved in supply chain management, issues in supply chain management.

Text Books:

1. Production and Operations Management prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, 9 th print

2004.

2. Theory and problems of Operations Management, Tata-Mcgraw hill publishing company

limited, 2 nd edition 2004, Joseph G Monks.

Reference Books:

1. Production Systems, Planning, Analysis and C ontrol JAMES.L. RIGGS,

2. Operations Management, ROGER.G. SCHROEDER, Mc Grawhill, 2002.

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT – 1

Building a Strategic Frame Work to Analyse Supply Chains: Supply Chain Definition,

Supply Chain Stages, Decision Phases in A Supply Chain, Process views, some examples of

Supply Chains, Competitive and Supply Chain Strategies, Achieving Strategic Fit, Drivers of

Supply Chain Performance, Framework for Structuring Drivers-Inventory, Transportation,

Facilities and Information.

UNIT – 2

Designing the Supply Chain Network: Role of Distribution in Supply Chain, Design of

Distribution Network, Factors Influencing Distribution, Network Design, Frame work for

Network Design Decisions. Facility Location and Network Design: Facility Location,

Capacity Allocation, Impact of Uncertainty on SCN, Discounted Cash Flow Analysis,

Evaluating Network Design Decisions Using Decision Trees. (No Numerical Problems).

UNIT – 3

Planning and Managing Inventories in a Supply Chain: Cycle Inventory, Managing Multi-

Echelon Cycle Inventory, Safety Inventory-Definition and Role, Supply Uncertainty- Impact

on Safety Inventory, Replenishment Policies (Theoretical), Optimal Level of Product

Availability, Managerial Levers to Improve Supply Chain Profitability. Sourcing: Role of

Sourcing, Supplier–Scoring and Assessment, Selection and Contracts, Design Collaboration.

UNIT – 4

Transportation and Pricing Products: Role of Transportation in Supply Chain, Modes of

Transportation and Their Characteristics, Designing Transport Network, Trade Off in

Transport Design, Tailored Transportation, Role of Revenue Management in Supply Chain,

Revenue Management for: Multiple Customer segments, Perishable Assets, Seasonal Demand,

Bulk and Spot Contracts. (Numerical Problems). Coordination: Coordination in Supply

Chain, Bullwhip Effect, Obstacles to Coordination, Managerial Levers to Achieve

Coordination, Building Strategic Partnerships.

UNIT – 5

Role of IT and Eme rging Concepts: Role of IT in Supply Chain, Supply Chain IT Frame

Work, CRM, Internal SCM, SRM, E-Business: Role and Frame work, Emerging Concepts:

Reverse Logistics, RFID Systems, Lean Supply Chains, Implementation of Six Sigma in

Supply Chain.

Text Books:

1. Supply Chain Management-2001, Strategy, Planning and Operation. Sunil Chopra and

Peter Meindl; Pearson Education Asia, ISBN: 81-7808-272-1.

Reference Books:

1. Supply Chain Redesign-Transforming Supply Chains into Integrated Value Systems, Robert

B Handfield, Emest L Nichols, Jr.2002, Pearson Education Inc, ISBN: 81-297- 0113-8.

2. Modelling the Supply Chain-Jeremy F Shapiro, Duxbury 2002, Thomson Learning,

ISBN 0-534-37363.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT – 1

Introduction: Capital investments, types of capital investments, Phases of capital budgeting,

objectives of capital budgeting, common weakness in capital budgeting. Generation and

screening of project ideas: Tools to identify investment opportunities, scouting for project

ideas project rating index.

UNIT – 2

Market and demand analysis, technical analysis, cost of project means of finance, cost of

production, working capital requirement and its analysis. Time value for money, investment

criteria- NPV, IPR, Benefit Cost Ratio, Payback period, Project cash flow. Balance sheet and

Budgetary control.

UNIT - 3

Risk analysis: Sources measures and perspectives of Risk, discussion on different methods of

Risk analysis, like sensitivity analysis, scenario analysis, break-even analysis and decision tree

analysis. Social Cost Benefit Analysis: rationale for SCABA, UNIDO approach, Little-

Mirrles‘s approach, shadow pricing, public sectors investment decision in India.

UNIT – 4

Project organizations: Types of project organizations structure for project management,

Human aspects in project Management. Networks Techniques in Project Management:

Development of project network, time estimation, determination of critical path. PERT Model

and CPM model. Network cost system.

UNIT – 5

Project review and administrative aspects, control of in-process projects, post completion

audit Atonement Analysis. Discussion of case studies in project management.

Text Books:

1. Projects - Appraisal, Preparation, Budgeting and Implementation – Prasanna Chandra -

Tata Mcgraw Hill.

Reference Books:

1. Hand book of project management -Dennis lock

2. Project management-Dennis lock.

ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR

Course Content

UNIT-1

The Foundations of Organization Behaviour- The Foundations of Organization Behavior-

Historical Background, Research Methodology, Theoretical Frameworks. OB in global

context. Role of Technology in OB. INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR-ABILITY-Definition, Types

of abilities-Physical Abilities and Intellectual Abilities, Ability job fit. INDIVIDUAL

BEHAVIOR- PERCEPTION: Introduction- Perceptual process model, Factors influencing

Perception, Attribution theory, Kelly‘s model of attribution, Stages of the perceptual process,

Perceptual biases and errors, Perception and individual decision making.

UNIT-2

INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR– PERSONALITY-Definition, Determinants of personality,

personality traits, Big Five model, 4 type thesis, personality disorders. Personality attributes in

influencing OB.INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR-LEARNING–Definition, theories of Learning-

Classical conditioning, operant conditioning and social learning. Reinforcement and schedules

of reinforcement. Positive reinforcement and Negative reinforcement, Behaviour modifications

and shaping behaviour through learning. Learning attributes in influencing OB.

UNIT-3

INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR–MOTIVATION-Definition, Early theories of Motivation,

contemporary theories, Implications of the theories for the managers. INDIVIDUAL

BEHAVIOR ATTITUDE, VALUES AND JOB SATISFACTION: Definition, formation of

attitude, theories of attitude, effect of job satisfaction on employee performance, Measuring

job satisfaction, Impact of satisfied and dissatisfied employees. Values: Types of values,

Importance of values, loyalty and ethical behaviour. Motivational and attitudinal attributes in

influencing OB.

UNIT-4

FOUNDATIONS OF GROUP BEHAVIOR- Groups and types of groups, Stages in

groupdevelopment. Performance and group size. Cohesive groups- advantages and

disadvantages.Strengths and weaknesses of group decision making. Group structure-

differences in groupstatus, size and social loafing, Group decision making; Group decision

making techniques.Group dynamics. Leadership Styles and Skills: Leadership and

management, Types of traittheories; advantages and limitations, Types of Behavioural theories:

advantages andlimitations. Communication and Skills and Inter-group behaviour.

UNIT-5

ORGANIZATION CULTURE- organizational Change -Organizational

Development,Organizational Climate-Work stress. Realities of Organizational Life- Politics,

Power &Conflict. Politics: Definition, Factors contributing to political behaviour,

Organizationalpolitics and impression Management. Power: Definition, Bases of power,

Dependency,Power tactics, Power in groups: coalitions. Conflict: Definition, Transitions in

conflictthought, the conflict process, Incompatibility, cognition and personalization,

bargainingstrategies in conflict resolution, the negotiation process.

Text Books:

1. Organizational Behavior- Stephen P. Robbins -Prentice Hall India.

Reference Books:

1. Organizational Behavior- Fred L uthans -Mcgraw Hill.

2. Human Behavior at work -Keith Davis -Prentice Hall India.

3. Organizational psychology -Robin, Kolb, etc.

THERMODYNAMICS AND COMBUSTION ENGINEERING

Course Content

UNIT-1

Work and heat interaction, first law of thermodynamics, steady and unsteady flows with energy

transaction. Second law of thermodynamics, reversibility, corollaries of the second law and

entropy. Available energy, availability analysis of open and closed systems

UNIT-2

Properties of pure substances, properties of gases and gas mixtures, combined first and second

laws of thermodynamics. Phase and reaction equilibrium, equilibrium constants, calculation of

equilibrium composition of multi component gaseous mixtures

UNIT-3

Equation of state and calculation of thermodynamics and transport properties of substances.

Reaction rates and first, second and higher order reaction, in gaseous, liquid and solid phases.

UNIT-4

Combustion and flame velocities, laminar and turbulent flames, premixed and diffusion flames,

their properties and structures.

UNIT-5

Theories of flame propagation, thermal diffusion and comprehensive theories, problems of

flame stability, flashback and blow off. Combustion of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.

Combustion of fuel droplets and sprays. Combustion system combustion in closed and open

systems, application to boiler, gas turbine combustors and rocket motors.

Text Books:

1. Engineering Thermodynamics - P.K. Nag, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications.

2. Fundamentals of Classical Thermodynamics - G. Van Wylen and R.E. Sonntag, Wiley, 1986.

Reference Books:

1. Energy. Combustion and Environment - N.A. Chigier, McGraw-Hill, 1981

2. Introduction to combustion phenomena - A. Murthy Kanury, Gordon and Breach, 1975.

3. Fuels and combustion - S.P. Sharma and Chandra Mohan, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1984.

4. Engineering Thermodynamics - Onkar Singh. New age International Publications.

ELEMENTS OF THERMAL SCIENCES AND ENGINEERING

Course Content

UNIT-1

Thermodynamics: Work and heat interaction, first law of thermodynamics, steady and

unsteady flows with energy transaction. Second law of thermodynamics, reversibility, PMMI,

PMM-II. Available energy, availability analysis of open and closed systems. Properties of pure

substances, properties of gases and gas mixtures, combined first and second laws of

thermodynamics. Maxwell relations.

Introduction and one-dimensional heat transfer: The modes of heat transfer, the laws of

heat transfer, problems Heat conduction in solids: Simple steady state problems in heat

conduction, concept of thermal resistance, the critical radius problem, the differential equation

of heat conduction, heat generation, two dimensional steady state heat conduction, unsteady

state processes, extended surfaces- fins, other techniques for solving heat conduction problems,

the finite difference method for steady state situations, the finite difference method for unsteady

state situations, problems.

UNIT-2

Kinematics of Fluids- Fluid properties, Methods of describing fluid motion – Lagrangian

method, Eulerian method; translation, rotation and rate of deformation; stream lines, path lines

and streak line; material derivative and acceleration; vorticity.

Computational Fluid Dynamics: Basic Concepts - Dimensionless form of equations;

Simplified mathematical models; Hyperbolic, Parabolic & Elliptic systems. Properties of

numerical solutions (Consistency, Stability, Conservation, Convergence and Accuracy) Finite

Difference Methods - Discretisation; Boundary conditions; error propagation; Introduction to

spectral methods; examples. Finite volume method - Surface & volume integrals;

Interpolation & differentiation; Boundary conditions; Examples

UNIT-3

Internal Combustion Engines: Ideal Cycle analysis, Fuel-air cycle analysis. Combustion in

IC Engines: Combustion in SI Engines, Combustion in CI engines, Ignition delay period,

factors affecting delay period, Knock in CI engines. Air pollution due to IC engines, Euro

norms, Emission control methods – thermal converters, catalytic converters, particulate traps,

Ammonia injection systems, exhaust gas recirculation.

Alternate fuels for I.C engines: Availability and Suitability and properties of Potential

Alternative Fuels – Ethanol, Methanol, DEE, DME, Hydrogen, LPG, Natural Gas, Producer

Gas, Bio gas and Bio- diesel, Properties, Merits and Demerits. Emission characteristics.

UNIT-4

Refrigeration System: Types of refrigerants, their properties, Components of Refrigeration

system, Tonne of Refrigeration,Various methods of Refrigeration- Vapour Compression

Refrigeration system, Vapour Absorption Refrigeration system, Steam jet Refrigeration

system, Dry ice refrigeration, Thermoelectric refrigeration, Vortex refrigeration. Working

cycle representation, Expression for C.O.P.Psychometry: Psychometry and psychometric

properties. Relations, psychometric chart, psychometric processes. Requirements of comfort

air conditioning, comfort chart, Design consideration. Summer air conditioning system, winter

air conditioning.

UNIT-5

Turbo Machinery: Introduction to turbo machines. Transfer of energy to fluids. Performance

characteristics. Fan laws. Dimensionless parameters. Specific speed. Selection of centrifugal,

axial, mixed flow, Axial flow machines.

Steam cycles: Carnot Cycle,rankine cycle, thermal efficiency of steam power plant.Reheating

of steam. Regeneration, regenerative feed water heating, feed water heaters. Layout of steam

power plant. Numerical Problems.

Reference Books:

1. Bejan, A., Advanced Engineering Thermodynamics, John Wiley and Cons, 2004,

2. Nag. P. K, Heat Transfer, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002,

3. Bansal, R. K., Fluid Mechanics, Saurabh and Co., New Delhi, 1985,

4. Muralidhar. K., and Sundararajan, T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”,

1. Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1995.

5. Dr. V. Ganesan, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1995,

6. Dr. S. S. Thipse, “Alternate Fuels for IC Engines”, Jaico Publishing house, 2010,

2. Arora and Domkundawar, A Course in refrigeration and Air- Conditioning – Danpat Rai & Co

Publications, 2001

3. V. Kadambi and Manohar Prasad, An Introduction to Energy Conversion, Volume III, Turbo

machinery, New Age International Publishers, reprint 2008.

4. Holman, J.P., Thermodynamics, Fourth Edition, McGraw – Hill Inc., 2006,

5. Kumar, K.L., Engineering Fluid Mechanics, Eurasia Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002

6. Ozisik. M.N., Heat Transfer – A Basic Approach, McGraw-Hill Co., 1985

7. Turbines, Compressors & Fans, S. M. Yahya, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd., 2nd edition, 2002

8. Stoecker W.F., Refrigeration and Air conditioning, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1989.

9. John B. Heywood, “IC Engines fundamentals”, McGraw-Hill Publications, 2012.

10. Ghoshdasdidar. P. S, “Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Ltd., 1998,

11. 16. Subas, V. Patankar “Numerical heat transfer fluid flow”, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation,

1980.

ADVANCED MATERIALS AND PROCESSING

Course Content

UNIT-1

Classification and characteristics: Metals, Ceramics, Polymers and composites. General

properties and structure: Atoms, molecules bonds in solids, Crystalline - Defects in Metallic

structure, Dislocations and plastic deformation - Strengthening mechanism - grain size, dislocation

- Cold work, precipitation hardening, dispersion hardening - phase reactions, fatigue and Creep

behavior.

UNIT-2

Ferrous Alloys: iron carbon equilibrium diagrams - Steels and cast irons - properties, structure,

composition and applications transformation hardening in steels - TIT diagrams - Heat treatment

processes - Effect of alloying elements - High alloy steels, Stainless steel types, tool Steels,

Manganese steels, heat resistant steels, HSLA, Maraging steels.

UNIT-3

Non Ferrous alloys: AlIoys of copper, Aluminum, nickel, magnesium, titanium, lead, tin, Zinc -

composition, heat treatment, structure, properties and application.

Polymers and polymerizations: Structure and properties of thermoplastics and thermo sets –

Engineering Applications - property modifications - Mechanical and thermal behavior – processing

methods.

Ceramics: Nature and structure of Ceramics - Refractory Abrasives glasses - glass ceramics -

Advanced ceramics processing methods.

UNIT-4

Composites : Definition - classification and characteristics of composite materials - Volume

fraction - laminated composites particulate composites, fibrous composites - Types of

reinforcements, their shape and size - production and properties of fiber reinforced plastics, Metal

Matrix composites and ceramic matrix composites - Applications.

UNIT-5

Processing of Polymers: composites, ceramics - thermal spraying - Ion beam machining diamond

coating techniques-tribological Applications.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Engineering Metallurgy - Raymond and Higgens - ELBS/EA

2. Introduction to Material Science and Engineering - James.F.Shackleford - Mc Millan, NY -

7th edition.

3. Powder Metallurgy-Metals Hand Book -ASM, USA - Vol.7, 1974.

4. Composite Materials - Science and Engineering - Chawla K.K. , Springer - Verlag, Newyork

- 2nd edition, 1998.

5. Cast Metal Matrix Composites ASM Metals Hand Book - P.K. Rohagti - VI5.

6. Elements of Material science and Engineering - Van Vlack L.H. - Addison Wesley, NY -

1989.

SURFACE TREATMENT AND FINISHING

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Testing machines and sensors: types of Universal Testing machines and principles of

operations, Machine stiffness, load and strain measurement. Calibration and verification of

UTM, Friction, wear and surface testing: Testing of sliding contact, damage, abrasive wear,

adhesive wear, erosive wear, Testing and determination of surface characteristics of solid

materials.(Surface roughness measurements) Importance of calibration of Testing Instruments:

Calibration methods and standards Tests / experiments based on methods with active reference

to various codes and standard for each test.

UNIT- 2

Failure Analysis: Principles and Approaches of Failure analysis, objectives, scope, planning,

preparation, Failure Analysis procedures, examination of damages and materials evaluation,

Tools and Techniques in FA – An overview. Appearances of fracture in common conditions

like unit axial loads, tensional and shear loads, fatigue and creep loading. Microscopy, Optical

microscope, scanning electron microscope, preparation of Specimens for microscopic study,

Speed & Control of Testing Background, Developments in testing Machine Technology,

Effects of testing rates on properties, Results before servo control, Results from servo-

controlled machines.

UNIT- 3

Strain Rate Testing, test machine requirements, Specimens Measurements, General Definitions

Strength Hardening Constitutive Relations to Model Material Strain Rate Dependency.

Lubrication & Determination of characteristics of lubricants: Introduction, Types of lubricants,

characteristics of lubricants Methods of lubrication, four ball testing.

UNIT- 4

Fundamentals of Electroplating, galvanizing, Hot dip metal coating, thin coating, thin coating,

chromium plating, Nickel plating, Vacuum coating, FVD & CVD metal spraying - Methods,

surface preparation, mechanical, Properties of sprayed metals: Various types and plasma

coating. Plastic coating of metal-PVC coating Spherodising process details, phosphate coating

mechanism of formation, testing of surface coating- Various methods used.

UNIT- 5

Heat treatment methods, annealing, normalizing, tempering, case hardening methods, flame

hardening, sub-zero treatment, heat treatment methods for gears, spindles, cutting tools,

advanced coating technologies, hard facing, electrode position technique, Nano coatings,

coating characterization

Text Books:

1. Principles of metal surface treatment and protection-Pergamon Press Gabe, David Russell

Description,Oxford;NewYork-2ded.,1978.

Reference Books:

1. Surface preparations & finishes for Metals-James A Murphy-Mc Graw Hill.

2. Handbook of metal treatment and testing-John Wiley& sons.

3. Heat Treatment of Metals–Zakrov-MlR Publications.

MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Classification and Consideration: Mechanical Systems, Fluidic Systems; Example and MEMS

Architecture; Introduction to Micro-fabrication and Micromachining.

UNIT- 2

Devising and synthesis: Micro Accelerometers as Micro Electro Mechanical Micro-devices

UNIT- 3

Modeling of Micro Electro Mechanical System and Devices: Model developments of Micro

Electro Magnetic, Mechanics and its application to MEMS, Direct current Micro Machines.

UNIT- 4

Induction Micro Machine, Synchronous Micro Machine, Permanent – Magnet Stepper Micro

Motors.

UNIT- 5

Controls of MEMS: Analog control of MEMS, Sliding mode control of MEMS, Digital control

of MEMS MEMS Materials

Examples in Synthesis, Analysis, Design and Fabrication of MEMS: Axial Electro Magnetic

Micro Motor, Analysis of translational micro transducers

TEXT BOOKS:

1. “Fundamentals of micro fabrication” - The science of miniaturization - Max J. Madou,

Nanogen corporation, USA, CRC press, March 2002.

2. “Nano- and Micro Electro Mechanical Systems”-Second Edition, Sergey Edward Lyshevski,

CRC Press, Boca Ratron London.

REFERENCE BOOK:

1. “Integrated MEMS” - Sherif Sedky, Artech House, Boston London.

FLUID POWER AUTOMATION

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Fluid Power Generating/Utilizing Elements: Hydraulic pumps and motor gears, vane, piston

pumps-motors-selection and specification-Drive characteristics - Linear actuator - Types,

mounting details, cushioning - power packs - construction. Reservoir capacity, heat dissipation,

accumulators - standard circuit symbols, circuit (flow) analysis.

UNIT- 2

Control and Regulation Elements: Direction flow and pressure control valves-Methods of

actuation, types, sizing of ports-pressure and temperature compensation, overlapped and under

lapped spool valves-operating characteristics- Electro Hydraulic System, Electro Hydraulic servo

valves- Different types characteristics and performance.

Comparison of Hydraulics & Pneumatics: Need for Automation, Hydraulic & Pneumatic

Comparison - ISO symbols for fluid power elements, Hydraulic, pneumatics - Selection criteria

and examples related to selection criteria.

UNIT- 3

Advanced Hydraulics: Types of proportional control devices- Pressure relief, Flow control,

Direction control, Hydraulic symbols, Spool configurations, Electrical operation, Basic electrical

circuits and operation, Solenoid design, Comparison between conventional and proportional

valves.

Methods of Control: Comparison between analogue and digital control, Proportional Attributes,

Ramp, Gain, Dead band, Dither, Pulse width modulation, Amplifier cards, Principles of operation,

Design and application, Analogue and digital, Closed Loop, Internal and external feedback devices,

Operation and application of closed loop systems, Integrated Electronics Option Frequency

Response, Principles of operation, Bode diagrams and their use in manufacturer’s data, PID control,

Practical Exercises, Commissioning and set-up procedures, Open loop circuits, Closed loop

circuits, Interface to the control.

UNIT- 4

Electrical Control of Fluid Power: Electrical control of Hydraulics and Pneumatic, use of relays,

timers, counters, PLC Ladder diagram for various circuits, motion controllers, use of field busses

in circuits Electronic Circuits for various Open loop Control and Close loop (servo) control of

Hydraulics and Pneumatics.

UNIT- 5

Circuit Design: Typical industrial hydraulic circuits-Design methodology – Ladder diagram

cascade, method-truth table-Karnaugh map method-sequencing circuits-combinational and logic

circuit.

Applications of Propositional and Servo Valves: Velocity Control, Position Control and

Directional Control applications example: Paper industry, Process Industry, Printing Sawmill,

Woodworking, Extrusion Press, Powder Methodology Press, Continuous Casting, Food and

Packaging, Injection Moulding, Solar Energy and Automobile.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. S. R. Majumdar - Pnematic Systems, TMH.1995

2. Antony Esposito, Fluid Power Systems and control Prentice-Hall, 1988

3. R. Srinivasan Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control published by Vijay Nicole Imprints Private Ltd.

4. Andrew Parr, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Butterworth - Heineamann

REFERENCES:

1. Herbert R. Merritt, Hydraulic control systems, John Wiley & Sons, Newyork, 1967

2. Dudbey.A.Peace, Basic Fluid Power, Prentice Hall Inc, 1967

3. Peter Rohner, Fluid Power logic circuit design. The Macmillan Press Ltd., London, 1979

4. Peter Rohner, Fluid Power Logic Circuit Design, Mcmelan Prem, 1994

5. Servo Pneumatics D.Scholz.A.Zimmermann

FINITE ELEMENT METHODS

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Introduction to Finite Element Method: Engineering Analysis, History, Advantages,

Classification, Basic steps, Convergence criteria, Role of finite element analysis in computer-aided

design., Mathematical Preliminaries, Differential equations formulations, Variational formulations,

weighted residual methods

One-Dimensional Elements-Analysis of Bars and Trusses, Basic Equations and Potential

Energy Functional, 1-0 Bar Element, Admissible displacement function, Strain matrix, Stress

recovery, Element equations, Stiffness matrix, Consistent nodal force vector: Body force, Initial

strain, Assembly Procedure, Boundary and Constraint Conditions, Single point constraint, Multi-

point constraint, 2-D Bar Element, Shape functions for Higher Order Elements.

UNIT- 2

Two-Di;1ensional Elements-Analysis of Plane Elasticity Problems: Three-Noded Triangular

Element (TRIA 3), Four-Noded Quadrilateral Element (QUAD 4), Shape functions for Higher

Order Elements (TRIA 6, QUAD 8)

Axi-symmetric Solid Elements-Analysis of Bodies of Revolution under axi-symmetric

loading: Axisymmetric Triangular and Quadrilateral Ring Elements. Shape functions for Higher

Order Elements

UNIT- 3

Three-Dimensional Elements-Applications to Solid Mechanics Problems: Basic Equations and

Potential Energy Functional, Four-Noded Tetrahedral Element (TET 4), Eight-Noded Hexahedral

Element (HEXA 8), Tetrahedral elements, Hexahedral elements: Serendipity family, Hexahedral

elements: Lagrange family. Shape functions for Higher Order Elements

Beam Elements-Analysis of Beams and Frames: 1–D Beam Element, 2–D Beam Element,

Problems.

UNIT- 4

Heat Transfer I Fluid Flow: Steady state heat transfer, 1 D heat conduction governing equation,

boundary conditions, One dimensional element, Functional approach for heat conduction, Galerkin

approach for heat conduction, heat flux boundary condition, 1 D heat transfer in thin fins. Basic

differential equation for fluid flow in pipes, around solid bodies, porous media.

UNIT- 5

Dynamic Considerations: Formulation for point mass and distributed masses, Consistent element

mass matrix of one-dimensional bar element, truss element, axisymmetric triangular element,

quadrilateral element, beam element. Lumped mass matrix, Evaluation of eigen values and eigen

vectors, Applications to bars, stepped bars, and beams.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Chandrupatla T. R., “Finite Elements in engineering”- 2nd Edition, PHI, 2007.

2. Lakshminarayana H. V., “Finite Elements Analysis”– Procedures in Engineering, Universities

Press, 2004

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rao S. S. “Finite Elements Method in Engineering”- 4th Edition, Elsevier, 2006

2. P. Seshu, “Textbook of Finite Element Analysis”-PHI, 2004.

3. J. N. Reddy, “Finite Element Method”- McGraw -Hill International Edition. Bathe K. J.

Finite Elements Procedures, PHI.

4. Cook R. D., et al. “Concepts and Application of Finite Elements Analysis”- 4th Edition,

Wiley & Sons, 2003.

QUANTITATE TECHNIQUES IN DECISION MAKING

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Introduction: Statistics and managerial decisions, statistical data and Operations Research

techniques. Presentation and Analysis of Statistical data: Tables and graphs as data presentation

devices, Frequency distribution, histogram and cumulative frequency curves.

UNIT- 2

Fundamentals of Statistics, probability and probability distributions:

Measures of central tendency and location, Measure of dispersion, skewness and kurtosis,

Probability and rules of probability, Random variables and probability distributions - Binomial,

Poisson, Hyper geometric and Normal.

Decision Making under Uncertainty: Alternative criteria for decision under uncertainty,

Bayesian approach and Incremental analysis.

UNIT- 3

Correlation, Regression and Multivariate Analysis: Bivariate frequency distribution and scatter

diagram, Correlation analysis and Regression analysis, Non linear regression, auto correlation and

multiple regression analysis, Multivariate analysis.

Linear Programming Problem: Formulation of L.P.P., Solution of L.P.P. by graphical method,

Solution of L.P.P. by simplex method, Concept of duality and solution of dual problems, Solution

of L.P.P. by dual simplex method.

UNIT- 4

Transportation and Assignment Problems: Structure of transportation problem and various

methods to find LB.F.S., Optimality test of transportation problems by MODI method, Solution of

degeneracy and unbalanced transportation problems, Assignment problems and solution by

Hungarian method and Traveling Salesman problem.

Theory of Games: Two person zero sum game, Minimax & maximin strategies, Solution of game

by dominance rules, arithmetic and algebraic methods, Solution of game by graphical method and

method of matrices, Solution of game by Linear programming approach and approximate method

to solve game problems.

Network Analysis: PERT and CPM, Network construction and determination of critical path,

Calculation of ES, EF, LS, LF, TF, FF and IF, Crashing of a project, Scheduling of a project.

Waiting Line: Basic structure of queuing systems and characteristics, Expressions for M/M/l

queuing model.

UNIT- 5

Simulation of Management systems: Simulation and Monte Carlo method, Waiting line and

inventory simulation models.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Quantitative Techniques for managerial decisions - Srivastava U.K. et. al - New Age

International Private Limited – 1997.

2. Operations Research: An Introduction - Gupta and Heera - S.Chand and Company - 3rd

Edition, 2003.

3. Operations Research - H. Taha - Prentice Hall India - 8th edition, 2002.

4. Introduction to Operations Research - Hillier and Liberman - McGraw Hill International -

8th edition, 2004.

Stream B: Advance Course

QUALITY AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING

Course content

UNIT-1

Basic Concepts: Definitions of Quality and Reliability, Parameters and Characteristics, Quality

control, Statistical Quality Control, Reliability concepts. Concepts in Probability and Statistics

Events, Sample Space, Probability rules, Conditional probability, Dependent and Independent

Events, Application of Probability concepts in Quality Control, Problems.

UNIT-2

Statistical Aspects and Probability Distributions: Statistical Tools in Quality Control, the

Concept of Variation, Graphical Tools for data representation and analysis, Discrete and

Continuous Distributions, Normal, Poisson, Binomial, Weibull Distribution, Problems. Failure

Data Analysis: Introduction, Failure Data, Quantitative measures, MTTF, MTBF, Bath tub Curve,

Mean Life, Life Testing, Problems, Introduction to Failure Mode and Effect Analysis.

UNIT-3

Hazard Models: Introduction, Constant Hazard, Linearly increasing hazard, the Weibull model,

(Derivation not required, emphasis to be on applications). System reliability Series, Parallel and

Mixed Configurations, Block Diagram Concept, r-out-of-n structure, solving problems using

mathematical models.

UNIT-4

Reliability Improvement and Allocation: Difficulty in achieving reliability, Methods for

improving reliability during design, Different techniques available to improve reliability,

Optimization, Reliability-Cost trade off, Elements of a typical reliability program, setting

overall reliability goals, Reliability Apportionment, Prediction and Analysis, Problems.

UNIT-5

Maintainability and Availability: Introduction, Formulas, Techniques available to improve

maintainability and availability, trade-off among reliability, maintainability and availability,

Simple problems.

Text Books:

1. Halpern, Seigmund,"The Assurance Sciences", Prentice Hall International, New Jersey, U.S.A. (1978).

2. Srinath, L.S,"Concepts in Reliability Engineering", Affiliated East-West Press Private Limited, New

Delhi, India, (1985).

Reference Books:

1. Juran, J.M. and Gryna, F.M,"Quality Planning and Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill publishing

Company Ltd., New Delhi, India. (1982).

2.Blanchard, Benjamin S,"Logistics Engineering and Management", Prentice Hall Internatiolnal, New

Jersey, U.S.A. (1986).

3. Kraus, John W, "Maintainability and Reliability", Handbook of Reliability I Engineering and

Management, Editors -Ireson. W .a. and Coombs, C.F. McGraw Hill, Book Company Inc., U .S.A.

(1988).

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Fundamentals of Hydraulics: introduction: Hydraulics power, Hydraulics systems-

Advantages, Limitations and applications, Pascal’s Law, structure of hydraulic control

systems, source of hydraulic power, Hydraulic Fluids, Hydraulics systems: Basic industrial

systems, system inputs, system outputs, the control of the system, servo systems, Hydraulics,

circuits-symbols and diagrams.

UNIT- 2

Hydraulic system components: Reservoir, accumulator pumps motors, hydraulic cylinders,

hydraulic values, filters and strainers, pressure gauges, flow meters, pressure switches,

hydraulic stools, pipes and fittings. Installation of hydraulics Systems: Hydraulics assemblies,

hydraulics on the machine, pipe work, tube fittings, seals and adaptors, flexible hoses and quick

action couplings, filling installation check over.

UNIT- 3

Operation and maintenance procedures: Understanding the principles of hydraulics, cause

of pressure, pressure loss, energy loss by leakage, power balance of the system, cleanliness, air

bleed and points, operate controls, values settings, trouble shooting of hydraulics systems,

preventive maintains, starting and stopping, information equipment and facilities, circuit

diagrams, components data, preventive maintenance schedules, tool kit modification and

repair, pressure gauge connection, sealing methods, charging an accumulator, charging

procedure, fault finding.

UNIT- 4

Pneumatic powe r unit- Introduction-Areas of application of pneumatic power unit- elements

of pneumatic power units, classification of pneumatic power units, working principle of

pneumatic power units, Advantages and limitations, choice of working medium, characteristics

of compressed air, pneumatic control systems, fluid conditioners and FRL units, Applications,

rod- less cylinder types, rotary cylinders-construction and applications, symbols.

UNIT- 5

Pneumatic circuit symbols- Introduction to circuit symbols-values symbols-directions control

values. Actuation of values- non return values-pressure control values- flow control values-air

cylinders-classification and maintains. Circuits- elements-control of simple acting and double

acting cylinders- simultaneous control of two cylinders -one cycle operation circuit,

Troubleshooting of pneumatic systems- Documentation- the causes and effects of malfunctions

maintenance.

Text Books:

1. A KELLY AND M J HARRIS, “Ma nagement of Industria l Ma inte nance”, Butterw orth’s Co,

Ltd. ,1978

Reference Books:

1. AKS JARDINE “Maintenance, Replacement and Reliability” Pitman publishing Co.

2. A KELLY, “Maintenance planning and control”, Butterworth Co, Ltd.

ADVANCED TOPICS IN METAL JOINING

Course Content

UNIT I

Distortion, Types of distortion and methods to control distortion. Residual Stresses in welds,

definition, concept types causes and effects, Residual stress measurement. Metal Spraying,

classification of thermal spraying process equipments

UNIT II

Electro Slag, Welding Electron Beam Welding, Plasma arc Welding, Laser Beam Welding,

Explosion Welding, Diffusion Welding, Ultrasonic Welding, Friction welding and Thermit

welding concepts, principle of operation, equipments, advantages, disadvantages and

applications of the above processes, Welding electrodes -Types, selection of electrodes,

Applications of coated electrodes.

UNIT III

Welding of dissimilar metals, concepts, metallurgical problems, Plastic welding processes,

fusion welding processes, advantages and disadvantages of each processes, advanced soldering

and Brazing processes, different types of soldering and brazing processes

UNIT IV

Inspection of Welds: Stages, Destructive techniques like Tensile, Bend, and Nick break, Impact

& Hardness tests. Non-Destructive techniques like 'X' rays, Ultrasonic, Magnetic particle, Dye

Penetrant, Gamma ray inspection. Weld quality, factors to be considered, Discontinuities in

welds, their causes and remedies, Quality conflicts.

UNIT V

Welding Symbols- Need for representing the welds, Basic weld symbols, Location of Weld,

Supplementary symbols, Dimensions of welds, Examples. Welding Design - Introduction,

Principles of sound welding design, Welding joint design, Welding positions, Allowable

strengths of welds, under steady loads, welding cost estimation, main components, factors,

basic costing procedure.

Text Books:

1. Welding Technology by O.P.Khanna. Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 1993

2. Welding Engineering by Rossi

Reference Books:

1. Advanced Welding Processes-Nikolacv .G.O.L Shansky MIR Publications.1997

2. Welding for engines by Udin, Funk & Wulf

3. Welding and welding technology-R.L.Little

NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Introduction to Non Destructive Testing methods (NDT): Selection of Non Destructive

Testing methods (NDT), visual inspection, leak testing, liquid dye penetrant inspection, its

advantages and limitations.

UNIT- 2

Eddy current, Magnetic Particle and microwave inspections: principles, operation

variables, procedure, inspection coils, Methods of generating magnetic field, types of magnetic

particles, suspension liquids, steps in inspection, applications and limitations microwave

principles and detectable defects by this method.

UNIT- 3

Ultrasonic inspection: Basic equipment, characteristics of ultrasonic waves, variables,

inspection methods; pulse echo, A,B,C scans transmission, resonance techniques, transducer

elements ,couplets, search units, contact types and immersion types inspection standards:

standard reference blocks, inspection of products like casting, extrusions, rolled products, weld

sets.

UNIT- 4

Radiography Inspection: Principles, radiation sources: X-Ray and gamma ray tubes,

radiographic films, and filters, image intensifiers and techniques, charts, industrial

radiography, image quality, radiography sensitivity, Electron and Neural radiology, application

of ICT, Thermal inspection principles, equipment inspection methods, applications.

UNIT- 5

Optical Holography: Basics of Holography, recording and reconstruction, procedures of

inspection, typical applications. Acoustical Holography: systems, techniques and applications.

Text Books:

1. Non-destructive Evolution and quality control volume l~ of metals hand book 9th Edition

Asia international 1989.

Reference Books:

1. Mc Gonnagle, JJGarden and Reach, "Non Destructive testing", New York.

2. Davis H.E Troxel G .E wis kovil C.T, “Testin g instr ucti on of En gi neering materials" ,

Mc Graw Hill.

COMPUTERS IN MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Introduction: Introduction to computers, Hardware and Software - Recent developments.

History & Generation of Computer– Applications of Computer – Advantages of Computer for

database development, networking and computational requirements, use of desktops and

laptops for industrial hardware controls – Terms related to Computer – Characteristics of

Computer: Speed, Storage, Versatility and Diligence – Hardware & Software. Types of

Computer: On the Basis of Working Main frame, Mini Computer, Super Computer, Work

station, Micro Computer, Desktop Computer, Laptop Computer, Palmtop Computer; use of

primary and secondary memory for maintenance applications, applications of serial, parallel

and USB ports.

UNIT- 2

Computers in Maintenance: Role of Computers in Maintenance Management, Justification

for use of Computers in Maintenance. Maintenance Management Information Systems:

Operating characteristics of a good computerized maintenance management system.

Adaptation of operating systems for applications general purpose maintenance and real time

maintenance systems, Windows, Linux, Unix and real time operating systems for real time

maintenance systems, development of databases, use of databases for charting, trend charting

and three dimens ion plots, use of Microsoft tools for information system development,

computer networking, computer up gradation, selection of microprocessors for applications.

UNIT- 3

Need for computer based maintenance management Information system (CMMS), Importance

of Aims and objectives of CMMS, Features of a good CMMS modules, CMMS Modules:

Equipment: Specification and Information about the equipment, equipment history failure

analysis, Equipment inquiry, drawings, labour and material cost etc., Use of various tool boxes

for Preventive Maintenance Scheduling, PM procedures, maintenance inventory activities

transactions, ABC, FNS, XYZ analysis, inventory adjustments for spares.

UNIT- 4

Preventive Maintenance Systems: P.M. work orders, P.M. work program, P.M. scheduling,

P.M. work load fore cast, P.M. reports, description of tasks. Input and Output / report formats

for various models of PM/CMMS, Applications in CBM and development principles of

Condition based Maintenance information Systems, Computerized Vibration signature

analysis, Computerized Noise signals and analysis. Trend monitoring, waterfall diagrams using

graphics packages, development of database Management System: Database, data structures,

data base management system (DBMS), Data base models-Hierarchical, Network and

relations, use of decision support systems.

UNIT- 5

Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems: Introduction to AI and expert Systems, Functions

and Structure Expert Systems, importance in designed maintenance and Applications. Use of

data mining for maintenance chart development, troubleshooting work applicable to standard

machine systems of mechanical and electrical engineering – engines, motors, generators,

Prediction of failures using neural network applications, applications in consumer durables and

industrial machinery

Text Book:

1. Kishan Bagadia, "Micro Computer Aided Maintenance Management"

Reference Books:

1. Lindley. R. Higgins "Maintenance Engineering Hand Book",

2. L.C. Marrow "Maintenance Engineering Hand Book".

3. Current Literatures in Conference and Journals.

NOISE MEASUREMENT ANALYSIS & CONTROL

Course Content

UNIT-1

Understanding Acoustics – Acoustics – science of sound, classification of acoustics, musical,

machinery, building, architectural, production and propagation of sound, sound basics, sound

frequency, spectrum, characteristics of sound, propagation of sound, effect of sound due to

nature, wind velocity, temperature and moisture effects, Reflection, refraction, transmission,

diffraction and absorption of sound, effect of standing wave, transmission of sound in thin and

thick barrier, anechoic chamber and reverberation rooms, Sound Fields, Near field, far field,

free field, reverberant field, diffused fields, inverse square law, sound directivity index and

factor.

SLE: Propagation of Sound, Effects of Nature, Spectrum, Sound Fields, Standing Wave.

UNIT-2

Noise – Categories of noise, pitched, un-pitched, impact noise features and examples, analogies

of sound and noise in power and pressure units, units of sound/noise, Sound pressure level,

Sound Power level, Sound intensity level, manipulation of sound, problems on addition and

subtraction of sources using analytical and graphical methods, Noise sources, Point, line and

Plane sources, characteristic features, Sound/Noise frequency, categorization of frequency,

harmful effects of noise on important frequency bands.

SLE: Sound Levels- Pressure, Power and Intensity, Manipulation of Noise, Solutions –

Graphical and Analytical.

UNIT-3

Sound/Noise Measurement – Sound/Procedure for noise measurement – Field visit,

development of layout and execution of systematic measurement plan, Instrumentation for

noise measurement, types of sound measurement systems, sound noise standards, importance

of standards, noise regulation, block diagram of sound pressure measurement system, sound

intensity measurement system, importance of microphones for measurement, types of

microphones, types of noise measurement systems, sound analysis, frequency analysis, use of

octave filters for measurements.

SLE: Microphone, Measurement Systems, In Situation and Field Measurement and Analysis.

UNIT-4

Sound / Noise Control- Importance of noise control, Types of controls, Active and passive

noisecontrol, control at source, along path and at the receiver end, active noise control

principle, use ofsound absorbing materials, configurations of noise absorbing materials,

acoustic silencers, noisecurtains, enclosures, use of composites for effective noise control. Low

and high frequency noiseabsorption, Noise control in buildings, Problems on various design

aspects, Reverberation Time,Measurement of Reverberation Time, importance in building

acoustics.

SLE: Passive ControlMethods Sound Absorbing Materials, Configurations.

UNIT-5

Noise Regulation – Daytime noise and Night time noise levels, permitted noise levels, how

muchof sound is too much of sound, Noise Standards in practice, OSHA standard, BIS

standard, othernoise measurement features, weighted networks, equal loudness contours,

Equivalent Sound level,Traffic Noise index, Noise rating curves NRC – Practical measurement

in Engine room, aroundautomotive engines, mapping of noise, few case studies and real time

problems for discussion andanalysis and solutions.

SLE: Standards and Regulation, NRC, TNI, Real Time Measurement andAnalysis, Problems

and Case Studies related to buildings and Machinery Acoustics.

Text Books:

1. John E. Foreman Van Nostrand, "Sound Analysis and Noise Control" Reinhold Publication.

Reference Books:

1. Dudley, "Machinery noise control".

2. Edward B. Magrab, “Environmental Noise Control”.

3. Bruel and Kjaer, “Noise-Analysis and Control”–Sound Measurement Review, Denmark.

4. Lawrence K insler and Austin Frey, “Fundamentals of Acoustics”.

ROTOR DYNAMICS

Course Content

UNIT 1

Introduction to Vibration and the Laval -Jeffcott Rotor Model: Vibration of dynamic

systems, rotor systems of mechanical and electrical devices, Co-ordinate systems, Steady state

rotor motion, Elliptical motion, Single degree of freedom systems, Free and forced vibrations.

Two degrees of freedom rotor system, Geared systems, Translational motion, importance of

Natural frequencies and Natural modes, Steady state response to unbalance, importance of

supports in dynamic systems, types of supports, effect of flexible support.

UNIT 2

Torsional Vibrations of Rotating Machinery: Introduction to torsional vibrations, modelling

of rotating machinery shafting, Multi degree of freedom, Systems, Determination of natural

frequencies and mode shapes, Branched systems, geared systems, Numerical methods for

fundamental frequency, Vibration measurement on rotating machinery, diagrammatic

approach in rotating systems, Measurement of torsional vibration.

UNIT 3

Rigid Rotor Dynamics and Critical Speed: Critical Speed in dynamic systems, applications

in low and high speed systems, Rigid disk equation - Rigid rotor dynamics, Rigid rotor and

flexible rotor, The gyroscopic effect on rotor dynamics, Whirling of an unbalanced simple

elastic rotor, Unbalance response, Orbital Analysis and Cascade Plots, Simple shafts with

several disks, Effect of axial stiffness, Determination of bending critical speeds, Campbell

diagram.

UNIT 4

Influence of Bearings on Rotor Vibrations: Influence of Support stiffness for rotating

systems, Importance of supports on critical speeds, Stiffness and damping for low speed and

high speed applications in coefficients of journal bearings, Computation and measurements of

journal bearing coefficients, Mechanics of Hydro dynamic Instability, Half frequency whirl

and Resonance whip, Design configurations of stable journal bearings.

UNIT 5

Balancing of Rotors: Introduction to Balancing, balancing of rotating and reciprocating

masses, Importance of balancing in dynamic systems, Single plane balancing, Multi-plane

balancing, Balancing of rigid rotors, Balancing of flexible rotors, Influence coefficient and

modal balancing techniques for flexible rotors, graphical analysis, applications in automotive

systems balancing.

Text Book:

1. J. S. Rao, “Rotor Dynamics”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi.

Reference Books:

1. S. Timoshenko, D H. Young and W. Weaver, “Vibration Problems in Engineering”, John

Wiley.

2. W J Chen and J E Gunter, “Introduction to Dynamics of Rotor – Bearing Systems”,

Trafford Publishing Ltd.

MAINTAINABILITY

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Maintainability: Purpose and Importance – Terms and definitions – Maintainability

Management – Product Life Cycle – Maintainability organizational structures – Program plan

– Design reviews. Maintainability measures – Functions and models – System effectiveness –

Availability and dependability models.

UNIT- 2

Maintainability tools: Failure Mode, Effects and criticality analysis, Cause and effect diagrams,

TQM - Maintainability allocation. Maintainability Design considerations, Standardizations –

Interchangeability, Modularization, Simplification, General maintainability and design

considerations.

UNIT- 3

Human factor consideration: Auditory and visual warning, Environmental factors – Safety

considerations, Electrical, Mechanical and other hazards – Safety checklists. Cost

considerations – Costs associated with maintainability - Maintenance cost estimation models.

UNIT- 4

Reliability centered maintenance: The RCM Process – RCM implementation review groups –

Methods of monitoring equipment condition – RCM applications. Maintainability, testing,

Demonstration and Data Maintenance models and Warranties.

UNIT- 5

Maintainability prediction: Maintainability prediction techniques, integration of

maintainability prediction results. Maintainability test and demonstration, system/product test

requirements, test planning, admission and control. Formal demonstration phase, evaluation,

Data analysis and corrective action

Text Books:

1. A.S. Goldman and T.B. Slattery “Maintainability- A major element of system effectiveness”,

Robert.E.Krierger publishing company.

Reference Books:

1. Kececioglu D.: Maintainability, Availability and Operational Readiness Engineering,

Prentice Hall, New Jercy, 1995.

2. Elsayed E.A.: Reliability Engineering, Addison Western Massachusetts, 1996.

3. Moubray, J.: Reliability – Centered Maintenance, Industrial Press, Inc, New York, 1992.

VALUE ENGINEERING

Course Content

UNIT- I

INTRODUCTION: Value engineering concepts, advantages, applications, problem

recognition, and role in productivity, criteria for comparison, element of choice,

ORGANIZATION: Level of value engineering in the organization, size and skill of VE staff,

small plant, VE activity, unique and quantitative evaluation of ideas.

UNIT- II

VALUE ENGINEERING JOB PLAN: Introduction, orientation, information phase,

speculation phase, analysis phase. Selection and Evaluation of value engineering Projects,

Project selection, methods selection, value standards, application of value engineering

methodology, ANALYSIS FUNCTION: Anatomy of the function, use esteem and exchange

values, basic vs. secondary vs. unnecessary functions. Approach of function, Evaluation of

function, determining function, classifying function, evaluation of costs, evaluation of worth,

determining worth, evaluation of value.

UNIT-III

VALUE ENGINEERING TECHNIQUES: Selecting products and operation for value

engineering action, value engineering programmes, determining and evaluating function(s)

assigning rupee equivalents, developing alternate means to required functions, decision making

for optimum alternative, use of decision matrix, queuing theory and Monte Carlo method make

or buy, measuring profits, reporting results, Follow up, Use of advanced technique like

Function Analysis System.

UNIT–IV

VERSATILITY OF VALUE ENGINEERING: Value engineering operation in maintenance

and repair activities, value engineering in non hardware projects. Initiating a valueengineer ing

programme Introduction, training plan, career development for valueengineering specialties,

Fast diagramming: cost models, life cycle costs.

UNIT–V

VALUE ENGINEERING LEVEL OF EFFORT: Value engineering team, co-

coordinator,designer, different services, definitions, construction management contracts, value

engineering casestudies.

Text Books:

1. Anil Kumar Mukhopadhyaya, “Value Engineering: Concepts Techniques and applications”,

SAGE Publications 2010

Reference Books:

1. Alphonse De ll’Iso la, “Value Engineer ing: Prac t ica l Applications for Design,

Construction, Maintenance & Operations”, R S Means Co., 1997.

2. Richard Park, “Value Engineering: A Plan for Invention”, St. Lucie Press, 1999.

3. Del L. Younker, “Va lue Enginee r ing analysis and methodology”, Marcel Dekker

Inc, New York, 2004.

4. Miles, L.D., “Tec hniq ues of Va lue Analys is and Engineering”, McGraw Hill second

Edition, 1989.

5. Khanna, O.P., “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 1993.

PLANT ENGINEERING

Course content

UNIT- 1

Facilities Design Function: Definitions, Scope, importance, objectives, functions and

activities, facilities design process, types of layout problems, characteristics of good layout, the

layout function, Factors for consideration in facilities designs, facilities design as a co-

coordinating function, facilities design procedure.

UNIT- 2

Plant Utilities: Electricity generation: Introduction, generation of electrical power, combined

heat and power, factors influencing choice, the selection, plant and installation. Types of

Boiler, Applications and solutions, super heaters, economizers, water level control, efficiency,

boiler installation, automatic controls on boiler, energy conservation and noise in the boiler

house.

UNIT- 3

Air Conditioning: The air quantity required, heat losses and gains, air conditioning,

distributionand system resistance, Fans, dust control and filtration, humidification. Test

procedures for airconditioningsystems heating and ventilation.

UNIT- 4

Energy Conservation: The need for energy conservation, energy audit, energy management,

major areas of energy conservation, justification for energy-conservation measures, motivation

andtraining.

UNIT- 5

Water and Effluents: Requirements of water, water chemistry water purification processes

andeffluents Housekeeping scope, standards, use of materials and tools for good housekeeping

andsupervision

Text Books:

1. James M. Apple, 'Plant Layout and Material Handling',3rdEd. The Renald press company.

Reference Books:

1. Dennis A. Snsow Butterworth N. Heinemann, “Power Engineer’s reference Book”,

2. Victor J. Cotz, P.E. et, “Plant Engineer” AIS manual and guide”, PHI.

3. Charles H. Becker, "Plant Manager's Handbook", McGraw Hill.

HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT - 1

Introduction to Human Resources: Importance of Human Resources -Human Resource

Planning, Human resource planning at different levels, Process of HRP. Control and review

mechanism, Job Analysis and Methods, Job Description, Job Specification.

Recruitment- Recruiting Sources: Recruiting Efforts with possible constraint -ability to

attract incumbents, Strategic management in recruitment, Sources of Recruitment, recruitment

techniques.

UNIT – 2

The Selection Process: Cost of Selection -discrete Selection Procedure, Significance, Factors

affecting selection decisions, Selection Process -The Comprehensive Approach -Key Elements

in successful Predictors -selection Devices -Employment Tests and Interviews – Job Previews

and Background Investigation -Socializing the New Employee. Cost benefit analysis of

selection, Recent trends in selection, Placement and Induction.

UNIT – 3

Employee Training: Introduction and objectives, Stages in Training, Determination of

Training Needs and Priorities -Forn1al Employee Training Methods -Methods, for Training

Managers Evaluating Training Effectiveness, Special aspects of training. Career Development:

Value of Effective Career Development -External versus Internal. Dimensions to career -

Career Stages

UNIT – 4

Motivating the Employees: Types and steps in motivation, Different Theories and

Approaches to work Motivation –Job Design. Work Scheduling and Motivation - Performance

Appraisals –Rewarding the Productive-Employee. Leadership- theories, traits, leadership

styles. Communication - Purpose, Importance, MIS and IT, Organizational communication and

informal communication. Barriers to effective communication.

UNIT – 5

Compensating the Work Force: Compensation Administration -Factors influencing the

Compensation Administration -job Evaluation and Pay structure -Incentive Compensation

Plans -Benefits and Services. Maintaining the Work Force: Labor Relations -some

Legislation governing Labor Relations -Safety and Health of Workers -Combating Stress and

Burnout Problems - Employee Discipline -disciplinary Actions -collective Bargaining Process.

Text Books:

1. Human Resource Management – T.V.Subba Rao – Himalaya Publishing House.

2. Personnel and Human Resource Management –Memoria, HPH.

Reference Books:

1. Human Resources Management- Ashwathappa – Himalaya Publishers.

2. Principles of Personnel Management -Flippo –Mcgraw hill.

3. Personnel Principles and Policies for Modern Manpower –Yoder, PHI.

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT - 1

Over view of Total Quality Management: Introduction, Definition, Basic Approach,

Contribution Of quality Gurus. Quality circle TQM frame work , Historical review, benefits of

TQM, TQM organization . Leade rship: characteristics of quality leaders, Demings

Philosophy, role of TQM Leaders, continuous processes improvement, Juran‘s Triology.

Quality costs, 6 sigma, Reengineering.

UNIT - 2

Tools and techniques of TQM: Basic tools of TQM, Bench marking, processes of bench

marking, quality management systems .ISO-9000 series of standards, implementation and

documentation of ISO_9000. Introduction to QFD and QFD process, TQM exemplary

organisation, Design of Failure Mode and Effect analysis [FMEA], process of FMEA

UNIT – 3

Statistical Process control (SPC):Seven basic tools of quality control, control charts for

variables .construction and interpretation and analysis of control charts process capability

indices, process improvement through problem analysis . ( Intensive coverage with numerical

problems ) Control charts for attributes: construction ,interpretation and analysis of P-chart,

np-chart, C-chart and U-chart, improvement through problem analysis .( Intensive coverage

with numerical problems )

UNIT – 4

Product acceptance control: Design of single sampling, double sampling and multiple

sampling plan analysis of the characteristics of the SSP, DSP and MSP . (Intensive coverage

with numerical problems).Ope rating characteristics curves (OC-Curves): construction,

characteristics of OC curves, Terms used in OC curves, LTPD, Outgoing quality Level,

{OQL]) , LTPD.AOQ,AOQL etc., (Intensive coverage with numerical problems)

UNIT – 5

Reliability and Life Testing: Reliability and analysis of components, standard configurations

systems like series, parallel redundancy and principles of design for reliability .reliability

testing (Intensive coverage with numerical problems). Experimental design :one factor

design, two factor design, orthogonal design, full factorial and fractional design .Taguchi

philosophy of quality engineering, loss function, orthogonal array, sign to noise function,

parameter design, tolerance design ( Basic concepts and treatment only).

Text Books:

1. Total quality Management Dale H Berster field (et.al.) Pears education , Third edition

Indian Reprint -2004

2. Statistical quality Control by Grant Leven worth (2000)

Reference Books:

1. Statistical quality control by Douglos C Mantego third edition Pearson Education -2006

2. A new American TQM for revolution in management: Shoji-shiba, Alan Graham and,

David Walder Productivity press Oregon-1990

3. Organizational excellence through TQM H Lal, New Age Pu

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS

Course Content

UNIT 1

Demand Analysis: Demand Theory, Preference and Choice, Empirical demand curves,

Demand estimation and forecasting, Goods-characteristic approach.

UNIT 2

Production and Cost: Production theory and estimation, Production function, Production

function with one and two variable input, Optimal combination of inputs, Returns to scale,

Empirical production functions, Cost concepts, Cost functions, Empirical cost functions.

UNIT 3

Market structures: (i) Perfect competition: Meaning, Characteristics and Importance, Price

and Output determination in the short run and long run, Derived demand for inputs, Short

comings. (ii) monopoly: Meaning and characteristics, Importance, Short run and long run

analysis, evaluation. (iii) Monopolistic competition: meaning, characteristics and importance,

short run and long run analysis. (iv) Oligopoly: Meaning, characteristics and importance, Non

collusive oligopoly and kinked demand curve, collusive oligopoly, Efficiency implications.

UNIT 4

Pricing and Practice: Cost plus pricing, Evaluation, Incremental analysis in pricing. Capital

budgeting: Meaning and importance, projecting cash flows, NPV and IRR.

UNIT 5

Economic growth: Economic aggregates and their relationships. Economic growth,

development and planning, capital budgeting: Meaning and importance, cash flows.

Text Books:

1. DOMINIC SALVATORE, Managerial economics, McGraw hill Book Co.

2. CAMPBELL R Mc. CONNELL, Economics: Principles, Problems and Policies, Mc graw

hill Book Co.

Reference Books:

1. DOMINIC SALVATORE, Theory and Problems of Microeconomic theory, McGraw hill

Book Co.

2. JOEL DEANS, managerial economics, Prentice hall India Ltd.

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT – 1

Overview of computers – History & Generation of Computer (From First to 5th) –

Applications of Computer – Advantages of Computer – Terms related to Computer –

Characteristics of Computer: Speed, Storage, Versatility and Diligence – Hardware &

Software. Block Diagram and Working Principle of Computer – Types of Computer: On the

Basis of Working – Analog, Digital & Hybrid, On the Basis of Size – Main frame, Mini

Computer, Super Computer, Work station, Micro Computer, Desktop Computer, Laptop

Computer, Palmtop Computer; On the basis of Processor – XT, AT & Pentium(i3, i5,

i7);Memory: Units, Representation, Types – Primary memory: RAM, ROM, PROM, EPROM,

EEPROM, DDR Secondary memory: Hard disk, CD, DVD, Blue ray Disc, Pen Drive Magnetic

tape & Zip disk – CPU: Components of CPU – Mother board, Hard disk, RAM, ROM,

Processor, SMPS & Connecting wire – Graphics Card, Sound Card, Network Card – Modem;

Input, Output devices: Keyboard, Mouse, Scanner, Digital Camera, Joystick, Pen drive,

Monitor, Printer, Plotter – Connecting port – Serial, parallel – USB port.

UNIT - 2

OPERATING SYSTEMS: Windows : Definition of Operating System – Functions of OS –

Types of OS: Single user, Multi-User, multi-task, RTOS, Single-user, Multi-tasking –

Windows Desk top – GUI: Definition, Standards, Cursors/Pointers, Icons, GUI Menus,

GUIShare Data – Desktop icons and their functions: My computer, My documents, Network

neighborhood, Recycle Bin, Quick launch tool bar, System tray, Start menu, Task bar – Dialog

Boxes: List Box, Spin Control Box, Slide, Drop-down list, Radio button, Check box, Text box,

Task Bar – System Tray – Quick launch tool bar – Start button – Parts of Windows -Title bar-

Menu bar – Scroll bar- Status bar, Maximize, Minimize, close and Resize & Moving a Window

– Windows – Start Menu –Help Menu- Preview Menu; Logoff & Shutdown – Keyboard

Accelerators: Key board short keys or hotkeys – Working with Notepad and Wordpad: Opening

& Saving files, Formatting, Printing, Inserting objects, Finding & replacing text, Creating &

Editing Images with Microsoft paint, using the Calculator – Personalizing Windows. Computer

on Office Automation.

UNIT - 3

Introduction to MS Office - MS Word – Working with Documents -Opening & Saving files,

Editing text documents, Inserting, Deleting, Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo, Find, Search,

Replace, Formatting page & setting Margins, Converting files to different formats, Importing

& Exporting documents, Sending files to others, Using Tool bars, Ruler, Using Icons, using

help, Formatting Documents – Setting Font styles, Font selection- style, size, colour etc., Type

face – Bold, Italic, Underline, Case settings, Highlighting, Special symbols, Setting Paragraph

style, Alignments, Indents, Line Space, Margins, Bullets & Numbering. Setting Page style –

Formatting Page, Page tab, Margins, Layout settings, Paper tray, Border & Shading, Columns,

Header & footer, Setting Footnotes & end notes – Shortcut Keys; Inserting manual page break,

Column break and line break, Creating sections & frames, Anchoring & Wrapping, Setting

Document styles, Table of Contents, Index, Page Numbering, date & Time, Author etc.,

Creating Master Documents, Web page. Creating Tables- Table settings, Borders, Alignments,

Insertion, deletion, Merging, Splitting, Sorting, and Formula, Drawing – Inserting Clip Arts,

Pictures/Files etc., Tools – Word Completion, Spell Checks, Mail merge, Templates, Creating

contents for books, Creating Letter/Faxes, Creating Web pages, Using Wizards, Tracking

Changes, Security, Digital Signature. Printing Documents – Shortcut keys.

UNIT – 4

Introduction to MS Office – MS Excel-–: MS Excel: Spread Sheet & its Applications,

Opening Spreadsheet, Menus – main menu, Formula Editing, Formatting, Toolbars, Using

Icons, Using help, Shortcuts, Spreadsheet types. Working with Spreadsheets- opening, Saving

files, setting Margins, Converting files to different formats (importing, exporting, sending files

to others), Spread sheet addressing – Rows, Columns & Cells, Referring Cells & Selecting

Cells – Shortcut Keys. Entering & Deleting Data- Entering data, Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo,

Filling Continuous rows, columns, Highlighting values, Find, Search & replace, Inserting Data,

Insert Cells, Column, rows & sheets, Symbols, Data from external files, Frames, Clipart,

Pictures, Files etc, Inserting Functions, Manual breaks, Setting Formula – finding total in a

column or row, Mathematical operations (Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division,

Exponentiation), Using other Formulae. Formatting Spreadsheets- Labelling columns & rows,

Formatting- Cell, row, column & Sheet, Category – Alignment, Font, Border & Shading,

Hiding/ Locking Cells, Anchoring objects, Formatting layout for Graphics, Clipart etc.,

Worksheet Row & Column Headers, Sheet Name, Row height & Column width, Visibility –

Row, Column, Sheet, Security, Sheet Formatting & style, Sheet background, Colour etc.,

Borders & Shading – Shortcut keys. Working with sheets – Sorting, Filtering, Validation,

Consolidation, and Subtotal. Creating Charts – Drawing. Printing. Using Tools – Error

checking, Spell Checks, Formula Auditing, Creating & Using Templates, Pivot Tables,

Tracking Changes, Security, Customization. Open Office-Calc – Introduction – Introduction

to Spreadsheets, Overview of a Worksheet, Creating Worksheet & Workbooks, Organizing

files, Managing files & workbooks, Functions & Formulas, Working with Multiple sheets,

Creating Charts & Printing Charts – Operating with MS Excel documents, which are already

created and saved in MS Excel.

UNIT – 5

Introduction to MS Office – MS Power r point -PowerPoint Presentations: Getting started

in PowerPoint, Creating a presentation, Creating & editing slides, previewing a slide show,

Adding picture & graph, Adding sound & video, Adding auto shape, Animating objects.

Computer Networks : Introduction to Internet Intranet tools: E-mail: Anatomy of e-mail,

email address, finding e-mail address, adding signature, attaching files, opening attachments,

managing e-mail account, Web mail, and Case study: Yahoo Mail, Outlook express. FTP, ftp

commands, ftp software, Telnet, using telnet, Web pages, HTML, basics of HTML, computer

virus and antivirus software, Voice and Video chat, web browsers etc. E-governance

(introduction): E-government, need of e-governance, e-assistance, e-democracy, e-

administration, citizen services, e-procurement, Mobile government, Software and Hardware

required for E-governance Implementation, E-governance in a Small Office, and Web Portal

for E-governance.

Text Book:

1. Computer Applications for Management Decisions – R. Rajagopalan -TMG

Reference Books:

1. Computer Basics with Office Automation -Archana Kumar

2. Computers for beginners – V. K. Jain

3. Microsoft Office for Dummies – Roger Parker

4. Managerial Communication – Paul R Timm

5. Business Communication – Zane Quible, Margaret Johson and Dennis Mott.

KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Knowledge Management: -KM Myths–KM Life Cycle–Understanding Knowledge–

Knowledge, intelligence –Experience – Common Sense – Cognition and KM – Types of

Knowledge – Expert Knowledge – Human Thinking and Learning, Knowledge society-from

data to information to knowledge- Drivers of knowledge management Intellectual capital- KM

and learning organizations- case studies. Strategic alignment- creating awareness articulation-

Evaluation and strategic alignment Infrastructural development and deployment-Leadership,

measurement and refinement- Role of CKO.

UNIT- 2

Knowledge Management System Life Cycle: - Challenges in Building KM Systems–

Conventional Versus KM System Life Cycle (KMSLS), Knowledge Creation and Knowledge

Architecture – Nonaka‘s Model of Knowledge Creation and Transformation. Knowledge

Architecture Analyzing business environment-knowledge audit and analysis – designing KM

team – creating KM system blue print- implementation- capture –store and sharing,

Technology components –Internet, Intranet and Groupware solutions- tools for collaborative

intelligence package choices, implementing security.

UNIT- 3

Capturing Knowledge : Evaluating the Expert–Developing a Relationship with Experts–

Fuzzy Reasoning and the Quality of Knowledge – Knowledge Capturing Techniques, Brain

Storming – Protocol - Analysis – Consensus Decision Making – Repertory Grid-Concept

Mapping –Definition – Computer based user machine system – Integrated system – Need for

a database – Utilization of models – Evolution – Subsystems – Organizational subsystems –

Activities subsystems

UNIT- 4

Knowledge Codification: - Modes of Knowledge Conversion–Codification Tools and

Procedures – Knowledge, Developer‘s Skill Sets – System Testing and Deployment –

Knowledge Testing–Approaches to Logical Testing, User Acceptance Testing – KM System

Deployment Issues – User Training – Post implementation, Operating elements – Physical

components – Processing functions – Outputs – MIS support for decision making – Structured

programmable decisions – Unstructured non-programmable decisions – MIS structure based

on management activity and Organizational functions – Synthesis of MIS structure.

UNIT- 5

Knowledge Transfer And Sharing: -Transfer Methods–Role of the Internet–Knowledge

Transfer in e-world, KM System Tools – Ne ural Network– Association Rules – Classification

Trees – Data mining and Business Intelligence – Decision Making Architecture – Data

Management – Knowledge Management Protocols – Managing Knowledge Workers. Data

Presentation – Communication Network – Distributed systems – Logical data concepts –

Physical storage devices – File organizations – Database organization – Transaction processing

Text Books:

1. Knowledge Management - Elias. M. Award & Hassan M. Ghaziri –Pearson Education-

2003.

2. The essential guide to knowledge management, -Amrit Tiwana,' Pearson education-2001.

3. Knowledge Management – Sudhir Warier, Vikas Publishing House, ISBN:81-259-1363-

7. 1st Edition, Sept 2008.

Reference Books:

1. Hand book on knowledge Management – C W Holsapple, Springer, 2003 Porter M

Competitive Advantage, Free Press, 1985.

2. Knowledge Engineering and Management - Gus Schreiber, Hans Akkermans, Anjo Anje

wierden, Robert de Hoog, Nigel, Shadbolt, Walter Van de Velde and Bob Wielinga,

Universities Press, 2001.

INDUSTRIAL MARKETING

Course Content

UNIT-1

INTRODUCTION: The Industrial Marketing system: Participant, Channels, contracts of sale,

Franchise agreements Loyalty, confidence and reciprocity. Market as a business philosophy.

The functional dimension: Mission definition, the organizational dimension, Structural

integration. Customer based organization structure. Demand and product characteristics:

Market levels and product type: Major equipment, Minor or accessory equipment, Fabricating

of components and parts. Process materials. Derived Demand; Influence of ultimate buyer,

business conditions, financial conditions, Influence of price.

UNIT- 2

Industrial Customer: Buyer Motives: The core variables, Quality, Service, Price, Savings

assurance of supply. Buyer temperament, Buyer characteristics: Customer types.

BuyerPopulation, Size and distribution. Geographical concentration Types of

purchasingorganizations. Business and Institutional Buyers, Governmental buyers.

MarketingStrategy: The concept of strategy Mission Strategy, Operating, plans,

Organizational Planand logistical plans; choice of strategy components. Recognition of need

and documentation,Invoice handling, Receipt and Inspection. Vendor analysis and rating

vendor performance.

UNIT -3

The Channel & Price component: The Channel component: Industrial

Distributors,Geographical distributions; Size, Characteristics. Condition influencing channel

structure,Intensive versus selective strategy. The Price Component: Condition affecting

price:Condition affecting price: Competition, firm size product type, Direct and Indirect Costs.

Thenature of demand. Pricing decisions, New Markets versus established markets

pricingpolicies; Net pricing; Discount pricing, trades discount, Quantity discounts & cash

discounts.Legal considerations & pricing methods.

UNIT-4

The Promotional Component: Advertising functions, Identifying new customers,motivating

distributor‘s sales & message formulation, media budgetary support, use ofadvertising

agencies. Measuring advertising effectiveness. Exhibition scheduling andplanning, Catalog

preparation & distribution Sales promotion & public relations: promotionalletters and

novelties, personal selling & selling support. Personal selling: Sources ofcandidates, Task

assignment and selling support Compensation, Commission and Bonuses.

UNIT -5

Marketing Control: Strategic goals. Identifying market opportunity. Projecting industrysales,

Goals based on sales, Short-term goals, expense based goals. Goal definition Marketshare,

higher degree polynomials, asymptotic curves, weighted moving average, adjustingprojections.

The market and sales budget. The expense budget. Budgetary Control, Steps inBudgeting and

budgetary control, the process of control. Comparing standards andperformance. Measuring

deviations, Corrective action.

Text Books:

1. Industrial Marketing: Richard M. Hill and Ralph.S Alexander, Richard. D, Irwin

incorporation, 1986

Reference Books:

1. Industrial Marketing: Text and Cases by Krishna K. Havaldar , Tata McGraw-Hill

Education, 2005

ADVERTISING AND PUBLICITY

Course Content

UNIT- 1

Advertising: Introduction, " Concept, Nature, Definitions, Evolution and History " Role,

Objectives, Functions, and Significance "Basic Theories and Applications" Types and

Classification of Advertising, Factors Determining Advertising Opportunity of a

Product/Service/Idea, Types of Appeals and Advertising Messages, Advertising and Society

Ethical Issues in Advertising Social Criticism of Advertising Laws in Advertising, Advertising

Statutory Bodies in India, Role of AAA and ASCI, Study of Various Codes of Conduct.

UNIT- 2

Digital Advertising: " Defining Digital Advertising: Evolution and Current Status " Digital

Media Landscape " E-mailers and Search Engine Optimization Mobile Marketing and

Augmented Reality Emerging Trends " Digital Advertising Agencies – Structure and Functions

" How mainstream advertising agencies are going Digital and Integration today " Digital Media

Integration across Advertising, Market Research, Activation etc. Advent of Hybrid Advertising

(Online merging with Offline) "Digital Laws –IT Act/ TRAI" Various Case Studies:

Successful and Disasters Brand Presence on Social Media. Copy in advertising, types of copy,

requirements of a good copy, features and importance of layout, type of layout, design for

various messages, art work and importance of visuals in advertising campaigns.

UNIT- 3

Evolution of Advertising Agencies: Various Stages and Current Status, Various Functional

Departments and Scope of their Works (Account Planning, Account Servicing. Creative-Copy

& Art, Media, Production, Billing, HR etc.), Advertising Agency: Functions, Types, Structure,

Departments, Remuneration, Pitching, Client Agency Relationship, Major advertising agencies

in India and other continents, Revenue and Commission Systems.

UNIT- 4

Advertising Budget and Account Management: ‖ Setting and Allocating Budget, Various

Methods of Budgeting Budget and Audit Process: ―Allocation of Budget and Methods‖, Age

nc y Re ve nue Processes ― Audits and its, Processes, Introduction to Account Management-

Scope, Definition, Responsibilities and Implementation Paths" Agency, Operation: The

organizations in Advertising, the Role of Advertising Agency, Types of Advertising Agencies

" Client related Issues and the Process: Stages in the Client-Agency Relationship, Factors

Affecting Client-Agency Relationship, The Pitching Mechanism-Simulation Creative and

Media Briefing Process: " Agency -Media Interface " Agency Revenue Process ".

UNIT- 5

Strategic Planning and Brand Management: " Introduction to Strategic Planning andClient

Servicing : The Concept of a Brand, Characteristics of Brands (generic, expected,augmented,

potential), the Importance of Brand Planning, Issues Influencing Brand Potential" Role and

Relevance of Strategy in Advertising: Understanding the Branding Process andAdvertising

Perspective " Brand Positioning, Brand Benefits, Consumer Benefits " BrandMatrix and Media

Matrix Brand Management: " The Evolution of Branding in Today‘sWorld" Understanding

Brand Management " Various Theories and Models in BrandManagement, 8 " Brand Prism

Model, Perceptual Mapping, " Brand Purchasing underDissonance Reduction, Brand Name

Spectrum, " Product Research—Important Tools andAnalysis " Brand Anatomy, Strategy and

Structure, Brand Positioning, Personality " Image,Brand Extensions-Advantages & Pitfalls "

Brand Architecture " How Integrated MarketingCommunications (IMC) builds Brands –

including Digital Ecosystem and the Integration ofDigital Channels " Brand Audit – Inventory

and Exploratory and Tracking, Cobranding/Licensing, Luxury Brands, B2B Brands " The

Making of Indian & Global Brands "Leveraging Secondary Brand Associations to Build Brand

Equity " Digital Brand Building:The FLIRT Model " What is a Global Brand? How can Indian

Brands become Global?"Zaltman Metaphor Elicitation Technique (ZMET) " Various Case

Studies.

Text Books:

1. MANUKONDA R.: Advertising Promotions and News Media (DPS Publishing House

India, 2013).

Reference Books:

1. VILANILAM J. V. & VERGHESE A.K: Advertising Basics (Sage Publications, India,

2012).

2. MUELLER, BARBARA: Dynamics of International Advertising: Theoretical and

practical perspectives (New York: Peter Lang, 2006).

ENERGY MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT-1

Energy Scenario: Classification of Energy, Indian energy scenario, Sectorial

energyconsumption (domestic, industrial and other sectors), energy needs of growing

economy,energy intensity, long term energy scenario, energy pricing, energy security,

energyconservation and its importance, energy strategy for the future. Energy Conservation

Act2001 and related policies: Energy conservation Act 2001 and its features, notifications

underthe Act, Schemes of Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE) including Designated

consumers,State Designated Agencies, Electricity Act 2003, Integrated energy policy, National

actionplan on climate change, ECBC code for Building Construction.

UNIT- 2

Financial Management and Energy Monitoring and Targeting: Investment-need,appraisal

and criteria, financial analysis techniques simple payback period, return oninvestment, net

present value, internal rate of return, cash flows, risk and sensitivity analysis;financing options,

energy performance contracts and role of Energy Service Companies(ESCOs) Energy

Monitoring and Targeting: Defining monitoring & targeting, elements ofmonitoring &

targeting, data and information-analysis, techniques – energy consumption,production,

cumulative sum of differences (CUSUM). Energy Management InformationSystems (EMIS)

UNIT- 3

Energy Management & Audit: Definition, energy audit, need, types of energy audit.

Energymanagement (audit) approach-understanding energy costs, Bench marking,

energyperformance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing system

efficiencies,optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel and energy substitution, energy

auditinstruments and metering.

UNIT- 4

Waste Heat Recovery: Potential, benefit, waste heat recovery equipment‘s. Space

Heating,Ventilation Air Conditioning (HV AC) and water heating of building, Transfer of heat,

spaceheating methods, Ventilation and air conditioning, Heat pumps, Insulation, Cooling

load,Electric water heating systems, Electric energy conversation methods. Industrial

Insulation:Insulation materials, insulation selection, Economical thickness of insulation.

IndustrialHeating: Heating by indirect resistance, direct resistance heating (salt bath furnace)

UNIT- 5

Energy and environment, air pollution, climate change: United Nations

FrameworkConvention on Climate Change (UNFCC), sustainable development, Kyoto

Protocol,Conference of Parties (COP), Clean Development Mechanism (CDM), CDM

Procedures caseof CDM – Bachat Lamp Yojna and industry; Prototype Carbon Fund (PCF).

Energy cost andtwo -part tariff; -Energy Conservation in utility by improving load factor, Load

curveanalysis, Energy efficient motors, Energy Conservation in illuminating system,

Importance ofpower factor in energy Conservation -Power factor improvement methods,

EnergyConservation in industries.

Text Book:

1. Energy Conservation Guide Book, Dale R Patrick, Stephen W Fardo, 2nd Edition, CRC

Press

Reference Books:

1. Handbook of Energy Audits, Albert Thumann, 6th Edition, The Fairmont Press

2. Bureau of Energy Efficiency Reference book: No.1, 2, 3 4

3. Energy Management Handbook, W.C. Turner, John Wiley and Sons, A Wiley Interscience

Publication.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS RESEARCH

Course Content

UNIT- 1

INTRODUCTION TO LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Introduction to applications of

operations research in functional areas of management. Development of operation Research,

art of modelling, phase of operation Research Study. Linear Programming- formulation,

solution by graphical and simplex methods (Primal - Penalty, Two Phase), Special cases. Dual

simplex method. Principles of Duality. Sensitivity Analysis.

UNIT- 2

LINEAR PROGRAMMING EXTENSIONS: Transportation Models (Minimising and

Maximising Problems) – Balanced and unbalanced Problems – Initial Basic feasible solution

by N-W Corner Rule, Least cost and Vogel‘s approximation methods. Check for optimality.

Solution by MODI / Stepping Stone method. Case of Degeneracy. Transhipment Models.

Assignment Models (Minimising and Maximising Problems) – Balanced and Unbalanced

Problems. Solution by Hungarian and Branch and Bound Algorithms. Travelling Salesman

problem. Crew Assignment Models.

UNIT- 3

INTEGER PROGRAMMING AND GAME THEORY: Solution to pure and mixed integer

programming problem by Branch and Bound and cutting plane algorithms. Game Theory-Two

person Zero sum games-Saddle point, Dominance Rule, Convex Linear Combination

(Averages), methods of matrices, graphical and LP solutions.

UNIT- 4

INVENTORY MODELS, SIMULATION AND DECISION THEORY: Inventory Models

– EOQ and EBQ Models (With and without shortages), Quantity Discount Models. Decision

making under risk – Decision trees – Decision making under uncertainty. Decision theory and

games theory. Inventory models with probabilistic demand (Simple cases) queuing models.

Queuing theory and embedded Markow chains Introduction to simulation. Monte-Carlo

simulation.

UNIT- 5

QUEUING THEORY AND REPLACEMENT MODELS: Queuing Theory - single and

Multi-channel models – infinite number of customers and infinite calling source. Replacement

Models-Individuals replacement Models (With and without time value of money) – Group

Replacement Models.

Text Books:

1. Taha H.A., ―Operations Research‖, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

Reference Books:

1. Shennoy G.V. and Srivastava U.K., ―Operation Research for Management‖, Wiley

Eastern, 1994.

2. Bazara M.J., Jarvis and Sherali H., ―Linear Programming and Network Flows‖, John

Wiley, 1990.

3. Philip D.T. and Ravindran A., ―Operations Research‖, John Wiley, 1992.

4. Hillier and Libeberman, ―Operations Research‖, Holden Day, 1986

PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT

Course Content

UNIT-1

Introduction: PDM-present market constraints, the need for collaboration- Internet

anddevelopments in server-client computing, Components of a typical PDM, set-up

hardwareand software, document management, creation and viewing of documents, creating

partsversion,control of parts and documents, case studies.

UNIT-2

Configuration Management: Software configuration management, Computer

hardwareconfiguration management, Maintenance systems, Configuration Management

andEngineering Change Control, Configuration Control, Baselines-product

structure,configuration management, case studies.

UNIT-3

Product Life Cycle : Life cycle of a product- life cycle management, automating

informationflow-work flows, Creation of work flow templates, life cycle, work flow

integration, casestudies.

UNIT-4

Change Management: Change Management- change issue, change request,

investigation,change proposal-change activity, Borland Change Management Solutions,

ChangeManagement System, Case Studies

UNIT-5

Database and Database Users: Introduction, Building blocks, Data base design, ERDiagram

(Entity-relationship model) advantages and implementation of data base approachAgile

Supply Chains Management : Introduction, characteristics of Agile ManufacturingConcept

of Agile Manufacturing Strategy of Agile Manufacturing, Methodology ofMarketing, Key

Issues in Agile Manufacturing, Future of Agile Manufacturing .

Text Books:

1. David Bed worth. Mark Henderson & .Philips Wolfe, "Computer Integrated Design and

Manufacturing"', McGraw Hill Inc.,1991.

2. Product Design and Manufacturing, A.C. Chitale and R.C.Gupta, PHI 4thedition 2007.

Reference Books:

1. Terry Quatrain "Visual Modeling with Rational Rose and UML ", Addison Wesley,1998

ADVANCED HEAT TRANSFER

Course Content

UNIT-1

Introduction and Heat Transfer by Conduction: The modes of heat transfer, the laws of

heat transfer. Heat conduction in solids: Simple steady state problems in heat conduction,

concept of thermal resistance, the critical radius problems, the differential equation of heat

conduction, heat generation, two dimensional steady state heat conduction, unsteady state

processes, extended surfaces- fins, other techniques for solving heat conduction problems, the

finite difference method for steady state situations, the finite difference method for unsteady

state situations, problems. Mathematical analysis of 2-D heat conduction without heat

generation graphical analysis, the conduction shape factor, numerical method of analysis,

Gauss-Siedel iteration, electrical analog for 2-D conduction

UNIT-2

Thermal Radiation: Basic concepts, emission characteristics and laws of black body

radiation, radiation incident on a surface, solid angle and radiation intensity, heat exchange by

radiation between two black surface elements, heat Exchange by radiation between two finite

black surfaces, the shape factor, radiant heat exchange in an enclosure having black surfaces,

heat exchange by radiation between two finite parallel diffuse-gray surfaces, heat exchange by

radiation in an annular space between two infinitely long concentric cylinders radiant heat

exchange in an enclosure having diffuse gray surfaces, problems.

UNIT-3

Principles of Fluid Flow: The law of conservation of mass –the differential equation of

continuity, differential equations of motion in fluid flow –Navier- strokes equations, laminar

flow in a circular pipe, turbulent flow in a pipe, the velocity boundary layer, laminar flow over

a flat plate, the integral method-an appropriate technique for solving boundary layer problems,

turbulent flow over a flat plate, problems.

UNIT-4

Heat Transfer by Convection: Forced Convection - The differential equation of heat

convection, laminar flow heat transfer in circular pipe, turbulent flow heat transfer in a pipe,

the thermal boundary layer, heat transfer in laminar flow over a flat plate, the integral method,

analogy between heat and momentum transfer, heat transfer in turbulent flow over a flat plate,

flow across a cylinder, flow across a bank of tubes, problems.

Natural Convection - Natural convection heat transfer from a vertical plate, correlations for a

horizontal cylinder and a horizontal plate, correlations for enclosed spaces, problems

UNIT-5

Heat Exchangers: Types of heat exchangers, direct transfer type of heat exchangers,

classification according to flow arrangement, fouling factor, logarithmic mean temperature

difference, the effectiveness-NTU method, other design consideration, Compact heat

exchangers

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Holmon J P: “Heat Transfer” - McGraw Hill Publication, 2002,

2. Ozisik M N: “Heat Transfer-A Basic Approach” - McGraw Hill Publications, 1985.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. A F Mills: “Heat & Mass Transfer”

2. Frank Kreith & M. S. Bohn: “Principles of Heat Transfer” - Thomson Publications, 2001

3. W M Kays: “Convective Heat and Mass Transfer” - Mc Graw Hill Publications 1984

THEORY OF IC ENGINES Course Content:

Unit-1

Engine Design and Operating Parameters: Engine characteristics, geometrical properties of

reciprocating engines, brake torque, indicated work, road load power, M.E.P., S.F.C. and

efficiency, specific emissions and emission index, relationships between performance

parameters, Engine design and performance data.

Ideal models for engine cycles: Thermodynamic relation for engine process, Ideal Cycle

analysis, fuel-air cycle analysis, over expanded engine

cycles, Availability analysis of engine processes, comparison with real engine cycle.

Unit-2

SI Engines fuel metering, manifold phenomena: S.I. Engine mixture requirements,

carburetors, fundamentals and design, fuel injection systems, feedback systems, flow past

throttle plate, flow in in-take manifold.

Combustion in IC Engines: Combustion in SI Engines – Flame front propagation, flame

speed, rate of pressure rise, knock in SI engines;

combustion in CI engines – ignition delay period, rapid and controlled combustion, factors

affecting delay period, knock in CI engines.

unit-3

Engine Operating Characteristics: Engine performance parameters, Effect of spark-timing,

Mixture composition, load and speed and compression ratio on engine performance, efficiency

and emissions, SI engine combustion chamber design and optimization strategy, Testing of SI

engine.

Unit-4

Instrumentation: Pressure measurement in engines, recording pressure and crank angle

diagram, measurement of pollutants.

Engine emissions and their control: Air pollution due to IC engines, Euro norms I & II,

engine emissions, emission control methods – thermal converters, catalytic converters,

particulate traps, Ammonia injection systems, exhaust gas recirculation.

Unit-5

Alternate fuels for I.C engines: Vegetable oils, alcohol’s, L.P.G, C.N.G, properties, Fuel Air

ratio, emission characteristics.

Reference Books:

1. V. Ganesan, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications

2. John B. Heywood, “IC Engines fundamentals”, McGraw-Hill Publications

3. C.R. Fergusan, “Internal Combustion Engines: Applied Thermo sciences”, John Wiley &

Sons.

ALTERNATIVE FUELS FOR IC ENGINES

Course Content:

Unit -1

Fuels: Introduction, Structure of petroleum, Refining process, Products of refining process,

fuels for spark ignition, Knock rating of SI engine fuels, Octane number requirement, Diesel

fuels.

Properties of petroleum products: Specific gravity, Density, Molecular weight, Vapour

pressure, Viscosity, Flash point, Fire point, Cloud point, Pour point, Freezing point, Smoke

point & Char value, Aniline point, Octane Number, Performance Number, Cetane Number,

Emulsification, Oxidation Stability, Acid Value/Number, Distillation Range, and Sulphur

content

Unit -2

Alternative fuels for I.C. engines: Need for alternative fuels such as Ethanol, Methanol, LPG,

CNG, Hydrogen, Biogas and Producer gas and their methods of manufacturing.

Single Fuel Engines: Properties of alternative fuels, Use of alternative fuels in SI engines,

Engine modifications required, Performance and emission characteristics of alternative fuels

in SI mode of operation v/s gasoline operation.

Unit -3

Dual fuel Engine: Need and advantages, the working principle, Combustion in dual fuel

engines, Factors affecting combustion in dual fuel engine, Use of alcohols, LPG, CNG,

Hydrogen, Biogas and Producer gas in CI engines in dual fuel mode. Engine modifications

required. Performance and emission characteristics of alternative fuels (mentioned above) in

Dual Fuel mode of operation v/s Diesel operation

Unit-4

Bio-diesels: What are bio-diesels Need of bio-diesels, Properties of bio-diesels v/s petro-diesel,

Performance and emission characteristics of bio-diesels v/s Petro diesel operation.

Availability: Suitability & Future prospects of these gaseous fuels in Indian context.

Unit-5

Environmental pollution: with conventional and alternate fuels, Pollution control methods

and packages. Euro norms I & II, Engine emissions, Emission control methods, EPA.

Reference Books:

1. A Course in Internal Combustion Engines - R.P Sharma & M.L. Mathur, DanpatRai &

Sons.

2. Elements of Fuels, Furnaces & Refractories - O.P. Gupta, Khanna Publishers.

3. Internal Combustion Engines -Domkundwar V.M., I Edition, DhanpatRai& Sons.

4. Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals - John B. Heywood, McGraw Hill

International Edition.

5. Present and Future Automotive Fuels - Osamu Hirao& Richard Pefley, Wiley Interscience

Publications.

6. Internal Combustion Engines - V. Ganesan, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications.

DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF THERMAL SYSTEMS

Course Content:

UNIT -1

Introduction to Thermal System Design: Introduction; Workable, optimal and nearly

optimaldesign; Thermal system design aspects; concept creation and assessment; Computer

aidedthermal system design.

UNIT -2

Thermodynamic modeling and design analysis: First and second law of thermodynamics

asapplied to systems and control volumes, Entropy generation; Thermodynamic model –

ogeneration system. Exergy Analysis :- Exergy definition, dead state and exergy components

;Physical Exergy – Exergy balance ; Chemical Exergy ; Applications of exergy analysis; Guidelines

for evaluating and improving thermodynamic effectiveness.

UNIT -3

Heat transfer modeling and design analysis:- Objective of heat transfer processes; Review ofheat

transfer processes involving conduction, convection and radiation and the corresponding

heattransfer equations used in the design. Design of piping and pump systems:- Head loss

epresentation ;Piping networks ; Hardy – Cross method ; Generalized Hardy – Cross analysis ;

Pump testing methods ; Cavitation considerations ; Dimensional analysis of pumps ; piping system

design practice.

UNIT -4

Thermo-economic analysis and evaluation:- Fundamentals of thermo-economics, Thermo

economic variables for component evaluation ; thermo-economic evaluation ; additional

costingconsiderations.

UNIT -5

Thermo-economic optimization:- Introduction ; optimization of heat exchanger networks;

analytical and numerical optimization techniques ; design optimization for the co-generation

system- a case study ; thermo-economic optimization of complex systems.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Thermal Design & Optimization - Bejan, A., et al., John Wiley, 1996

2. Analysis & Design of Thermal Systems - Hodge, B. K., 2nd edition, Prentice Hall, 1990.

3. Design of Thermal Systems - Boehm, R. F., John Wiley, 1987

4. Design of Thermal Systems - Stoecker, W.F., McGraw-Hill

ADVANCED FLUID POWER SYSTEMS

Course Content:

UNIT -1

Introduction: Pascal Law, Advantages of Fluid Power, Applications of Fluid Power, omponents

of a Fluid Power. Hydraulic Power Unit: Introduction, Pumping Theory, Pump Classification,

Gear Pumps, (Vane Pumps- simple, balanced & pressure compensated vane pump, Vane design)

Piston Pumps- Radial, Axial (Bent axis & Swash plate), Pump Performance, Pump Noise, Ripple

in pumps.

UNIT -2

Hydraulic Actuators: Linear actuator- cylinders, Mechanics of Hydraulic cylinder loading,

limited rotation hydraulic actuator, cylinder cushioning, Gear, Vane & Piston motor, Motor

performance, Hydrostatic transmission. Power Controlling Elements – Valves: i) Directional

Control Valves – Classification, 2/2, 3/2,4/2 & 4/3 ways Dcv’s, Different Centre configurations in

4/3 way valves, actuation of DCV’s, Indirect actuation, Valve Lap – Lap during Stationary and

during switching. ii) Pressure Control Valves: Classification, opening & Closing Pressure

difference, Cracking Pressure, Pressure Relief Valve – Simple & Compound type, Pressure

reducing valve, sequence, unloading & Counter balance valve, Pressure switches. iii) Flow Control

valves – Fixed throttle, Variable throttle, Pressure Compensation principles, pressure compensated

Flow control valve – Reducing & Relief type. iv) Check valve, Pilot operated check valve.

UNIT -3

Hydraulic Circuit Design & Analysis: Control of Single & double acting cylinder, Regeneration

circuit, cylinder sequencing & Synchronizing circuit. Speed control of cylinder & Motors, Analysis

of Hydraulic system with frictional losses, Accumulators &accumulator circuits. Pneumatic

System: Introduction, – Generation of compressed air, air receiver, servicing FRL unit, Air filter,

pressure regulation, lubricator, Pneumatic cylinder & air motor – different types of cylinder,

cushion assembly. Cylinder performance.

UNIT -4

Pneumatic Valve: Directional control valves, impulse valve, Quick exhaust valve, shuttle valve,

Twin pressure valve, Time delay valve, Pneumatic Circuit & Logic Circuits:- Control of single

and double acting cylinder, impulse operation, speed control, sequencing, Pneumatic Vacuum

system AND,OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, YES Function, Logic circuits design using shuttle valve &

twin pressure valve, Binary Arithmetic, logic & Boolean Algebra, use of kannaugh veitch map for

pneumatic circuit design.

UNIT -5

Electrical Control in Fluid Power: Contactors, & Switches, Relays, Limit switch, Electro

hydraulic & Electro Pneumatic Circuits, Simple Cylinder reciprocation, interlocking using relays,

Proximity switches, application of proximity switches, Time dependent will dependent and travel

dependent circuits.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Fluid Power with Application - Anthony Esposito - Peason Education - 5th edition.

2. Oil hydraulics -Principles & maintenance - S. R. Majumdar - Tata M C Graw Hill

3. Components & Application - Bosch Rexroth didactic - Hydraulics Trainer - vol 1.

Publication

4. Pneumatic System, Principles and Maintenance - S. R. Majumdar - Tata M C Graw Hill

Publication.

5. Pneumatics: Theory and Applications - Bosch Rexroth didactic - Publication

6. Electro Pneumatics - Bosch Rexroth didactic - Vol. 2, Publication.

MECHATRONICSSYSTEM DESIGN

Subject Code No. of Credits 4 - 1 - 0

No. of Lecture Hours / Week 04 + 02(L+T) Exam Hours 3

Total No. of Contact Hours 52 + 26(L+T) Exam Marks 100

Course Content:

UNIT -1

Introduction: Definition and Introduction to Mechatronic Systems. Modeling & Simulation of

Physical systems Overview of Mechatronic Products and their functioning measurement systems.

Control Systems, simple Controllers.

UNIT -2

Study of Sensors and Transducers: Pneumatic and Hydraulic Systems, Mechanical Actuation

System, Electrical Actual Systems, Real time interfacing and Hardware components for

Mechatronics.

UNIT -3

Electrical Actuation Systems: Electrical systems, Mechanical switches, Solid state switches,

solenoids, DC & AC motors, Stepper motors. System Models: Mathematical models:- mechanical

system building blocks, electrical system building blocks, thermal system building blocks,

electromechanical systems, hydro-mechanical systems, pneumatic systems.

UNIT -4

Signal Conditioning: Signal conditioning, the operational amplifier, Protection, Filtering,

Wheatstone Bridge, Digital signals , Multiplexers, Data Acquisition, Introduction to digital system

processing, pulse-modulation.

UNIT -5

MEMS and Microsystems: Introduction, Working Principle, Materials for MEMS and

Microsystems, Micro System fabrication process, Overview of Micro Manufacturing, Micro

system Design, and Micro system Packaging. Data Presentation Systems: Basic System Models,

System Models, Dynamic Responses of System. Advanced Applications in Mechatronics: Fault

Finding, Design, Arrangements and Practical Case Studies, Design for manufacturing, User-

friendly design.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. “Mechatronics” - W. Bolton, 2 Ed. Addison Wesley Longman, Pub, 1999.

2. HSU “MEMS and Microsystems design and manufacture”- TMH.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kamm, “Understanding Electro-Mechanical Engineering an Introduction to

Mechatronics” PHI.

2. “Fine Mechanics and Precision Instruments”- Pergamon Press, 1971.

3. Shetty and Kolk “Mechatronics System Design”- Thomson.

4. Mahalik “Mechatronics” TMH.

5. “Mechatronics “HMT, TMH.

6. “Introduction to Mechatronics & Measurement Systems”- Michel. B. Histand & David. G.

Alciatore. Mc Graw Hill.

Department of polymer Science and Technology

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

List of subjects to be offered for Ph.D/M.Sc (Engg) course work - 2019

STREAM – B (Basic/ Foundation Course)

Sl. No. Subject Title

1. Fundamental in Polymer Science

2. Polymer Physics and Rheology

3. Polymer Structure-Property Relationships

4. Polymer Processing Technology

5. Polymer Product and Mould Design

6. Fiber Science and Technology

7. Polymer Degradation and Stabilization

8. Thermoplastic elastomers

9. Polymer Reaction Engineering

10. Latex and Foam Technology

11. Polymer Blends and Alloys

STREAM – C (Advanced Course)

Sl. No. Subject Title

1. Advanced Material Characterization Techniques

2. Advanced Polymeric Materials and Testing

3. Advanced Composite Technology

4. Advanced Rubber Technology

5. Advanced Packaging Materials

6. Engineering Design With Rubber

7. Polymer Membranes and Drug Delivery

8. Designing of High Performance Polymeric Materials

9. Conducting Polymers

10. Specialty and Functional Materials

11. Nano Structured Materials

12. Biomaterials

13. Additive Manufacturing Technology

14. Paints, Adhesive and Surface Coatings

STREAM –B (Basic/ Foundation Course)

FUNDAMENTAL IN POLYMER SCIENCE (4 Credits)

Unit 1 General introduction

Introduction to polymers with emphasis on important concepts such as monomer,

functionality and physical state (amorphous and crystalline), classification of polymers on

the basis of source, elemental composition, heat, pressure, chemical reactivity,

chemical/monomer composition, geometry and stereo regularity.

Molecular weight of polymers – types of average molecular weight, molecular weight

distribution (MWD) and its practical significance, experimental methods to determine

molecular weight.

Unit 2 Chemistry and Mechanism of Polymerization

Definition of polymerization, factors affecting polymerization, mechanism of chain

(addition) polymerization (free radical, ionic and co-ordination (stereo regular)

polymerizations), Zeigler-Natta catalyst

Mechanism of step (condensation) polymerization (with examples- Nylon 66,

polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and phenol-formaldehyde (PF)) - molecular weight in

step growth polymerization, kinetics of step growth polymerization

Unit 3 Methods of Polymerization

Bulk, solution, precipitation, suspension, emulsion polymerization, solid phase, gas phase

and (formulations, mechanism, properties of the polymer produced, advantages and

disadvantages of each technique).

Polyaddition polymerization, melt polycondensation, interfacial polymerization, solution

polycondensation (advantages and disadvantages of each technique).

Unit 4 Copolymerization – introduction, free radical, ionic and copoly-condensation (with

examples).

Special topics in polymer synthesis- Electrochemical polymerization, metathesis

polymerization, group-transfer polymerization, ATRP, plasma polymerization. Advanced

polymerization techniques.

Ring Opening polymerization:

General characteristics and polymerizability of cyclic monomers, ring opening

polymerization of cyclic ethers, anionic polymerization of epoxides, cationic

polymerization of cyclic amides (lactams), cyclic polymerizations of lactones and some

aspects of biodegradable ring opening polymers: glycolides & lactides

Unit 5 Reactions of synthetic polymers - Chemical modification; preparation of polymer

derivatives.

Isolation and purification of polymers- polymer fractionation-fractional precipitation

technique partial dissolution (extraction) technique.

References:

1. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers., 3rd edition, CRC Press, New York,

2011.

2. Gowariker, V. R.; Viswanathan, N. V., Polymer Science; Wiley: New York, 1986.

3. Billmeyer Fred W. JR., Text book of polymer science, Wiley & Sons, New York, 1984.

4. Rodriguez, F., Principles of Polymer Systems. 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill Companies, New

York, U.S.A., 1982.

5. Raymond B. Seymour and Charles E. Carraher, Jr., Marcel Dekker AG, Polymer chemistry: An

introduction. New York, 1981.

6. Odian G, Principles of Polymerization. 4th edition, Wiley Inter Science, New York, 2004.

7. Anil Kumar and Rakesh Gupta, Fundamentals of Polymer Engineering, Marcel Dekker, New

York, 2003.

8. G.S. Mishra, Introductory polymer chemistry, New Age International, 1993

*****

http://www.abebooks.co.uk/servlet/SearchResults?an=Billmeyer+Fred+W.+JR.&cm_sp=det-_-bdp-_-author

http://www.abebooks.com/servlet/SearchResults?an=Rodriguez%2C+F.&cm_sp=det-_-bdp-_-author

POLYMER PHYSICS AND RHEOLOGY (4 Credits)

Course Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the students will be able to

Unit 1 Introduction

Fundamental definitions, configurational states, shapes of polymer molecules-bonding,

conformation and chain statitiscs, typical bond lengths and angles, molar mass and

repeating units.

Chain conformations in polymers

Introduction, conformations (eclipsed, staggered, stable-trans and gauche, conformational

energy of ethane and n-butane), a single ideal chain mean-square end-to-end distance,

radius of gyration, Gaussian chain. Freely jointed chain. Models for calculating the

average end-end distance: freely jointed chain, freely rotating chain, hindered rotation,

realistic chain-excluded volume method, random flight analysis, Worm-like chain, chains

with preferred confirmations and numericals.

Unit 2 Thermal transitions

glass transition; free volume theory, factors affecting the Tg. Crystallization and melting

and glass transition temperature; Degree of crystallization, factors affecting the

crystallizability, measurements of crystallinity, Tg - Definition, Factors influencing the

glass transition temperature, Tg and Molecular weight, Tg, effect of plasticizers, Tg and co-

polymers, Tg and Tm, Importance of Tg, Numericals.

Polymer solutions

Unit 3 Crystalline Morphology

Introduction, degree of crystallinity, experimental determination, crystallites-fringed

micelle model, chain folded crystallites, extended chain crytallites, spherulites and other

polycrystalline structures, theories of chain folding and lamellar thickness. Crystallinity in

Polymers - Morphology of Crystalline Polymers- Lamellae, Folded chain model,

Spherulites, The fringed micelle model, mechanism of Spherulites formation,

crystallization and melting. Kinetics of crystallization: Theories of crystallization kinetics,

Avrami equation. Numericals.

Unit 4 Polymer rheology

Introduction to rheology, fundamental concepts of creep and stress relaxation. Boltzmann

superposition principle, Rheological models - Maxwell, Kelvin, Voight, Standard linear

model. Response of elastic, viscous and viscoelastic materials for static and cyclic load,

complex modulus and compliance, numericals.

Unit 5 Linear viscoelasticity

Introduction to linear viscoelasticity, real materials-relaxation and retardation time spectra.

Master curve and time-temperature super position, analysis of time-temperature scans,

frequency scans.

Applications of rheology in polymer processing

Importance of rheology in polymer processing, time dependence of viscous flow, rheology

of injection molding and blow molding. Flow in capillaries, slits and dies, numericals.

References

1. Ulf W. Gedde. Polymer physics. First edition, Kluwer academic publishers, 1999.

2. B. R. Gupta. Applied Rheology in Polymer Processing. Asian Books Private Limited, New

Delhi, 2005.

3. E. T. Severs. Rheology of Polymers. Reinhold Publishing Co., New York, 1962.

4. D. I. Bower. An Introduction to Polymer Physics. Cambridge University Press, 2002

5. J. A. Brydson. Flow Properties of Polymer melts. 2nd edition, Ilife Books, London, 1981.

6. C. D. Han. Rheology in Polymer Processing, Academic Press, New York, 1976.

7. J. M. Dealy & Wissbrun. Melt Rheology & its role in Plastics Processing. Kluwer, 1990.

*****

POLYMER STRUCTURE-PROPERTY RELATIONSHIPS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Concepts of Polymer Structure and Properties: Chemical linkage between repeat units;

approach and the concept of chemical structure of polymers (well known polymers’

chemical structures to be discussed), stearic regularity of polymer chains. Inter-chain and

intra-chain forces of interactions; determination of tacticity and crystallinity. The concept

of polymer properties (fundamental, processing and product properties); Typology of

polymers (general properties of each family to be discussed), Structural basis for polymers

to be- elastomers, fibers and plastics.

Unit 2 Macromolecules in aggregation: aggregation of polymer chains, structural features of

crystallizable polymers, molecular arrangement in crystallites (eg. In PE, syndiotactic vinyl

polymers, PTFE, PVA, polyesters and polyamides); the principles of crystallite structure,

single crystals of polymers, the morphology of polymers crystallized from melts

(spherulites).

Structural influence on various properties: Optical, Mechanical, Electrical, Thermal and

Solubility.

Unit 3 Influence of the Process Variables on the Properties: Orientation, degree of orientation,

measurement of degree of orientation, uni-axial orientation: meaning, change of properties

by orientation in amorphous and crystalline polymers; biaxial orientation; quantitative

relationships for some physical quantities after orientation like: density, thermal expansion,

thermal conductivity, refractive index (birefringence), modulus of elasticity, mechanical

damping, generalized stress-strain relationship for polymers.

Effect of various additives on polymer behavior (to be discussed with some specific

examples).

Unit 4 Group contribution on various properties: Volumetric, Calorimetric, Solubility,

Transition temperatures, Cohesive/adhesive and mechanical properties.

Unit 5 Influence of molecular structure to predict the properties of specialty polymers: water

soluble polymers, oil soluble polymers, oil insoluble polymers, resistance to gas

permeation, flame retardant polymers, insulating polymer, coating polymer, flexible

polymers, water repellant polymers, heat resistant polymers, transparent polymers,

adhesive polymers, corrosion resistant polymers. High performance Polymers.

References:

1. Van Krevelen, Properties of Polymers: Correlations with chemical structure, Elsevier

Publications, NY, 1972.

2. Raymond B Seymour, Structure-Property Relationships in Polymers, Plenum Press, NY, 1984.

3. Patrick Meares, Polymers-Structure and Bulk Properties, Van Nostrand Publications, NY, 1965.

POLYMER PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction to polymer processing: Current polymer processing practice, analysis of

polymer processing in terms of elementary steps and shaping methods. Introduction to

polymer processing techniques- principle, design, typical applications and case studies of

extrusion, injection molding, thermoforming and film blowing.

Unit 2 Introduction to Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluid mechanics, derivation of momentum

balance equations for flow through circular and slit dies- shear stress distribution, average

velocity, maximum velocity and flowrate. Polymer melt constitutive equations.

Unit 3 Mixing: Introduction, distributive and dispersive mixing, mix quality evaluation,

residence time and strain distributions. Mixing equipments, mixing mechanisms, extruder

as a mixer, motionless mixers, mixing in a stirred tank and practical aspects of mixing.

Unit 4 Reactive Polymer processing and compounding: Classes of polymer chain modification

reactions carried out in reactive polymer processing equipment, strategy of reactive

extrusion. Reactor classifications, reactive compatibilization, grafting techniques,

functionalization of end groups, compatibilization by additives, Polymer compounding.

Unit 5 Injection molding: Introduction, feed system, hot and cold runners, balanced runner

system, flow in an idealized runner system, theoretical aspects of mold filling and

simulation, molding window diagram, practical aspects of injection molding, applications

and trouble shooting

References:

1. Zehev Tadmor and Costa G. Gogos, Principles of polymer processing, 2nd edition, Jhon wiley

and Sons Inc. Publication, New Jersey, 2006.

2. Charles A Harper, Handbook of Plastic Processes, Jhon wiley and sons Inc. Publication,

Newjersey, 2006.

3. Donald G. Baird and Dimitris I. Collias, Polymer processing, principles and design, John Wiley

and Sons Inc., NY, 2001.

4. J K Fink. Reactive polymers fundamentals and applications- a concise guide to industrial

polymers, William Andrew Publishing, Newyork, USA, 2005.

5. Stanley Middleman, Fundamentals of polymer processing. McGraw-Hill Inc., USA, 1977.

6. Manas-Zloczower and Z. Tadmor, Mixing and compounding-theory and practice. Carl Hanser

Verlag, 1994.

*****

POLYMER PRODUCT AND MOULD DESIGN (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction: Material selection based on end use requirement of various products;

principles of product design.

Product Design Features and design steps: Features: inside sharp corners, Wall thickness,

holes, shrinkages, bosses, ribs, threads, draft angle, gussets, parting lines, rims, molded

inserts, undercuts, tapers.

Design steps: Engineering and pseudo plastic design

Unit 2 Design for stiffness: Use of creep curves, methods to improve stiffness. Analysis of thermal

stresses and strains for designing plastic products. Mechanical behavior of composites:

Design properties of composites.

Mechanical behavior of composites - aspect ratio, volume fraction), Analysis of continuous

fiber composite: longitudinal properties, equilibrium equation, geometry of deformation

equation, stress strain relationships.

Properties perpendicular to longitudinal axis: equilibrium conditions, geometry of

deformation equation, stress strain relationships.

Concept of stress concentration factor, Energy approach to fracture, stress intensity approach

to fracture, general fracture behavior of plastics, creep fracture of plastics, crazing and fatigue

in plastics.

Unit 3 Mold design: Introduction to mold making, general mold construction, feeding system

cooling system, ejection systems.

Unit 4 Intermediate mold design: Splits, side cores and side cavities, molding internal under cuts,

mold for threaded components

Unit 5 Aspects of practical mold design: procedure for designing injection mold, checking mold

drawing, worked examples.

References:

1. R.D.Beck, Plastics product design, Van Nostrand – Reinhold, 1970

2. R.J.Crawford, Plastics Engineering, 3rd edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 1998

3. R.G.W.Pye, Injection mold design, Fourth edition, East west Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,1989.

4. Dubois and Pribble, Plastics Mold Engineering Hand book, Chapman & Hall, 2007

5. E. Miller, Plastics product design hand book – Part A and Part B., Marcel Dekker, N.Y.2000.

6. Levy & Dubois, Plastics Product Design Engineering Hand Book, Champman and Hall, 2007.

FIBER SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Production of fibers

Principle, technology, advantages and disadvantages of the following techniques; Melt

spinning, Dry spinning, wet spinning process, Electro spinning techniques. Drawing of

fibers.

Unit 2 Requirement of fiber forming polymers

Crystallinity and orientation. X-ray diffraction measurement of Crystallinity. orientation,

crystal size, small angle X-ray scattering. Measurement of density of fibres, Density

Crystallinity, Infrared spectroscopy for determination of orientation and crystallinity.

Optical microscopy for measurement of birefringence. Internal and surface structure by

electron microscopy. Thermal methods DSC TGA and TMA for structural investigation.

Morphological structure of cotton, wool, silk, regenerated cellulose, polypropylene,

polyester, nylon and polyacrylonitrile.

Unit 3 Protective clothing - Clothing requirements for thermal protection, ballistic protection,

UV-protection, protection from electro-magnetic radiation and static hazards, protection

against microorganisms, chemicals and pesticides. Design principles and evaluation of

protective clothing.

Unit 4 Medical Textiles - Textiles in various medical applications. Application oriented

designing of typical medical textiles (sutures). Materials used and design procedures for

protecting wounds, cardiovascular and other applications

Unit 5 Sportswear - Clothing requirements for different sports. Development of highly

functional fibers, yarns and fabrics for temperature control and moisture management.

Stretch, bulky and light weight fabrics.

Stimuli sensitive intelligent textiles - Production, properties and applications. Smart

textile incorporating functional devices.

References:

1. Kostikov, V. I. Fibre science and technology; Chapman & Hall: London, 1995.

2. Mark, H.F., Atlas, S.M., Man-made fibers; Science and Technology, Interscience

Publishers: New York, 1967.

3. S.P Mishra, A Text Book of Fiber Science & Technology, New age International Publishers,

New Delhi, 2005.

*****

POLYMER DEGRADATION AND STABILIZATION (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction to Polymer Degradation

The practical significance of polymer degradation, Polymer durability, Polymer

stabilization, recycling of polymers, degradable polymers and the plastics litter problem,

fire hazard of polymers, technological testing procedures, the scientific study of polymer

degradation process.

Unit 2 Thermal degradation: Experimental methods, classification of thermal degradation

reactions, radical depolymerisation reactions, non-radical depolymerisation reactions,

cyclization reaction with elimination.

Photo-degradation - Introduction, photodegradation of polyolefins, acrylates and

methacrylates, copolymers of methyl methacrylate and methyl vinyl ketone, polystyrene,

polymers with heteroatoms in the main chain, condensation polymers, photo oxidation.

Unit 3 Oxidation of polymers: Auto oxidation, physical effects of auto oxidation in polymers,

the oxidation chain reaction, chemical changes in polymers during oxidative degradation,

the effect of chemical structure on oxidation rate, the effects of physical structures of

polymers on their rates of deterioration, oxidative degradation of commercial polymers,

degradation during melt processing, degradation at high temperatures, during service,

sanitization by pigments, mechano- oxidation.

Unit 4 Antioxidants and stabilizers: Mechanism of antioxidant action, chain breaking

antioxidants, preventive antioxidants, synergism and antagonism, chain breaking- acceptor

antioxidants, metal deactivators, UV screens and filters, stabilization of polymers during

manufacture and in service, melt stabilization, thermal oxidative stabilization, polymer

bound antioxidants, and UV stabilizers.

Degradation and the fire hazard - The flammability problem, flammability testing, the

burning cycle, additive and reactive fire retardants, phosphorus compounds, antimony

trioxide, aluminum trioxide, compounds of boron.

Unit 5 Degradation in special environments: Polymers under stress, degradation in polluted

atmospheres, nitrogen dioxide, sulphur dioxide, degradation at high temperatures,

ablation, mechanical and ultrasonic degradation, quantitative aspects of ultrasonic

degradation, mechanism of bond scission, quantitative aspects of changes in molecular

weight, degradation by high energy radiation, chemical changes in polymers, G values,

radiation protection, hydrolytic degradation and recycling of polymers by hydrolysis.

References:

1. G.Scott, Elsveir, Atmospheric oxidation and antioxidants, London and New York, 1965

2. R.T. Conley, Thermal stability of polymers, Dekker, 1970.

3. B.Ranby and J.F. Rabek, Photo-degradation, Photo oxidation and photostabilisation of

polymers, Wiley, 1975.

4. G Scott, N. Grassie, The Role of Peroxides in the Photodegradation of polymers, developments

in polymer degradationApp. Sci. Pub., London, chapter 7. 1979

5. G.Scott, Scott Mecahnism of antioxidatnt action, developments in polymer stabilization, App.

Sci. Publication. London, Chapter 1. 1981

6. J. W. Lyons, The chemistry and uses of fire retardants, Wiley and sons, 1970.

7. R.M. Harrison and C.D. Holman, Ozone pollution in Britain, Chem. In. Brit., 18, 563, 1982.

THERMOPLASTIC ELASTOMERS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction: Definition, history and growth. Advantages and disadvantages over

conventional plastics and rubbers. Introduction to the two phases/ components/ blocks

generally present in TPEs and their role or influence on material property. Service

temperature range in TPEs. Classification of TPEs (blends/ copolymers; commodity/

engineering; family) with brief introduction.

Unit 2 Commercial Production/ Synthesis, structure, morphology, property/ composition

relationship, compounding, processing and commercial applications of:

Styrenic Thermoplastic Elastomers (SBCs- SBS, SIS, SEBS).

Copolyester Thermoplastic Elastomers (ether and ester based).



Thermoplastic Polyolefinic Elastomers (TPOs).

Thermoplastic Polyurethane Elastomers (TPUs).



Elastomeric alloys:

Thermoplastic Vulcanizates (TPVs).

Single Phase Melt Processible Rubber (MPRs).

Ionomers: Types and their application.


relationship, compounding, processing and commercial applications of: polyamide TPEs.

Applications of TPEs: Automobile applications, hose and tubing, mechanical rubber

goods, elastic applications and medical applications.

References:

1. Hand book of Thermoplastic Elastomers. Jiri George Drobny, William Andrew publications,

Elsevier Inc, USA, 2014.

2. Handbook of Condensation Thermoplastic Elastomer. S. Fakirov (Edr), WILEY-VCH

Verlag GmbH and Co.KGaA, Weinheim, 2005.

3. Modern Styrenic Polymers: Polystyrenes and Styrenic Copolymers. John Scheirs and Duane

B. Priddy (Edr), John Wiley and Sons Ltd., England, 2003.

4. Synthesis of Polymers. A. Dieter Schl¨uter, Craig J. Hawker, and Junji Sakamoto (Edr),

Volume 1 Wiley-VCH Verlag and Co. KGaA, Germany, 2012.

5. Hand book of Thermoplastic Elastomers. Benjamin. M.Walker and Charles. P. Rader, Vann

Nostord Reinhold company, New York, 1988.

6. Polyurethane Hand book. Gunter Oertel, Hanser Publishers, New York, 1985.

7. Hand book of Polyester molding compounds and moulding technology. Raymond. W.

Meyer, Chapman and Hall, London, 1987.

8. Rubber Technology. Manrice Morton (Edr), (3rd Edn.), Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. New

York, 1987.

9. Plastics materials and Processing. A. Brent Strong, Prentice Hall, Ohio, 1996.

*****

POLYMER REACTION ENGINEERING (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Free-Radical Polymerization - Homogeneous Systems

Introduction to Polymerization reactors - FRP mechanisms and kinetics.

Unit 2 Free-Radical Polymerization - Homogeneous Systems - Heat removal and temperature

programming - Batch reactors - Semibatch (semicontinuous) reactors - Continuous stirred-

tank reactors - Tubular reactors. Gas phase reactor system

Unit 3 Free-Radical Polymerization: Heterogeneous Systems – case study of High-impact

polystyrene - Modeling of HIPS polymerization.

Unit 4 Control of Polymerization Reactors - Characterization of the control problem - Classical

polymerization reaction control problems- Control of reaction rates and of reactor

temperature.

Unit 5 Control of Polymerization Reactors - Control of monomer conversion and polymer

production - Control of molecular weight averages and MWDs - Control of copolymer

composition - Control of particle size and it’s distribution.

References:

1. Jose M. Asua ,Polymer Reaction Engineering , Blackwell Publishing Ltd, 9600 Garsington

Road, Oxford OX4 2DQ, UK, 2007

2. Nauman, E. B.,Chemical Reactor Design, Optimization and Scale up, Mc-Graw Hill, New

York, 2002.

3. Thierry Meyer (Editor), Jos Keurentjes (Editor), Handbook of Polymer reaction Engineering,

ISBN: 3-527-31014-2, Wiley VCH, Weinheim, 2005.

4. Nauman, E. B., Chemical Reactor Design, Wiley, New York, 1987.

*****

LATEX AND FOAM TECHNOLOGY (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction: Terminologies, classification of latex, properties and application of latex,

handling of latex.

NR and Synthetic lattices - Methods of manufacture, properties and applications of

Natural rubber latex, Synthetic lattices like, SBR, XSBR, HSBR, vinyl pyridine latex,

NBR, XNBR, PCR, PVAc, PVC and acrylic latex. Artificial lattices.

Unit 2 Compounding of latex - Vulcanizing ingredients, stabilizers, destabilizing agents and

heat sensitizing agents, micro and nano fillers, protective agents, dispersing agents,

thickeners. Preparation of aqueous solutions, dispersions and emulsions.

Testing of latex - Total solid content, DRC, mechanical stability, chemical stability, pH,

KOH number, VFA number, particle size and size distribution of dispersion.

Unit 3 Manufacture of latex based products - Latex thread, Dipped goods, Carpet backing,

casting, spraying, spreading, rubberized coir, rubberized hair, Micro-porous Ebonite, Can

sealing, Latex cements, Latex laminated paper and boards, Latex coated fabrics and cords,

adhesives, emulsion paints, and electro deposition of latex.

Unit 4 Latex foam - Preparation of compound, gelation, foaming, molding, curing, finishing,

Dunlop and Talalay process. Application of latex foam. Foam testing: Density, hardness,

Flexing, static compression set, elongation at break, ageing, and low temperature

flexibility.

Microcellular foams - Introduction, processing of microcellular foams (solid state batch

process, semi continuous process, extrusion methods), concepts of open and closed cell

structure, properties and applications.

Unit 5 Rigid and flexible polyurethane foam - Raw materials, blowing agents (chemical and

physical blowing agents, selection criteria), chemistry, manufacturing process, properties

and applications. Nanofoams

References:

1. K.O.Calvert. Polymer lattices and their applications, Macmillan publishing Co., NY, 1982

2. D.C.Blackley. Polymer lattices; Science and Tech., Vol 1, 2 and 3. Chapman & Hall., 1997.

3. E.W. Madge. Latex Foam Rubber, MacLaren and Sons Ltd., London, 1962.

4. David Eaves. Handbook of polymer foams. RAPRA Technology, UK, 2004.

5. Gunter Oertel. Polyurethane Hand Book, Hanser Publisher, NY, 1994.

*****

POLYMER BLENDS AND ALLOYS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction: Alloying and blending, historical outline of industrial development of polymer

blends and alloys, definitions, the reasons for and methods of blending, how to select blend

components, fundamental principles for development of polymer alloys and blends.

Classification, Design of polymer blends.

Unit 2 Polymer-polymer miscibility: General principles of phase equilibria calculation, theories of

liquid mixtures containing polymer: Huggins-Flory theory, Mechanisms of phase separation,

general types of polymer blends, polymer crystallization, morphology of blends,

compatibilzed blends, interpenetrating polymer network.

Unit 3 Blend preparation equipments: Mixers and their various types like banbury, hot and cold

mixers, twin screw compounders, and two- roll mills. Design features of these equipments like

rotor types, screws and their various types; flow behavior of the plastic material in the mixing

equipments and theory of mixing.

Unit 4 Characterization of Blends: Phase equilibria methods- turbidity, light scattering, SAXS,

measurement of polymer/polymer interaction parameter by direct methods and ternary system

containing solvent; Indirect methods - Tg (DSC, DMA), IR and Microscopy.

Unit 5 Commercial polymer blends /alloys and applications: Blends of engineering and

commodity plastics like PVC/ABS, PVC/SAN, PVC/NBR, PC/PET, PC/PBT, PC/ABS;

PPO/HIPS - Study in detail along with properties and applications; Applications of polymer

blends and alloys in adhesives, molded products, footwear, films, fibers, tyres and tubes,

surface coatings, wire and cable compounds, belting and hoses, miscellaneous uses, current

trends in polymer blends and alloys technology.

References

1. L A Utracki. Polymer blends and alloys, Hanser Publication, 1989.

2. Paul and Newman. Polymer blends, Academic press, NewYork, 1978.

3. Lloyd M Robeson. Polymer blends– A comprehensive review, Hanser Publishers, 2007.

4. John Mason and Leslie H Sperling. Polymer Blends and Composites, Plenum Press, New York,

1976.

5. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/113105028/35

*****

STREAM – C (Advanced Course)

ADVANCED CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction to analytical instrumentation - Calibration, accuracy, precision,

reproducibility, standard deviation.

Spectroscopic Methods

Introduction, classification, Ultra-violet/Visible spectroscopy - Introduction, principle,

Lambert law, Beer’s law, theory, instrumentation, procedure, advantages, disadvantages,

interpretation of spectrogram, applications-qualitative analysis, quantitative analysis;

purity, cis- and trans- conformation. Numerical

Unit 2 Fourier transform infrared (FTIR) spectroscopy

Introduction, principle, theory, instrumentation, procedure, methods of sample

preparation, advantages, disadvantages, interpretation of spectrogram, and applications-

establishment of chemical structure of polymers, reaction kinetics, polymer linkage,

hydrogen bond formation, purity, copolymerization, qualitative and quantitative results.

Chromatographic techniques

Principle of Gel permeation chromatography (GPC), mechanism of separation,

theory/techniques, instrumentation, molecular weight determination and distribution

(MWD), purity, composition, other applications.

Unit 3 Nuclear Magnetic spectroscopy (NMR)- (1H NMR and 13C NMR)

Introduction Principle, theory, Spin-spin coupling, coupling constant, instrumentation,

procedure, method of sample preparation, advantages, disadvantages, applications –

chemical structures, purity, tacticity.

Unit 4 Thermal Methods

Introduction, general classification, advantages of the TA methods; Differential scanning

calorimetry (DSC and MDSC)- Introduction, theory, instrumentation, method of

analysis, factors affecting on DSC results, advantage, disadvantage, interpretation of DSC

thermograms, applications - Tg, Tm, determination of blends composition, purity,

identification of unknown polymers, degree of crystallization, degree of cure and rate of

cure studies/kinetics of curing, plasticizers effect, Thermo gravimetric analysis (TGA) -

Introduction Principle, theory, instrumentation, procedure for analysis of sample, factors

influence on studies, advantages, disadvantages, applications – Purity, fiber content,

composition of compounded rubbers, identification of polymers/rubbers, thermal

stability, thermal degradation, kinetics of thermal degradation and IPDT. Dynamic

mechanical Analysis (DMA)- Introduction, principle, instrumentation, and its

applications.

Unit 5 Microstructural analysis

X-ray diffractometry (WAXS and SAXS): Principle, theory, instrumentation,

applications-Chain conformations, chain packing, disorder in the crystal, degree of

crystallinity, micro structural parameters, degree of orientations, crystallization behavior

and other applications.

Morphological analysis: SEM, TEM, AFM; Morphology of polymers, phase separation

and other applications.

References:

1. D.Campbell and J.R. White – Polymer Characterization – Physical Techniques (Chapman and

Hall), 1989

2. F.W.Billmeyer-Text book of Polymer Science - 3rd ed. Wiley Interscience,1984.

3. K.J.Saunders-The Identification of Plastics and Rubber , Chapman & Hall, London 1970.

4. William C. Wake -Analysis of Rubber and Rubber like Polymers – Rev. ed. Wiley Interscience,

New York 1969.

5. E.Turi -Thermal Characterization of Polymeric materials -Academic Press,New York 1981.

*****

ADVANCED POLYMERIC MATERIALS AND TESTING (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Manufacturing (in brief), processability, structure-property relationships and the end use

(applications) are to be discussed for the following engineering/ high performance polymers

with case studies: Polyamides, PET, PBT, PTFE, PC, PCTFE, PVDF, Polyarylate,

Polyaramid, Polyimides, Polyamide imides, Polyphenelene Sulphide, Polysulphone.

Unit 2 Manufacturing (in brief), process-ability, structure-property relationships and the end use

(applications) are to be discussed for the following engineering/ high performance polymers

with case studies: Polyacetals, Poly phenylene oxide (PPO), Polyphenylene ether (PPE),

Polyketones (PEK, PEEK), Ultra High Molecular Weight Poly Ethylene, Acrylonitrile

butadiene styrene.

Unit 3 Biomaterials, Liquid Crystalline Polymers, Membranes

Biomaterials: polymeric implant materials (Polyolefins, polyamides, acrylic polymers,

fluorocarbon polymers, silicon rubbers, acetals). Biodegradable polymers for medical

purposes, Biopolymers in controlled release systems. Biocompatibility and toxicological

screening of biomaterials.

Polymeric Membranes: Synthetic polymeric membranes and their applications.

Liquid Crystalline Polymers: Requirements, classification, examples, properties,

applications.

Unit 4 Introduction: Need for testing, need for standards and specifications, national and

international standards, quality control, limitations and accuracy of test data; validity of

test methods. Types of tests. Basics of failure mechanism (fracture mechanics);

identification of ageing and factors affecting it; and material responses to different types of

forces.

Specimen preparation and conditioning: Shape and size of test specimen, standards for

test specimen preparation like molding, machining, stamping and punching of specimens,

and their effects on test results. Conditioning of specimens.

Non-destructive testing methods: X-rays, ultrasonic testing, Infra Red and Microwave

techniques.

Unit 5 Mechanical properties:

Short term properties: Tensile, compression, flexural, shear, impact resistance (types and

measurements), toughness, tear resistance, abrasion resistance and hardness (types).

Long term properties: Types of stress strain curves, dynamic stress and strain; creep, stress

relaxation, flex to fatigue properties.

Polymer product testing: Brief testing procedures for different products like- films,

pipes, tubes, laminates, adhesives, tires and containers.

References

1. Michael L Berins. Plastic Engineering handbook of the society of plastics industry Inc, 5th Ed, Van

Nostrand Reinhold, 1991.

2. Jacqueline I Kroschwitz. Concise Encyclopedia of Polymer Science and Engineering, Wiley, 1990.

3. James M Margolis. Engineering Thermoplastics properties and application, Marcel Dekker Inc,

New York, 1985.

4. Paul and Newman. Polymer blends, Academic press, NewYork, 1978.

5. Lloyd M Robeson. Polymer blends– A comprehensive review, Hanser publishers, 2007.

6. John Mason and Leslie H Sperling. Polymer blends and composites, Plenum Press, New York,

1976.

7. J B Park, Biomaterials - Science and Engineering, Plenum Press, 1984.

8. Sujata V. Bhat, Biomaterials, Narosa Publishing House, 2002.

9. Jonathan Black, Biological Performance of materials, Marcel Decker, 1981

10. C.P.Sharma and M.Szycher, Blood compatible materials and devices, Technomic Publishing

Co. Ltd., 1991

11. Piskin and A.S. Hoffmann, Polymeric Biomaterials (Eds), Martinus Nijhoff Publishers.

(Dordrecht. 1986)

12. Eugene D. Goldbera , Biomedical Polymers, Akio Nakajima

13. A . Rembaum and M. Shen, Biomedical Polymers, Mercer Dekkar Inc. 1971

14. L. Hench and E. C. Ethridge, Biomaterials - An Interfacial approach.

15. R.P. Brown, Hand book of Polymer testing , Mercel Dekker ,Newyork,1998

16. Vishu Shah, Handbook of plastics testing technology, John Wiley, NewYork, 2007

ADVANCED COMPOSITE TECHNOLOGY (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction: Definition, reason for composites, classifications of composites, advantages

and disadvantages of composites.

Thermoplastic Matrix - Functions of matrix, raw materials, physical and chemical

properties, thermal and mechanical properties.

Thermoset Matrix - Epoxy; Curing reactions, hardener, gel time, viscosity modifications,

Prepeg making. Unsaturated polyester resin; Catalyst, curing reactions, viscosity modifier.

Alkyd resin, vinyl ester, cyanate ester, polyimides, physical and chemical properties,

thermal behaviour, mechanical properties and uses.

Unit 2 Reinforcements: Introduction, Functions of fillers, types, properties, chemistry and

applications of fillers such as silica, titanium oxide, talc, mica, silicon carbide, graphite.

Flakes - Both and natural and synthetic should be considered.

Fibers-Natural (silk, jute, sisal, cotton, linen) and synthetic, short and long fibers, general

purpose and high performance fibers, organic and inorganic fibers - Properties, structure and

uses; Glass fiber-classifications, chemistry, manufacturing process. Properties and uses of

Nylons, Carbon, Aramid, Boron, aluminium-carbide fibres.

Coupling agents - Function, chemistry, methods of applications, advantages and

disadvantages.

Unit 3 Processing of thermoplastic composites: Types of processing methods, matched die

molding, solution, film, lamination, sandwich. Processing conditions, advantages and

disadvantages.

Fabrications of thermoset composites: Hand lay up method, match die molding,

compression and transfer molding, pressure and vacuum bag process, filament winding,

pultrusion, RIM, RRIM, VARTM & VERTM, Injection moulding of thermosets, SMC and

DMC, Advantages and disadvantages of each method.

Unit 4 Factors influencing on performance of the composites: Aspect ratio, void content, length

of the fiber, nature of the fiber, structure property relationship between fiber and matrix,

modifications of the fiber surface, degree of interaction between and fiber and matrix,

wetting behavior, degree of cross linking.

Testing of composites - Destructive and non-destructive tests; Destructive- tensile,

compression, flexural, ILSS, impact strength and HDT. The basic concepts of fracture

mechanisms.

Unit 5 Composite product design: Introductions, Design fundamentals, definitions, structure-

material-design relationships, design values and design constraints, uncertainty in product

design, constitutes of composite product, design process, decision making in design, design

methodologies, material considerations in composite design, numericals.

References:

1. George Lubin, Hand book of composites ,Van Nostrand Reinhold Company Inc, New York 1982.

2. L.C. Hollaway, Polymers and Polymer Composites in Construction, Thomos Telford ltd.,

London,UK, 1990

3. John C. Bittence, Fran Cavern, Engineering Plastics and Composites, Materials data series, 2nd

edition, ASM International, 1990

4. Charles A. Harper, Handbook of Plastics, Elastomers and Composites, Illustrated edition, McGraw

Hill Professional, 2002

5. Rosato, Designing with Reinforced composites- Technology-Performance, Economics, 2nd Ed.

Hanser publications ,Newyork,1997.

6. Leif A. Carlssen. And Joahn W. Hillispie, Delwane Composite design Encyclopedia (Vol 3)

Processing and Fabrication / Technology, Technomic Publishing Ah. Lancaster U.S.A.

7. Nicholas P. Cheremisinoff and Paul N. Cheremmisinoff, Fiber glass Reinforce Plastics and

Composites, Noyes Publications, N.J. U.S.A. 1995.

8. Thomas J. Drozdr, Composite applications – the future is now, Society of Manufacturing

Engineers, Michigan, 1989.

9. Y.C. Ke, P. Strove and F.S. Wang, Polymer layered silicate and silica nano composites. Elsevier,

2005.

10. Sanjay K Mazumdar, Composite manufacturing, materials, product and process engineering, CRC

Press, London, 2002.

11. Vishu Shah, Hand Book of Plastics Testing Technology, 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc NY.

1998.

ADVANCED RUBBER TECHNOLOGY (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Natural and synthetic rubbers: Production, grades, properties, compounding principle

and applications of general purpose and special purpose elastomers: Natural rubber, SBR,

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22John+C.+Bittence%22&source=gbs_metadata_r&cad=3

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Fran+Cverna%22&source=gbs_metadata_r&cad=3

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=bibliogroup:%22Materials+data+series%22&source=gbs_metadata_r&cad=3

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Charles+A.+Harper%22&source=gbs_metadata_r&cad=9

EPDM, PBR, NBR, IIR, polychloroprene rubber, fluoroelastomers, silicone rubber,

acrylic rubber and chlorosulphonated polyethylene, chlorinated polyethylene, HNBR,

fluorosilicones, epichlorohydrin rubber.

Unit 2 Compounding Ingredients:

(a) Additives to modify mechanical properties

(b) Additives to modify Surface properties

(c) Additives to modify Optical properties

(d) Other additives such as Flame retardants, blowing agents etc.,

Unit 3 Design of compounds to meet

(a) Product requirements

(b) Service requirements

(c) Process requirements

(d) Statutory requirements

Unit 4 Rubber processing techniques and Troubleshooting: Mastication, Mixing process,

Shaping process (extrusion and calendaring process), Molding process ( compression

molding, transfer molding, injection molding), Vulcanization techniques (batch and

continuous techniques)

Unit 5 Safety, Health, Environment and Quality (SHEQ):

Raw material, Process and Finished goods testing and control.

Statistical analysis.

Non destructive testing.

References:

1. Rodgers, B. Rubber compounding: chemistry and applications; Marcel Dekker: New York,

2004

2. Andreas Limper, Mixing of rubber compounds; Carl Hanser Verlag, Munich, 2012.

3. Roger Brown, Physical Testing of Rubber, Springer Science, US, 2006.

4. Gent, A. N. Engineering with rubber how to design rubber components; 2nd ed.; Hanser;

Munich, 2001.

5. Morton, M., Rubber technology, 2d ed.; Van Nostrand Reinhold: New York, 1973.

6. Freakley, P. K., Rubber processing and production organization; Plenum Press: New York,

1985.

7. Brydson, J. A., Rubbery materials and their compounds; Elsevier Applied Science, London,

1988.

8. Barlow, F. W., Rubber compounding: principles, materials, and techniques; M. Dekker: New

York, 1988.

9. J.E. Mark and Erman.F.R. Eirich, Science and Technology of Rubber, Elsevier Academic

Press, UK, Third Edition, 2005.

10. N.R. Legge, G.Holden and H.E. Schroeder, Thermoplastic elastomers, 2nd edition, Hanser

Verlag, Munich, 1996.

11. Blow, C. M.; Hepburn, C. Rubber technology and manufacture; 2nd ed.; Butterworth Scientific:

London, 1982.

12. Alliger, G. and Sjothun, I.J., Vulcanization of elastomers: Principles and practice of

vulcanization of commercial rubbers; Reinhold Pub. Corp.: New York, 1964.

ADVANCED PACKAGING MATERIALS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction to packaging, Definition, roles and functions of packaging, Classification of

packaging: Primary, secondary and tertiary packaging, Packaging design, Protection against

handling, transportation and storage hazards, Packaging supply chain, Labeling, coding and

marking, Packaging aesthetics and graphic design, Packaging legislation.

Unit 2 Packaging materials and their properties: Glass, Paper and paperboard, Types of Glass,

Corrugated fiber board (CFB), Metal containers: Tin Plate and Aluminum, plastics,

Composite containers, Collapsible tubes, Mono and multi layer plastic Films, Laminated

films, Metalized films, Principles for choice of packaging materials, Testing of packaging

material.

Unit 3 Manufacturing process of packaging materials, Mechanical operations for the manufacturing

of paper and paperboard, Production of packaging from papers and boards, Production of

paper based semi rigid packaging, Corrugated containers – classifications, components,

flutes and stages in preparation in corrugated boards, Glass Manufacturing techniques, Metal

based packaging, Can manufacturing, Aluminium foil containing packaging, Film casting

and extrusion of plastic films, Blow moulding for bottles, Packaging closures. Packaging

from combined materials.

Unit 4 Advanced Packaging Technologies: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) protective packaging,

Modified and controlled atmosphere packaging, Smart, Active and Intelligent Packaging,

Time-temperature indicators, cold chain packaging technology, Gas flush and vacuum

packaging, Skin packaging, Shrink films, Vacuum packaging, Traceability, RFID tags, Bar

Codes, Nanotechnology in packaging.

Unit 5 Packaging Laws and regulations, Safety aspects of packaging materials, migration of

additives into food materials and its testing; Packaging material residues in food products,

Environmental issues, recycling and waste disposal of packaging, biodegradable and

biopolymers for packaging.

References:

1. Food packaging technology, Editors: Coles, McDowell and Kirwan, Vol. 5. CRC Press, 2003,

ISBN 1841272213

2. Fundamentals of Packaging Technology, Editors: Natarajan S, Govindarajan M, Kumar B. PHI

Learning Pvt. Ltd.; 2014, ISBN 9788120350540.

3. Packaging Technology, Fundamentals, Materials and Processes, Editors: Anne and Henry Emblem,

, Woodhead Publishing, 2012, ISBN: 9781845696658

4. Handbook of Package Engineering. Third Edition. Editors: Hanlon, Kelsey and Forcinio, CRC

Press, USA, 1998, ISBN 9781498731935.

5. Materials for advanced packaging, Editors: Lu and Wong, Vol. 181, Springer, New York, 2009,

ISBN: 978-0-387-78218-8.

6. Food Packaging: Principles and Practice, Third Edition. Editor: Gordon L. Robertson, CRC Press ,

2012, ISBN 9781439862414

ENGINEERING DESIGN WITH RUBBER (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction to the static load-deformation

Properties of rubber

Large strain theory: Theory of rubber elasticity, kinetic & phenomenological theory.

Unit 2 Dynamic force-deformation properties: Linear & non-linear viscoelastic behavior.

Theories of strength: Influence of hysteresis on strength, strength and fracture processes.

Dynamic mechanical analysis of rubber

Deformation of rubber units under equilibrium loading condition.

Deformation of rubber units in shear compression & torsion.

Unit 3 Damping: Dynamic spring stiffness, spring curve, Rubber springs. Basic concept of

various rubber mountings and their design criteria. Vibration isolation & transmissibility-

single degree of freedom system-isolation of shock & transient vibration-simple linear

system.

Mold and die design: Introduction, factors to be considered for mold & die design, design

procedure for different molds.

Unit 4 Rubber in packaging: Theory of bulk cushioning material-solid runner mats, design

aspect.

Bridge bearing: Classification, design and principle

Unit 5 Rubber in fluid sealing static & dynamic sealing, design characteristics.

Flexible composite: Diaphragms & their analysis, air spring and their analysis.

References:

1. A.N. Gent, Engineering with Rubber: How to design rubber components, Carl Hanser Verlag,

Munich,1992.

2. Crawford, R. J. Plastics engineering; 3rd ed.; Butterworth-Heinemann: Amsterdam, 1998.

3. McCrum, N. G.; Buckley, C. P. Principles of polymer engineering; Oxford University Press:

Oxford, 1988.

4. B. R. Gupta, Applied Rheology in Polymer Processing, Asian Books Private Limited, New Delhi,

2005.

5. Treloar, L. R. G. The physics of rubber elasticity; 3rd ed.; Clarendon Press; Oxford, 2005

6. E.F.Gobel, Rubber spring design, ISBN-13:9780470308554,Wiley. John & Sons,1974

POLYMER MEMBRANES AND DRUG DELIVERY (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Fundamentals of Membranes - Introduction to membranes– definition- classification of

membranes- Homogenous dense membranes- Heterogeneous asymmetric membranes –

thin film composite membranes – liquid membranes-ion exchange membranes –polymer

selection for development of membranes-polymer selection for development of

membranes polymer property-strength-viscosity-chemical resistance-processing

temperature- factors membrane performance.

Unit 2 Development and Characterization of Membranes - Development of polymer

membranes-modification–blending – crosslinking – grafting - copolymerization-

characterization of membranes-solution techniques; viscosity, density, ultrasonic velocity-

thermal methods; TGA, DSC, TMA – spectroscopy methods; UV, FT-IR, NMR-optical

methods; SEM, TEM and XRD.

Unit 3 Application of Membranes - Various applications and uses of membranes; Micro

filtration – ultra filtration – Reverse osmosis - Gas permeation -Pervaporation - Nano

filtration - Dialysis-electro dialysis.

Unit 4 Self-Assemblies as Promising Vehicles for Drug Delivery - Introduction-various self

assembled aggregates as carriers-surfactants Micelles-Liposomes-polymeric aggregates–

polymeric Micelles-polyion complexes-functional properties of polymeric carriers-

morphological criteria-solubility and stability-Biocompatibility-drug loading and

releasing characteristics-Biological aspects – pharmacokinetics at the systemic level –

cellular uptake – release of drugs in the cell.

Unit 5 Role of Polymers in Controlled Release of Drug Delivery

Introduction- currently available polymers; diffusion-controlled systems-solvent-activated

systems–chemically controlled systems – Magnetically controlled systems –soluble

polymers as drug carriers: pinocytosis- Ideal soluble polymers – Biodegradable or

bioerodible polymers: Drug release by matrix solubilization- Erodible diffusional systems

– Monolithic systems - Mucoadhesive polymers – polymer containing pendent bioactive

substituents- Mmatrix systems.

References:

1. Kaustubha Mohanty, Mihir K. Purkait. Membrane Technologies and Applications, CRC

Press, London, 2011.

2. Vasant V. Ranade, A. Mannfred Hollinger, Drug Delivery Systems, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, Boca

Raton, Florida, 2003.

3. RYM Huang. Pervaporation membrane separation processes. Elsevier Publications, Amsterdam,

1991.

4. Petrmunk and T.M. Aminabhavi. Introduction to Molecular Science, 2nd edition, Wiley

Interscience, New York, 2002.

*****

DESIGNING OF HIGH PERFORMANCE POLYMERIC MATERIALS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Polymer & Polymer Blends - Thermodynamic of polymer blends. Miscibility of

Polymers. Immiscible blends, LCST, UCST

Transition behavior of blends – Tg, Tm, crystallization, morphology of important

commercial polymers

Unit 2 Compatibilization and mechanism, Reactive blending. Compatibilizers.

Plastics processing from material engineering point of view, Mixing, kneading,

granulation. Properties, stability and application of plastics; Evaluation of degree of

miscibility in polymer blends.

Unit 3 Effect of additives on properties and processibility of Plastics - Reinforcement (Long,

Short fibers, and Particulate); Plasticizers, Process aids, Lubricants, Impact Modifiers),

Surface Property Modifiers (Antiblocking, Antislip agents, Antistaic Agents, Adhesion

Promoters)

Unit 4 Optical Property Modifiers - Transparecy, Opacity, Colour, Fluorescent, Phophorescent,

Optical Brightening Pigments), UV Stabilizers, Antidegradants & Stabilizers

Unit 5 Compounding of Rubbers - Introduction, Compounding Hierarchy, Elastomers Used in

Rubber Compounding, Fillers for Rubber, Antidegradants, Processing Agents,

Vulcanization. Statistical design of experiments and analysis of results

References:

1. J. A. Manson and L.H. Sperling, Polymer Blends and Composites, Plenum Press, New York,

1976.

2. C. Booth and C. Price, Comprehensive Polymer Science, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1989.

3. Anil K. Bhowmick, Rubber Products Manufacturing Technology, Marcel Dekker, New York,

1994.

4. Roberts A.D., Natural Rubber Science and Technology, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1988.

5. G. Alliger (Editor), I. J. Sjothun, Vulcanization of Elastomers: Principles and Practice of

Vulcanization of Commercial Rubbers, Reinhold Pub. Corp., New York, 1964.

6. J.A. Brydson, Plastic materials, 6th Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford, 1995.

7. LA Utracki, Polymer alloys and blends: thermodynamics and rheology, Hanser, Munich,1990

8. DR Paul and S. Newman, Polymer Blends, Academic Press, New York, 1978.

9. Charles B. Arends, Polymer Toughening, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1996.

10. Nobert M Bikales, Mechanical properties of polymers, Wiley-Interscience, Newyork, 1971.

11. Kier M. Finlayson and Melvyn A. Kohudic (Editors), Advances in Polymer Blends and Alloys

Technology, Lancaster, Technomic, 1989.

CONDUCTING POLYMERS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Electrical properties measurements - Introduction to conducting polymers, definitions,

classifications, practical significance and applications of conducting polymers,

Measurement of properties - conductivity, volume and surface resistivity, dielectric

strength, dielectric constant, dissipation factor, capacitance, break down voltage, arc

resistance and impedance.

Unit 2 Conductor, semiconductor and factors affecting on electrical properties. Conductive

mechanism- percolation theory, charge carrier transport in composites, electrical contacts

between filler particles and different conduction models

Factors affecting – fillers nature, size, shape, nature of polymers, dispersion of the fillers,

morphology of the fillers, temperature, frequency/voltage and environmental conditions

http://www.mrw.interscience.wiley.com/epst/articles/pst328/sect5.html

Unit 3 Electrically conducting polymers - Introduction, prototype conducting polymer and

electrochemistry of conducting polymer films, co-polymers and composites of conducting

polymers, processable conducting polymers. Metal ion containing polymers, solid polymer

electrolyte, characteristics properties and applications of electrically conductive polymers.

Unit 4 Synthesis, characteristic properties and applications of conducting polymers

Poly acetylene, polyaniline, polypyrrole and polythiophene.

Fabrication of conducting polymer composites - Melt mixing method, solution, emulsion,

solution interfacial and insitu polymerization methods. Methods of measurements of

electrical properties and structure-property relationship.

Unit 5 Electro active polymers - Filled polymers, EMI shielding, conductive coating, signature

materials, inherently conductive materials, doping, conducting mechanisms. Applications;

Rechargeable batteries, electro chromic devises, sensors, microelectronics,

photoconductive polymers, polymers in fiber optics, polymers in nonlinear optics,

Langmuir-Blodgett films, peizo and pyro electric polymers and their applications.

References:

1. Conductive polymers and plastics. Edited by J.M. Margolis, Chapman and Hall Ltd., London,

1989.

2. Handbook of Conducting Polymers, Vol 1&2 (Ed.: T.A. Skotheim), Marcel Dekker, New York,

1986.

3. Handbook of Organic Conductive Materials and Polymers (Ed.: H.S. Nalwa), Wiley, New York,

1997.

4. Handbook of Conducting Polymers (Eds.: T.A. Skotheim, R.L. Elsenbaumer, J. F. Reynolds),

2nd ed., Marcel Dekker, New York, 1998.

*****

SPECIALTY AND FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Conducting polymers - Chemistry, Preparation, conducting mechanism, properties and

uses (LED market, future of lighting, smart materials or sensors) of polyaniline and

polypyrrole.

Unit 2 High Temperature and fire resistant polymers: Importance, methods to improve

thermal stability and fire resistance, properties and applications of high temperature and

fire resistant polymers

Liquid crystal polymers: Smectic, nematic, cholestric crystals, theromotropic main chain

liquid crystal polymers, side chain liquid crystal polymers, chiral nematic liquid crystal

polymers, properties and applications of commercial LCPs.

Unit 3 Polymers in photo-resist applications: Negative photoresists, positive photoresists,

plasma developable photoresists, photoresists applications for printing.

Functional fillers: Enhancement of fire retardancy, Modification of electrical and

magnetic properties, Modification of surface properties, Enhancement of processability;

Functional colorants

Unit 4 Ionic Polymers: Classification, Synthesis, Properties (Ionic cross linking, ion-exchange,

hydrophilicity) of ionic polymers. Ionomers and polyelectrolytes: types, properties and

applications.

Synthetic polymer membranes: Types of membranes, Membrane preparation,

membrane modules, applications.

Unit 5 Hydrogels: Classification, Synthesis, Characterization and applications Shape memory

polymers: Classification, thermomechanical cycle, molecular mechanism, activation

method, applications of SMPs;

Micro encapsulation: Morphology, core and shell materials, microencapsulation

techniques, release mechanism and applications

Reference:

1. Plastics Technology Hand Book, Manas Chanda and Salil K Roy (4th edition), CRC press, New

York.

*****

NANO STRUCTURED MATERIALS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Nanostructured materials - Introduction, basic of Nanoparticles, Nanowires, Nanorods,

Nanoplatelets, Nanoclusters, Solid solutions.

Classification, synthetic routes for nanoparticles production- super critical fluid based

particle production, droplet and aerosol techniques, gas atomization approaches,

dendrimers, block copolymers, self-assembly, block copolymer phase diagram, Block

copolymer thin films,hyper branched polymers or star polymers, molecular imprint

polymers, nano oxides, nanowires, nanotubes and nanofibres, polymer nanofilm,

applications of polymeric nanoparticles.Bottom up and top down approaches and

nanofabrication.

Unit 2 Polymer-inorganic nanocomposites - Introduction of nanotechnology and polymer

nanocomposites, the difference between nanocomposites and traditional filler enhanced

polymers, the structure and classification of polymer nanocomposites, different types of

nano fillers, one dimensional, Two dimensional and Three dimensional nanostructured

materials, nanoclay- introduction, structure, chemistry and its modification with

surfactants, preparative methods and structure of polymer/clay nanocomposites, types of

polymers used for polymer/ clay nanocomosites preparation, material properties of

polymer/clay nano composites, melt rheology and processing operations of

nanocomposites, characterization of nanocomposites. Nanocomposites of polymers and

inorganic particles, synthesis and properties. Major progress over the past one and half

decades.

Unit 3 Carbon nanomaterials - CNTs- Structural aspects, single walled and multi walled

nanotubes, preparation of nano tubes: carbon arc process, catalytic assisted pyrolysis, laser

technique, electro chemical method, purification of carbon nano tube, properties of nano

tubes, surface modification of CNTs, application of nanotubes. Graphite nanofibre,

Graphene oxide- chemistry, types, preparation and surface modification and properties.

Applications of Nanomaterials: Catalysis, electronic, aerospace, automotive, surface

coatings, magnetic, optical and medicine.

Unit 4 Nanocomposites of carbon nanotubes - Introduction, carbon nanotube-metal matrix

composites, carbon nanotube –ceramic-matrix composites – properties and uses. CNT-

polymer-matrix composites – methods of fabrication, characterization, and their uses.

Factorsinfluencing the performances of nanocomposites. Graphene oxide – polymer

composites - fabrication, characterization and their uses.

Conducting polymeric nanomaterials - Introduction to conducting polymers,

mechanism of conduction in nanocomposite, effect of dopants on conductivity, methods

of synthesis of polymeric nanomaterials, structure-property relationship, polymeric

nanomaterials for electrical and electronic applications.

Unit 5 Application of Nanotechnology - Nanotechnology for waste reduction and improved

energy efficiency, nanotechnology based water treatment strategies. Nanoporous

polymers and their applications in water purification, Nanotoxicology. Use of

nanoparticles for environmental remediation and water treatment. Case studies and

Regulatory needs.

Polymeric nanoparticles for drug and gene delivery - Introduction, transport

phenomenon and mechanism, features of polymeric materials, preparation and

characterization of nanoparticles, recent developments in nanoparticles technology,

nanoparticles for drug and gene delivery applications

References:

1. H.S.Nalwa (ed).-Encyclopedia of nanoscience and nanotechnology,American Scientific

Publisher, USA, Vols. 1-10, 2004.

2. Tapas Kuilla, Sambu Bhadra Dahu Yao, Nam Hoon Kim,Saswata Bose, Joong Hee Lee, Recent

advances in graphene based polymer composites - Progress in Polymer Science 35(2010) 1350-

1375.

3. Editors: S. Thomas, G.E. Zaikov and S.V. Valsaraj, Recent advances in polymer

nanocomposites, Leiden, Boston, 2009.

4. Editors: S.Thomas, G.E.Zaikov, Progress in Polymers Nanocomposites Research , Nova

publishers, USA, 2008. web site address: novapublishers.com

5. Y.C.Ke, P.Stroeve, F.S.Wang, Polymer layered silicate and silica nano composites, Elsevier,

2005.

6. B.K.G. Theng. Formation and properties of clay-polymer complexes. 2nd ed., Elsevier,

Amsterdam, 2012.

7. B.K.G. Theng. Chemistry of clay-organic reactions. , Adam Hilger, London, 1974.

8. V.Chirala, G.Marginean, W.Brandl and T.Iclanzan, Vapour grown carbon nanofibres-poly

propylene composites and their properties in Carbon nanotubes edited by V.N. Popov and P.

Lambin, p.227, Springer, Netherlands, 2006.

*****

BIOMATERIALS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements of biomaterials, classification of

biomaterials, comparison of properties of some common biomaterials. Effects of

physiological fluid on the properties of biomaterials. Biological responses (extra and intra-

vascular system). Surface properties of materials, physical properties of materials,

mechanical properties.

Unit 2 Polymeric implant materials: Polyolefins, polyamides, acrylic polymers, fluorocarbon

polymers, silicon rubbers, acetals. (Classification according to thermosets, thermoplastics

and elastomers). Viscoelastic behavior: creep-recovery, stress-relaxation, strain rate

sensitivity. Importance of molecular structure, hydrophilic and hydrophobic surface

properties, migration of additives (processing aids), aging and environmental stress

cracking.

Physiochemical characteristics of biopolymers. Biodegradable polymers for medical

purposes, Biopolymers in controlled release systems. Synthetic polymeric membranes and

their biological applications.

Unit 3 Composite implant materials: Mechanics of improvement of properties by incorporating

different elements. Composite theory of fiber reinforcement (short and long fibers, fibers

pull out). Polymers filled with osteogenic fillers (e.g. hydroxyapatite). Host tissue

reactions.

Biocompatibility and toxicological screening of biomaterials: Definition of

biocompatibility, blood compatibility and tissue compatibility.

Unit 4 Biocompatibility and toxicological screening of biomaterials, toxicity tests: acute and

chronic toxicity studies (in situ implantation, tissue culture, haemolysis, thrombogenic

potential test, systemic toxicity, intracutaneous irritation test), sensitization,

carcinogenicity, mutagenicity and special tests.

Sterilisation techniques: ETO, gamma radiation, autoclaving. Effects of sterilization on

material properties.

Unit 5 Testing of biomaterials/Implants: In vitro testing (Mechanical testing): tensile,

compression, wears, fatigue, corrosion studies and fracture toughness. In-vivo testing

(animals): biological performance of implants. Ex-vivo testing: in vitro testing simulating

the in vivo conditions. Standards of implant materials. biodegradation, bioerrosion, and

biocompatibility.

Text book: C. M. Agrawal, J. L. Ong, M. R. Appleford and G. Mani, Introduction to biomaterials -

basic Theory with Engineering ApplicationsCambridge University Press, New York, 2014.

References:

1. Véronique Migonney (Edr.), Biomaterials, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., USA, 2014.

2. J B Park, Biomaterials - Science and Engineering, Plenum Press, 1984.

3. Sujata V. Bhat, Biomaterials, Narosa Publishing House, 2002.

4. Jonathan Black, Biological Performance of materials, Marcel Decker, 1981.

5. C.P.Sharma and M.Szycher, Blood Compatible Materials And Devices, Technomic

Publishing Co. Ltd., 1991.

6. Piskin and A.S. Hoffmann, Polymeric Biomaterials (Eds), Martinus Nijhoff Publishers,

Dordrecht, 1986.

7. A . Rembaum and M. Shen, Biomedical Polymers, Mercer Dekkar Inc. 1971.

8. Hench, L. L. and E. C. Ethridge, Biomaterials: An Interfacial Approach, Academic Press,

New York, 1983.

ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY (4 Credits)

Course Content:

Unit 1 Introduction: Terminologies (Additive manufacturing, Layer-Based Manufacturing, rapid

prototyping, Stereolithography, 3D printing, selective laser sintering, direct metal laser

sintering), History of additive manufacturing, benefits of additive manufacturing, The generic

AM process, additive manufacturing vs CNC machining, classification of AM Processes,

Application levels. Applications of AM, challenges in AM

Unit 2 Materials, Design, and Quality Aspects for Additive Manufacturing: Materials for AM

(Anisotropic Properties, Basic Isentropic Materials: Plastics, metals, ceramics, composites),

Engineering Design Rules for AM, Additive Manufacturing Design and Strategies; AM

Unique Capabilities, Complex Geometries, Integrated Geometry, Integrated Functionalities,

Multi-Material Parts and Graded Materials.

Unit 3 Layer Manufacturing Processes: (Principle, classification, materials, process

parameters, merits and demerits of) Powder Bed Fusion Processes, Polymerization (Laser-

Stereolithography, Polymer Printing and Jetting, Digital Light Processing, Micro

Stereolithography, Vat Photopolymerization Processes)


parameters, merits and demerits) Extrusion-Based Systems (Fused Layer Modeling), Sheet

Lamination Processes, Powder-Binder Bonding – Three Dimensional Printing.


parameters, merits and demerits of) Material Jetting, Binder Jetting, Directed Energy

Deposition Processes, Direct Write Technologies, Other Processes: Aerosolprinting,

Bioplotter, Multifunctional printing, Guidelines for Process Selection, Machines for Additive

Manufacturing, Post processing techniques.

References:

1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen and Brent Stucker (Ed), Additive Manufacturing Technologies; 3D

Printing, Rapid Prototyping, and Direct Digital Manufacturing (2nd edition), Springer, New

York, 2015.

2. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose (Ed.), Additive Manufacturing, Boca Raton,

London, 2016.

3. Andreas Gebhardt (Ed), Understanding Additive Manufacturing; Rapid Prototyping, Rapid

Tooling, Rapid Manufacturing, Hanser Publishers, Munich, 2011.

4. ASTM F2792 − 12a: Standard Terminology for Additive Manufacturing Technologies

PAINTS, ADHESIVE AND SURFACE COATINGS (4 Credits)

Unit 1 Introduction to Paints

Industrial paint resins: Alkyd, epoxy, polyesters and polyurethanes, Acrylics, silicones and

chlorinated rubber.

Pigment and its dispersion: Types of pigments, factors affecting pigment dispersion,

Preparation of pigment dispersion: grinding equipments, additives for pigment dispersion.

Unit 2 Surface preparation and paint application: Surface cleaning methods: mechanical cleaning,

solvent cleaning, alkali cleaning and acid pickling, Chemical conversion treatments:

Phosphating and chromating, Paint application methods: brushing, dip coating and flow

coating, curtain coating, roller coating and spray painting, electro deposition, chemiphoretic

deposition.

Paint Properties and Evaluation: Mechanism of film formation, Factors affecting coating

properties, methods used for film formation. Evaluation of mechanical, optical, ageing,

rheological, corrosion, adhesion properties of coatings and Pigment to binder ratio calculation

(PBR).

Unit 3 Industrial Coatings: Introduction, role, chemistry, types, formulations and applications.

Appliance finishes, automotive finishes, coil coating, can coating, marine coating and aircraft

coating, industrial protective coatings, Water borne coatings, radiation curable coatings,

powder coatings, High solids coatings, Smart Paint Technology, Trouble shooting, Color

Science/Technology.

Unit 4 Introduction – Fundamentals of adhesives, Advantages and disadvantages of adhesive

bonding, classification of adhesives, theories of adhesion, Requirements of good bond,

mechanism of bond failure.

Surface preparation for adhesive bonding: Nature of substrate surfaces, Surface treatment,

passive and active surface preparation methods.

Design of joints: Types of stress, factors effecting on joint efficiency, Common adhesive joint

design- for flat adherends, stiffening joints, cylindrical joints, angle and corner joints, plastic

and elastomer joints, wood joints.

Unit 5 Structural and Non structural adhesives: Epoxies, PF, UF, MF. Natural rubber (NR), poly

ester based (unsaturated polyester), silicone, acrylics (reactive, aerobic, anaerobic and cyano

acrylics), polyurethane, poly vinyl acetate and ethylene vinyl acetate copolymer.

Testing and quality control of adhesives - Tensile test, Peel tests, lap shear test, cleavage

test, fatigue test, impact test, creep test and environmental tests.

Application of adhesives – In Structural application, electrical and electronic industry, wood

industry, bio adhesives and automobile industry.

References:

1. Swaraj Paul, Surface coatings; Science and Technology, 2nd edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,

1995.

2. R Lambourne and T R Strivens, Paint and Surface Coatings. Theory and practice, 2nd edition,

Woodhead Publishing Limited, 1999.

3. Lucas F. M. da Silva, Andreas Öchsner, Robert Adams, Handbook of Adhesion Technology,

Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, 2011.

4. Charles V. Cagle, Henry Lee, Kris Neville, Handbook of adhesive bonding- Mc Graw` Hill. McGraw

Hill, 1973.

5. J. Shields, Adhesives Hand Book, Butterworths and Co.,1984

6. R.Houwink and G.Solomon, Adhesion and Adhesives, Elsevier, Amsterdam, London, NY 1965.

7. Irving Skeist, Handbook of Adhesives, Springer, US, 2011.

8. Hanbook of Adhesives and Sealants- Ed. by Edward M Petrie, Mc Grew-Hill, New York, 2000.

Handbook of Adhesive Technology – Ed. By A.Pizzi and Mittal. Marcel Dekker Inc., New york 1994

*****